º, THACKER'S
A$5.
, D9.
GUIDE BOOK
DARJEELING
—Q-Re-Cº-º-º-
THACKER, SPINK & CO.,
CAT&M, JA,
SITY OF MICHIGAN
GENERAL LIBRARY
“Under the Patronage Of
H. E. the COMMANDER-IN-CHIFF in INDIA
and LADY ROBERTS.”
W00DIHNDS HOTEL,
D A R J E E L | N G
Open all the Year Round.
Centrally situated, within two minutes' walk of the
Railway station, and commands one of the F/WEST V/EWS
of the SNOWY RANGE in Darjeeling.
Tennis Court, Billiard-Room, Piano, and a good selection of
English and Country Papers.
Patronised by thousands of distinguished Ladies and Gentlemen.
Specially recommended by J. M. COOK, Esq. (of Messrs.
Thomas Cook and Son), who stayed here during his
recent visit to India.
THE GOVERNMENT BUNGALOW AT SENCHAL,
VISITORS to “WOODLANDS" enjoy special facilities
for visiting Senchal Mountain (6 miles from Darjeeling,
and 8,610 feet above the level of the Sea), the only place
near Darjeeling from whence a Good View of MOUNT
EVEREST, the Highest Mountain in the World, is to be
obtained.
Reliable Ponies supplied from the Hotel Stables. Daks
and Coolies arranged for Trips to Tongloo, Sundukpho,
and Phullut. Picnic Parties, Balls, Suppers, &c., supplied.
For terms, &c., apply to
C. ROBERTS.
Cook's Hotel Conſºons Acceſſed. (D)
orth Poirot
* *
|
PATTABON G
... • *,
- sº N.
touxD H\l L SID
\s N º
BBERY ... -->
Ö. \/\;=\º
º |RNS S
*/SY JOSEPH'S SCH
NS • *. •.
*Assemålºad *
TOWN HALL.Nº *s ;” BHUTIA BA $ T!
ST ANDREWSN. A Z'
º QBSERVATORY
- /
2"
& -
*Nº exºns EDEN'sANITARIUM § A PONDAM
raiebensrnali - i ... --
Óld Kºdchºyſ/W. P-
MARKET ºf CLUB
/ - Z BEECH wºod • ºf 7-
./ 'lowiš Jubilee º !
J
N10N CHAPEL
f
es [] SY Pºuls SCHOOL
t
|
NAT vey cº-
º
§ h : t , b & a p
O F
DARJºšLING
Scale 2 Inches = 1 Mile,
|OOO 500 º } 000 2 OOO 3000 4 OOO 5 O OO oppo
*— | ſ I K & º h
TTTTTTIIL II I I L–. l I T.
*
mºism
Litho. Thacker Spink & Co, Calcutta.






















DARJEELING BOARDING HOUSE
“ROCKWILLE.”.
This well-known and popular House is the oldest
and longest established of any in Darjeeling, hav-
ing been opened in April 1867, when there was not
so much as a Dák Bungalow in the station for the
accommodation of Travellers, and from that time to
this, over a period of 23 years, has sustained an un-
rivalled reputation for cleanliness, excellent cuisine,
and real home comforts. Charmingly situated on a
ridge and on the favorite side of the station, it com-
mands glorious views on all sides, and is known
throughout Bengal as possessing the finest and
healthiest site of any house of the kind in Darjeeling.
It is surrounded by good verandahs, which are a
great boon during the rainy season, especially for
children, who are thus enabled to enjoy fresh air and
exercise without exposure to the rain. The charges
are moderate, and rooms can be engaged by the day,
month or season. For further particulars, apply to
Proprietress, “ROCKVILLE."

Jºllisi) & Huiſmål,
PHOTOGRAPHERS,
H A D H A M L O D G E ,
DARJEELING,
AN ID
CALCUTTA AND SIMLA.
GOLD MEDALLISTS,
CALGUTTA PHOTOGRAPHIG EXHIBITION,
1887–88.
A Splendid Series of Darjeeling Views,
including some of the finest Pictures of
the Snows, in existence.
Price Rs. 15 per dozen.
CA. TALOGUES ON APPL/CA TVOAV.
(Iljacker's Hijaubbockg of #inbogtan.
DARJEELING.
CALCUTTA :
PRINTED BY THACKER, SPINK AND CO.
THACKER'S GUIDE BOOK”
TO

DARJEELING
_A. INTI) ITS INTEIG-TEITEOTUTIEEEIOOID
BY
EDMUND MITCHELL, M.A.
With Zwo Maps,
(g #1 t t t t it :
TH A C K ER, SPINK & Co.
BOMBAY : THACKER & Co., LD. LONDON : W. THACKER & Co.
1891.
CHAPTER I
35
9 3
3 3
2 3
33
2 3
II.
III.
IV.
XII.
XIII.
CONTENTS.
Historical Q Q e * I—7.
The Journey to the Hills ... tº º ſº tº tº º 8–15
The Aboriginal Tribes of Sikkim ..., I6–32
Botanical Features ... tº gº tº e Q a ... 33–42
Natural History and Geology Q & © 43–5 I
Rivers and Mountains 52–60
The Station of Darjeeling 61–73
The European and Native Sanitariums ... 74–81
Educational Establishments for Europeans 82–85
Municipal and District Administration 86–91
Darjeeling as a Health Resort 92—IOO
Excursions . . . IOI-I2O
Agriculture, Manufactures, and Trade . I2I–I4O
5, 2
INDEX
. I4 I-144
%20% . . J)S
# !. ...' }. zºº
** º ... [. ſ/ , // 4 & / º
. . . . . . . . f , JD 9-
- N\lo
CHAPTER I.
HISTORICAL.
Our first connection with Sikkim—Cession of the ZXarjeeling
gº) Hill Station—A Sanitarium Established—Progress of
V the Station—Quarrel with Sikkim—Dr. Campbell and
S. Dr. Hooker made Captive—Their Release—Annexation
s of Territory—Opening of Æailways--Grozwth of the Tea
s Industry—Cinchona Cultivation—Trade with Mepaul,
\ Sikkim, and Tibet—The recent Sikkim Expedition—Hima-
º Jayan Hill ºribes.
> THE history of Darjeeling constitutes a recent chap-
ter in the extension of British rule. Up to 1815 the land
was practically a terra incognita. In that year the Nepaulese,
or Goorkhas as they are more frequently termed, raided
the territory of the Rajah of Sikkim, and by the next year
had driven him from his throne. His cause was espoused
by the East India Company, and eventually, in 1817, the
deposed Prince was restored to power, and the aggressive
Nepaulese were compelled to withdraw within their own
borders. A treaty was entered into between the Company
and the Rajah, by which the Sovereign rights of the latter
were guaranteed on the understanding that Sikkim should
become a Protected State, the ally of Great Britain, and
owning no allegiance to any other Government. The
object of this treaty was to retain Sikkim as a buffer state
between Nepaul and Bhutan, as otherwise the probabilities
D. G. I
2 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
were that the whole strip of Himalayan country would be
overrun and occupied by the war-like Goorkhas. In 1828
Sikkim again attracted notice, when a frontier dispute arose
with Nepaul. According to the treaty, the question at issue
was referred to the British Government, and through its
agency the matter was amicably settled. To conduct these
negotiations, a gentleman of high Scientific attainments,
Mr. J. W. Grant, together with an officer of the Bengal Army,
Captain Lloyd, visited the country, and it was they who first
conceived the idea of establishing a sanitarium at Darjeeling.
They brought the proposal under the notice of Lord William
Bentinck, then Governor-General, pointing out the eligibi-
lity of the site, the favourable nature of the climate, the
proximity to Calcutta and the accessibility of the place, its
central position between Nepaul, Tibet, Bhutan, and British
India, and the good example a peaceably-conducted and
well - governed station would be to the turbulent hill tribes
in the neighbourhood. The suggestion was well received,
and, as a first step towards acting upon it, an officer was
sent to make a survey of the Sikkim Hills. This was com-
pleted in 1830, and negotiations were thereupon entered
into with the Rajah for the cession, in return for a money
equivalent, of a tract of country which should include Dar-
jeeling. His first demand was unreasonable; but on fur-
ther consideration he agreed to hand over all the land, 138
square miles in extent, south of the Great Rungeet river,
east of the Balasan, Kakail, and Little Rungeet rivers, and
west of the Rangmi and Mahanada rivers, for a sum of
Rs. 3,000, afterwards increased to Rs. 6,ooo per annum.
This tract was formally ceded to the British in 1835.
Darjeeling soon became a favourite summer retreat for the
officials of Lower Bengal and their families, and it was also
established as a sanitarium for invalided European soldiers.
HISTORICAL. 3
In 184o Dr. Campbell was removed from Nepaul, to be
superintendent of the new station, and was entrusted with
the political relations between the British and Sikkim Gov-
ernments. When Dr. Campbell took charge there were
only twenty families in the whole tract, but under his ener-
getic management, extended over a period of twenty-two
years, the settlement made rapid progress. He constructed
roads and bridged torrents; built a bazar, a cutchery (or
court-house), and a church; established a convalescent depôt
for soldiers at Senchal, afterwards removed to Jalapahar;
introduced English flowers and fruits; experimented on the
cultivation of the tea plant; encouraged commerce; and
created a revenue. Meanwhile, allotments of land were
purchased by Europeans for building dwelling-houses, and
a few official residents, civil and military, formed the nucleus
of a community which was increased by retired officers and
their families and by temporary visitors in search of health,
or the luxury of a cold climate.
All went well for some years, but at last a new Prime
Minister, or Dewan, a Tibetan, becam - the adviser of the
Rajah of Sikkim. This man Dr. Hooker, in his “Himalayan
Journals,” describes as being unsurpassed for insolence and
avarice, his chief aim being to monopolize the trade of the
country, and to enrich himself at its expense. He made it
his business to throw every obstacle in the way of a good
understanding between the Rajah and the British Govern-
ment. British subjects were excluded from Sikkim ; every
liberal offer for free-trade and intercourse was rejected,
generally with insolence; merchandize was taxed; notori-
ous offenders, refugees from the British territories, were har-
boured ; despatches were detained ; and the Rajah's re-
presentatives were chosen for their overbearing manners
and incapacity. Dr. Campbell was compelled to proceed
*
4 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
on the plan of simply offering a passive resistance to this
aggressiveness and insolence, as the Calcutta authorities
showed no intention of meeting the Dewan's policy by firm
retaliatory measures. This attitude was, of course, in true
native fashion, construed as weakness, and the arrogance
and high-handedness of the Tibetan Prime Minister and
his following in Sikkim grew still more pronounced. The
origin of this dispute early in the '30s, and of the recent
Sikkim war towards the close of the '80s, is wonderfully
similar. In both Cases the Tibetan faction was at the
bottom of the mischief. Forbearance on our part was consi-
dered to be due to timidity, and petty insults grew to inso-
lent defiance.
Darjeeling, however, prospered despite these political
differences, and native families continued to pour into the
station to place themselves under British protection. In a
period of twelve to fifteen years from the cession of the
district, the population had grown from under a hundred to
over four thousand. A considerable trade had sprung up
with the surrounding states in musk, salt, gold-dust, borax,
soda, woollen cloths, and especially in ponies. The Tibet-
an pony, it may be explained, though born and bred Io, ooo
to 14, ooo feet above the level of the sea, is one of the
most active and useful animals in the plains of Bengal,
powerful and hardy, and when well trained early, docile,
although by nature inclined to be vicious and obstinate.
With a view to stimulate trade, Dr. Campbell had established
an annual fair at Titalya at the foot of the hills, which soon
became the resort of thousands of natives from all quarters,
and which at once exercised a beneficial influence through-
out the neighbouring territories, prizes in medals, money,
and kind for agricultural implements, produce, stock, &c.,
greatly stimulating both the dwellers on the plains and the
HISTORICAL, 5
hill-men to emulation and progress. In 1849, however, the
trouble with Sikkim reached a climax. Dr. Campbell and
Dr. Hooker were travelling unarmed and without an escort
in Sikkim territory on a botanical and geographical ex-
pedition. They had express permission from the Rajah to
make this tour, and were peaceably moving through the
country, when they were seized and imprisoned by the offi-
cials of the Rajah, acting at the direct instigation of the
Tibetan faction at Court. Dr. Campbell was most roughly
treated, being knocked down and bound hand and foot ; he
was also tortured by having the cords round his wrists
twisted by a bamboo wrench. The object of the Sikkim
Government in making this treacherous seizure was, admit-
tedly, for the purpose of extorting from the Government of
India a more favourable treaty than that then existing, the
plan of seizing the representative of a neighbouring power,
and confining him until he should become amenable to
terms being in those days commonly practised along the
Tibet, Sikkim, and Bhutan frontiers. The harsh treatment
meted out to Dr. Campbell, however, was more especially
due to the fact that the persons deputed to effect his cap-
ture were men whom he had formerly punished for crimes
against the Nepaulese and the British Governments, and
who took this opportunity of gratifying their vengeful
feelings. Dr. Hooker was treated quite differently, and in-
deed he was informed that he was free to continue his
botanizing expedition. But he would not desert his friend,
and the two prisoners were marched to Tumloong, the capi-
tal of Independent Sikkim. The moment the news reached
Calcutta, a military expedition was despatched to rescue the
prisoners and avenge the insult. When the Dewan heard the
news of large bodies of troops concentrating at Darjeeling,
he became thoroughly alarmed. The Rajah, moreover,
6 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
now feigned to repudiate his Prime Minister's action, de-
claring that he was very angry at the seizure and detention
of the Englishmen. In the result the captives were marched
to within twenty miles of Darjeeling, and were then provid-
ed with ponies and allowed to go their way. They reached
Darjeeling without further adventure, Dr. Hooker relating
that when he arrived one night at eight o’clock at the house
of his friend Mr. Hodgson, the great oriental scholar and
ethnologist, he was at first taken for a ghost, but afterwards
received with shouts of welcome. It cannot be said that the
British authorities acted with much decision after the release
of the prisoners. The Rajah was ordered to give up the
most notorious offenders, and come himself to Darjeeling,
on pain of an army marching to Tumloong to enforce the de-
mand. He, however, pleaded his inability to fulfil these
demands ; but announced that he had forbidden the cul-
prits his court, had disgraced and turned the Dewan out of
office, reducing him to poverty, and really had not it in his
power to do more. Our threats were then modified into a
seizure of the Terai lands of the state, the whole Southern
part of Sikkim also being annexed, between the Great Run-
geet river and the plains of India, and from Nepaul on the
west to the Bhutan frontiers and the Teesta river on the
east. In all about 640 square miles were acquired on this
occasion. The Rajah’s allowance was also discontinued, but
afterwards, on friendly assurances, restored, and increased
to Rs. 12, ooo a year. Finally, in 1864, the Darjeeling Dis-
trict was further augmented by the cession of a hilly tract,
486 Square miles in area, east of the Teesta, which had
become British territory as the result of the Bhutan cam-
paign of that year. The total area of Darjeeling thus be-
came extended to 1,234 Square miles.
From 185o up to quite recent times nothing occurred to
HISTORICAL. 7
interrupt the prosperity of Darjeeling. Its popularity as a
Sanitarium steadily increased, despite the rival attraction
of Simla and other hill stations in Northern India. The
first regular tea-garden was opened in 1856, and the busi-
ness extended with great rapidity, there being 39 gardens
established in 1866, 121 in 1875, 165 in 1883, and 174 at
the present time. The opening of the Northern Bengal
State Railway in 1878 and of the Mountain Railway in 1880,
and the resulting facilities for transporting the tea to
Calcutta, gave an immense stimulus to this great industry.
Cinchona cultivation, commenced in 1862 by Government,
has likewise proved a success, and is now carried on also
by private individuals, though as yet on a very small scale.
The local trade has greatly increased, the growth of the tea
plantations and the access of European inhabitants stimu-
lating the demand. A great through trade is also carried
on with Nepaul, Sikkim, Tibet, and Bhutan, details of which
will be given in a subsequent chapter.
The races met with in the Darjeeling District are the
Mechis and the Kochs or Rajbansis (the people of Cooch
Behar) in the Terai ; the Lepchas or aboriginal inhabitants
of the hill country ; the Limboes, the Bhuteas or Kumpus,
the Moormis, the Magras, and other minor tribes from
Sikkim and Nepaul; the Dhurma people or Bhutanese from
Bhutan; the Nepaulese from Nepaul; and the Tibetans
from Tibet. A separate chapter is devoted to these deeply
interesting hill races of the Himalayas.
CHAPTER II.
THE JOURNEY TO THE HILLS.
Aſini's for the 7%aveller—Maihati /unction—Crossing the
Ganges—/alpaiguri—/ute Cultivation—Big Game in the
AWeighbourhood — Siliguri — The Mountain A'ailway—
The Terai—The Upward Ascent—A Marvellous Āail-
road—Magnificence of the Scenery—Kurseong—Z)azjeel-
ing—ZXistance Zºrazersed.
THE trip to Darjeeling is now-a-days accomplished with
the greatest comfort and ease, under circumstances very dif-
ferent from those ruling in the early years of the popularity
of the station, when the long winding ascent had to be made
by dåk palkees, hill ponies, or tonga carriages. Twenty-
four hours’ easy railway travelling transports the traveller
from Calcutta to Darjeeling, from the sea-level to cloud-
land, the total distance traversed being 369 miles, and the
actual perpendicular height gained 7,300 feet, or not far off
I}% miles. The traveller should journey by the mail train,
which leaves Sealdah Station, the Calcutta terminus of the
Eastern Bengal State Railway, in the afternoon, between
four and five o'clock—for the exact hour the periodically
issued railway time-tables should be consulted. It may be
noted that there are two scales of charges for return tickets,
the tariff being a fare and one-third when the return
journey is made within a period of eleven days; the other
return ticket issued at a fare and one-half, holds good for
four months. An excellent plan is to send all heavy
luggage forward a day before. The railway companies
THE JOURNEY TO THE HILLS. -9
make special arrangements for this, charging only half rate
for excess baggage thus despatched, namely, Rs. 3-5 instead
of Rs. 6-Io per maund. No free allowance, however, is
made in the case of such forward booking, so the traveller
should keep with him, the amount he is allowed to take
free of charge, namely, two maunds first class, or one maund
Second class, half this allowance being made for a child's
ticket of the respective classes. If this system be adopted,
all anxiety en route will be avoided, and the luggage will
be awaiting the visitor on his arrival at Darjeeling station.
Another point worthy of mention is that an invalid carriage
with Spring couch is provided on the Mountain Railway, and
an invalid chair on the steamer crossing the Ganges if notice
is given beforehand. It may further be added in connection
with the start from Sealdah that Madras time is kept on all the
railways, this being 33 minutes behind Calcutta local time.
The first portion of the railway journey is comparatively
uninteresting. Barrackpur is passed, and then for mile
after mile the traveller speeds through a monotonous
country, level as a billiard table, where rice is the staple
production. This vast plain, however, is not without its
beauties ; occasional clumps of palm and other trees, with
most likely a native bustee or hamlet peeping out from
their midst, break the view, and in the rainy season the
sea of vivid green stretching far as the eye can reach, is
decidedly impressive. After a run of three-quarters of an
hour Naihati is reached, the place being of importance
from the fact that here is the junction between the Eastern
Bengal State Railway and the East India Railway, the
latter making the connection with its main system by
means of the new bridge spanning the Hughli at the village
of the same name. The construction of this bridge by
Sir Bradford Leslie was a great engineering feat, and has
Ib GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
effected a railway link of first importance. After a little
over an hour from Naihati, a few minutes' stoppage is made
at Bogoola, where a cup of tea may be procured, and will be
found an excellent stay till dinner, which is obtained some
two and a half hours later on board the river steamer. Damuk-
dia Ghāt, where the boat lies, is reached after about four and a
half hours from Calcutta, the dinner hour being thus a most
convenient one. The Ganges here is from 2% miles to 3
miles broad, and the current is very powerful. Add to this
the fact that the banks are ever being eroded at places, and
that shifting sand-banks are constantly being formed, and
it will be understood that the difficulties of navigation are
by no means slight. In this connection it may be mentioned
that the point where the steamer now lies was formerly dry
land, in fact the embarking jetty itself; but the river swept
.it away, with its embankments, buildings, and railway sid-
ings. The point to be made for by the steamer, Sara Ghāt,
is exactly opposite, a group of twinkling lights marking it
to the eye. But a wide sweeping curve has to be made,
owing to the force of the current, and when the start is
effected, the steamer heads up stream. The navigation has
to be very cautious, men heaving the lead constantly on
both sides of the vessel. At this ferry across the Ganges
five passenger trips are made daily, and in the intervals the
steamers are employed towing across flats laden with pro-
duce from up-country and manufactured goods of all kinds
from Calcutta. The dinner on board is well-served, and if
the night be a moonlight one, the scene on the river is a
Strikingly beautiful one.
At Sara Ghât the Northern Bengal State Railway, complet-
ed in 1878, commences. The line is on the metre gauge,
and the carriages are consequently less spacious than on the
Eastern Bengal system, but by no means incommodious.
THE JOURNEY TO THE HILLS. II
The traveller will at once make preparations for sleep, a
rizai, or cotton-stuffed quilt, and pillows, being, it is taken
for granted, among his baggage. About seven o'clock in
the morning the traveller will have reached Jalpaiguri,
where he will find chota hazree prepared, the cup of tea being
most acceptable after the night's journey. During the hours
of darkness he has passed through the great jute-producing
district of Bengal. Jalpaiguri is an important centre of this
industry, and in the rainy season the fibre may be seen in
process of being steeped in the pools of water along the
sides of the railway. At this time of year also the traveller
will notice the platforms and other contrivances used by
the natives for catching fish, and he will also see rod and
line in the hands of many dusky urchins. Jalpaiguri is the
railway station for the district known as the Dooars, where
there are over 130 tea gardens, which send their produce
to this place for transport to Calcutta. A steam tramway
is in process of construction, which will tap this important
neighbourhood. Between Jalpaiguri and Siliguri a good
deal of tiger shooting is got every year. Away to the right,
towards Assam, stretches a vast and dense jungle, in which
big game of every kind, including elephants, is to be met
with in abundance. At Jalpaiguri there are sales two or
three times a year of elephants captured in the vicinity. At
this point the southern spurs of the Himalayan range are
in view, towering aloft, tree-clad to the summits, and fur-
rowed with sinuous river gorges, among which that of the
Teesta is plainly distinguishable. Siliguri, which is only
3oo feet above sea-level, is reached at a comfortable hour
for breakfast, and here the Mountain Railway begins.
The Darjeeling-Himalayan Railway undoubtedly ranks as
one of the marvels of engineering work throughout the
world. The gauge is two feet, and the line is laid with
I 2 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING."
heavy steel rails (40lbs. to the yard) in the most substantial
manner. The splendid hill cart-road—itself a magnificent
work that had cost £6,000 per mile to construct — was
adopted as the line of route, but since the railway was
originally opened, several parts have been relaid, frequent
deviations being made from the roadway with a view to
increase the radii of the curves. Thus at times the travel-
ler loses sight of the road, but it is always soon picked up
again. The speed of the trains is not allowed to exceed
7 miles an hour, though more than double that rate has on
occasion been easily obtained. The ascent is about I, ooo
feet every hour, and the air gets gradually cooler and cooler,
till in the afternoon top-coats and wraps are gladly resorted
to. The journey occupies about seven hours, Darjeeling
being reached between four and five o'clock. This railway,
it may be mentioned, was constructed in 1879-81, the initial
cost being only 24, 3, ooo per mile—a wonderfully small sum
when all the engineering difficulties are considered, though,
of course, the fact of there being already a strong and well
consolidated roadway greatly reduced the expense. With
the subsequent expenditure on the line the total cost per
mile, up to 31st December 1886, amounted to Rs. 52,702.
The whole of the capital of the company, close on 27
lakhs of rupees, including debentures, has been taken up
in India, the railway being the first great public work built
by money subscribed in the country.
To resume the thread of the journey at Siliguri. After
breakfast, the traveller will inspect the curious little train he
is to travel by. It strikes one at first sight as if it were
nothing more nor less than a toy railway, and it seems incre-
dible that the tiny little engine will ever drag its load up to
the summit of the mountains towering overhead. How-
ever, the sturdy piece of mechanism gives proof of its
THE JOURNEY TO THE HILLS. I3
capabilities, as it skims along the 7 miles of level tract known
as the Terai. This is low-lying swampy ground, a breeding
place of malarious fever, but much improved of late years
by the laying out of well-drained tea-gardens. “Terai" is
a Persian word meaning “damp.” Geographically the belt
belongs to the plains of India ; politically, it appertains to
the hill-states beyond ; geologically, it is a sort of neutral
country, being composed neither of the alluvium of the
plains, nor of the rocks of the hills, but for the most part of
alternating beds of Sand, gravel, and boulders brought down
from the mountains, the Soil being generally light, dry, and
gravelly; botanically, it may be described as a region of
forest-trees, amongst which the Săl, the most valuable of In-
dian timber, is conspicuous in most parts, though not in Bri-
tish Sikkim (through which the railway runs), where it has
been used up or destroyed. The Terai belt extends from the
Sutlej to Brahma-koond in Upper Assam, skirting the base of
the Himalayas, and varying in breadth from ten miles on
the Sikkim frontier to thirty or more on the Nepaulese. It is
inhabited by a race called the Mechis, who stand the malari-
ous climate with impunity, and are indeed healthier here than
when they wander up into the hill-country. Soon after Sili-
guri is left behind, the Mahanadi river is crossed, flowing
in a shallow valley, over a pebbly bottom ; the current is very
rapid at all seasons of the year, the water is limpid as Crystal,
and the banks are fringed with a continuous line of bushes,
Tea-plantations are passed to right and left of the railway,
the bungalows of the planters being a pretty feature of the
scene. After seven miles from Siliguri the ascent commences,
a sharp rise of about three miles leading to a short flat, or
spur, from which the Himalayas rise abruptly, clothed in
forest from their base. The incline now becomes Sudden
and steep, and the track begins to wind about and double
I4. GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
and zigzag in a manner that is bewildering and amazing.
No words can adequately describe the first sensation of tra-
velling by this railway. . The little engine pants and puffs,
and the carriages wind after it round the sickle-shaped curves
like a sinuous serpent. Seated about the centre of the
train, you find the engine now to right of you, and a mo-
ment afterwards it is on the left. Onwards and upwards
you mount; at times you can see the track hundreds of feet
beneath you, and can only wonder how you ever got from
that point to this. Occasionally the train darts under a
bridge, and a minute afterwards, describing an almost per-
fect circle, crosses over it. When a spur is reached that
forbids the possibility of a curve, the figure 2 is described,
the train running along a siding, and the engine, after a
momentary halt, backing the carriages up the central bar of
the figure. The operation hardly takes two minutes, and in
a trice the train is speeding along again, parallel to the old
track, but twenty or thirty feet higher up the mountain side.
But all this must be seen for its marvellous ingenuity to be
appreciated. Meanwhile, the traveller will also be struck
with admiration for the Superbly magnificent scenery above,
around, and beneath him. No spectacle in the world is
more grand. Lofty peaks tower overhead, usually with fleecy
clouds dotting out the green with white, and here and there
some taller Summit disappearing quite into cloud-land.
To right and left of your level, dense deep-green forests
everywhere meet the eye, clothing continuously the steep
slopes, and ever and anon dipping into some gorge, down
which rushes an impetuous stream, a cascade, perhaps, with
an overhanging cloud of spray adding to the beauty of the
spectacle. Away below lies the vast plain stretching like a
great Sea as far as the eye can reach, with spurs of lofty moun-
tains forming a serrated edge, and the innumerable rivulets
THE JOURNEY TO THE HILLS. I5
from the hills uniting into streams whose devious courses
glisten like silver threads. A mighty and glorious panorama,
which, once seen, can never fade from the memory.
With every turn and bend of the railway, a new scene
bursts on the view, and as hour succeeds hour the endless
variety keeps the eye from tiring. The vast expanse of
foliage is broken here and there by tea-gardens, whose pretty
little bungalows nestle on the hill sides. Meanwhile, the
air grows more rarified and more bracing, and the change
from the clammy atmosphere of Lower Bengal is complete
When Kurseong is reached about two o'clock, a sharp appe
tite will have been developed for tiffin ; this is served in
excellent style at the Clarendon Hotel, opposite which the
train pulls up. It is now twenty miles to Darjeeling, and
the elevation is 4,860 feet above sea-level. The journey is re-
sumed through the most magnificent Scenery. The forest-
clad valleys beneath the railway descend thousands of feet,
the slope at times being almost precipitous. If it is a clear
day the snowy range of the Himalayas is also in view, the
first sight of which, with clear cut peaks of dazzling white,
towering in silent stupendous majesty into the sky, cannot
but create a profound impression. Four miles from Dar-
jeeling is Ghoom, 7,372 feet high, the most elevated railway
station in the Old World. From this point the line descends
a few hundred feet towards its terminus at Darjeeling.
The following are the distances that have been traversed
in the four stages from Calcutta :—
Calcutta to Damukdia Ghât ... I 2 o miles.
Across the Ganges tº e ſº 2%. ,
Sara Ghât to Siliguri ... I 96 j 5
Siliguri to Darjeeling ... 50%
33
Total ... 369
CHAPTER III.
THE ABORIGINAL TRIBES OF SIKKIM.
The Mongol Type of Countenance—Heterogeneous AWature of
the Population — The Mechis of the Terai — Physique,
Manners, and Customs—A Curious Marriage Ceremony—
The Kochs or Rajbansis—Hill Tribes—The Zepchas—
Their Physical and Mental Qualities, Mode of Life, Cloth-
ing, Ornaments, Adeligious Beliefs, &c.—Anecdote of a
Aleftcha Bay—The Zimboes—The Bhuteas—The AVefaulese
—The Tibetan Abroad—Dr. Hooker on the Himalayan
Aborigines—The Zanguages of Darjeeling—A Polyglot
Community,
ON arrival at Siliguri nothing strikes the traveller more
than the marked change in the cast of feature of the natives.
The Mongolian type of countenance, with broad face and
flattened nose, at once arrests attention. As the hills are
ascended men of the different Mongolian races become
more numerous, Lepchas, Limboes, Nepaulese, Bhuteas,
and Tibetans, and the traveller finds himself among a
population wholly different in appearance and in customs
from the people of the Bengal plains.
The first special tribe met with are the Mechis, who are
found solely in the Terai, or sub-montane strip of territory,
and have strongly-marked Mongolian features. They are
divided into two clans, the Bodas and the Dhimals, who are
alike in every respect except that they occupy different
THE ABORIGINAL TRIBES OF SIKKIM. 17
villages and live apart. They are a mild inoffensive people,
industrious for Orientals, living by cultivating cleared spots
in the forests and by Collecting jungle products for sale.
They are nomadic in their habits, seldom occupying the
same field beyond a year, and frequently burning down
patches of jungle for the purpose of cultivating the soil
thus cleared. This latter practice, however, is gradually
being put a stop to, and the people are becoming more
settied in their habits, the establishment of the great tea
industry in the Terai partly conducing to this result. The
Mechis seem to be the only race that can stand the mala-
rious climate of the Terai with impunity. They have some-
times been described as a squalid, unhealthy tribe, typical
of the region they inhabit; but the fact is otherwise, for,
though stunted in stature, they are a robust people, their
disagreeably Sallow complexion being deceptive as indicat-
ing a sickly constitution. A curious fact is, that when Mechis
migrate to the hills for a season of labour in the tea-gardens
there, they die off rapidly, but in their own swampy jungles
they are rarely victims to fever. They cultivate cotton,
oil-seeds, &c., and rear for their own food goats, pigs,
poultry, and pigeons. They also possess a few cows, but
have neither sheep nor buffaloes. They barter with the
surrounding tribes for the few earthen or iron pots they
require for cooking, agricultural implements, &c. They have
no special handicraftsmen or shop-keepers amongst them,
each family building its own house, fashioning its own
rough furniture, making its own garments, cultivating its own
patch, and generally supplying all its own wants. Their
dwelling-places are neatly constructed of jungle grass and
bamboo, The women spin, weave, and dye the family
garments, the dress being a shawl and loin-cloth of cotton,
white or dyed. They also brew a sort of light beer from
D. G. 2
18 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
millet-seed, called murzwaſ, which they drink in large quanti-
ties. It is a refreshing drink taken warm, and tasting some-
thing like sherry negus, rather sour; it is not intoxicating,
unless a person regelarly fuddles himself with it. The women
wear small silver rings in their noses and ears, and heavy
bracelets of mixed metal, for which they barter their oil-
seeds, &c., in the Cooch Behar markets. Rice is their
staple food, which they cook with oil, salt, chillies, &c. They
are an omnivorous race, however, and nothing comes amiss,
whether it be the flesh of wild hog, wild buffalo, rhinoceros,
civet cat, porcupine, or mongoose They also eat fish,
showing a preference for this article of diet when it is in a
putrid state. They are hospitable both among themselves
and to strangers, but, living in Sequestered and isolated
spots, are shy of intrusion, though they rather court than
avoid intercourse with those whites whom they know to be
kindly disposed.
Their religion consists chiefly in the worship of the sun,
moon, stars, and terrestrial elements; of these last the rivers,
whose benefits they are fully sensible of, being chiefly held
in reverence. They have a few household gods, to whom
they make offerings of milk, honey, parched rice, eggs,
flowers, and fruits, while they also occasionally sacrifice a
pig, a goat, or a fowl. They pray to their gods to avert
disasters of all kinds, and they hold festivals of thanksgiving
when their corps are safely housed. They have priests
among them, one class of whom are paid to exorcise spirits.
Marriage takes place only when the parties are adults, the
man being from twenty to twenty-five years and the woman
from fifteen to twenty. The bride has to be paid for, the
parents receiving from Rs, Io to Rs. 45 from the suitor, who,
if he does not possess the wherewithal to at once complete
the purchase, has to make up the amount in labour for his
THE ABORIGINAL TRIBES OF SIKKIM. I9
father-in-law elect. The chief part of the marriage cere-
mony is the sacrifice of a cock and a hen, the bridegroom
holding the former in his hands, and the bride the latter.
With one stroke of a knife the priest severs the heads of
both fowls, and the direction in which the blood spurts out
serves as an omen as to the happiness or unhappiness of
the match. The Mechis are reputed to be kind husbands
and fathers, and also to show a good deal of filial affection.
They evince a simple and devout reverence for the dead,
inter the bodies amidst solemn silence, mark the graves by
piles of large Stones and boulders, and place upon them
food and drink for the deceased. After the funeral cere-
mony they hold a feast, and eat, drink, and make merry.
Altogether, the Mechis, though a primitive people, are very
far from being at the foot of the scale of civilization among
the aboriginal races of India.
The Kochs or Rajbansis, properly the people of Cooch
Behar, are very numerous in the Terai Sub-division. This
semi-aboriginal tribe first rose into power about the close of
the fifteenth or beginning of the sixteenth century, Cooch
Behar becoming their metropolis. Brahmanism was intro-
duced among the higher ranks, but the lower orders of the
race being refused a decent status in the Hindoo caste sys-
tem, became Mahomedans. By the 1881 census, there were
over 30,000 Rajbansis in the Darjeeling Terai. They are
cultivators, fishermen, and labourers.
Ascending now to the hill-country, we find a tribe called
the Lepchas, who are the primitive inhabitants of Sikkim,
which, of course, in its wider application also includes British
Sikkim or Darjeeling. Their physiogonomy is markedly
Tibetan in its character; their language is radically identi-
cal with Tibetan, though there are important points of
2O GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
difference; they wear their hais Tibetan fashion, plaited
into pig-tails; they have many customs in common with the
Tibetan race; and their religion, such as it is, is a modified
form of Buddhism. All these facts point conclusively to
the trans-Himalayan Origin of the Lepchas, though they
differ in many respects from their Tibetan prototypes. Still
this race, so long as its historical traditions go back,--a period
of three hundred years, has been hemmed into the Sikkim
tract of mountain country, barely sixty miles in breadth.
The Lepchas have a language of their own with wriiten
characters. They possess a tradition of the Flood, during
which a couple escaped to the top of the Mountain Ten-
dong, near Darjeeling. The Lepcha, unlike most moun-
taineers, is timid, peaceful, and no brawler, qualities which
contrats strongly with those possessed by his immediate
neighbours to the east and west, of whom the Goorkhas are
proverbially brave and warlike, and the Bhutanese noto-
riously cruel and quarrelsome. He is of short stature, four
feet eight inches to five feet, broad across the chest, and with
muscular arms, but small hands and slender wrists, The
face is broad, flat, and of eminently Tartar character, flat-
nosed and oblique-eyed, with no beard and little moustache,
The complexion is sallow, or often a clear olive. The hair
is plaited, the women wearing two long pig-tails and the
men only one, this being the most readily distinguish-
able mark between the sexes, as the similarity of garments
and the hairless faces of the men are apt to mislead the
stranger The lower limbs are powerfully developed, be-
fitting genuine mountaineers. The feet, like the hands, are
small. The Lepcha, though very womanish in the cast
of his countenance, has invariably a mild, frank, and even
engaging expression. The young girls are particularly
pleasant to look upon, not from any beauty of features, but
THE ABORIGINAL TRIBES OF SIKKIM. 2í
from their smiling faces and evident good nature. The
children also are bright, lively, laughing urchins. The old
women, however, are not so pleasing in appearance. The
Lepchas as a race show a particular aversion to cold water,
and neither their persons nor their garments can be describ-
ed as clean. If they conse to a river, however, they readily
take the opportunity of bathing, being very expert Swim-
mers. In disposition they are amiable and obliging, frank,
humorous, and polite ; in their address free and unre-
strained, and without a trace of the servility of the Hindus
They may be seen scampering about and playing like
children, the women often dealing out tremendous thumps
to the men in a good-humoured way. Their worst faults
are indolence and a £enchant for gambling. They are
honest folk, and receive pay or a present with a brusque
bow and thanks, and without the grumbling look the Bengal
coolie, handsomely remunerated, is accustomed to put on
in the hope of extracting more money. The Lepchas in-
variably carry a long, heavy, straight knife, called a Čán,
which serves them equally for plough, tooth-pick, table-
knife, hatchet, hammer, and sword, though to the last use
it is never known to be applied.
The Lepchas have a code of morals far above those
possessed by their Tibetan and Bhutanese neighbours,
polyandry being unknown among them, and polygamy, rare.
Considering the rigorous nature of the Sikkim climate, their
dress is very scanty. A cotton garment, with red and blue
stripes, wound round the body and reaching to the knee,
with a loose-sleeved woollen upper garment in the Coldest
season of the year, being all they wear. The dress of
the women is very similar to that of the men, a small sleeve-
less woollen cloak being added. Both sexes wear orna-
mental girdles round the waist, and their costume altogether
22 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING,
is quite unique and decidedly picturesque. The Lepchas
seldom wear hats; when they do, they are clumsy affairs
made out of platted strips of bamboo, extravagantly broad-
brimmed for rainy weather and conical in shape for the dry
season. They also construct a curious and ingenious sort
of umbrella out of a mat of plaited bamboo, doubled across
and sewn at one corner of the fold; into this corner the head
is thrust, and the body is then admirably protected right
down to the thighs, while both hands are left quite free.
The women wear a profusion of ornaments, silver hoops
in their ears, necklaces of cornelian, amber, and turquoise
brought from Tibet, pearls and corals from the south, with
curious silver and golden charm boxes or amulets attached
to their necks or arms. These last are of Tibetan work-
manship, often of great beauty and highly ornamented, and
of considerable intrinsic value ; they contain little idols,
charms of written prayers, or the bones, hair, or nail-pairings
of a Lama. When a Lepcha woman puts on full dress, her
upper cloak is of gay pattern, usually covered with Crosses,
and fastened in front by a girdle of silver chains ; her neck
is loaded with silver chains, amber necklaces, &c., and her
head adorned with a coronet of scarlet cloth, studded with
seed-pearls, jewels, glass-beads, &c. This costume is extreme-
ly ornamental and picturesque.
The Lepchas are gross feeders; they eat anything and
everything, whatever they can find, animal or vegetable,
snails, caterpillars, fungi, and leaves being included in
their dietary. A coarse pink-coloured rice, grown without
irrigation and gelatinous when cooked, is their chief suste-
nance. Pork they are inordinately fond of, and they do
not scorn the carcases of cattle which have died of disease.
Their cooking is coarse and dirty : Spices, oils, salt, &c.,
are added as relishes. They drink out of little wooden
THE ABORIGINAL TRIBES OF SIKKIM. 23
cups, turned from knots of mapel or other woods ; these
are curious and very pretty, often polished, and mounted
with silver. Their intoxicating drink is made from partially
fermented murzvah grain. They are very fond of tea, and
drink it in the English fashion with milk and sugar when
these commodities are procurable. They also use large
quantities of the brick tea manufactured in China for the
Tibet market, this being made into a semi-solid liquid with
butter, soda, and salt added. The only musical instru-
ment they possess is a rude flute made of the bamboo,
with which, however, they play tunes that are by no means
inharmonious. When travelling, or after the fatigues of
the day, the Lepcha will sit for hours chatting, telling
stories, singing in a monotonous tone, or making music
with his flute. Their marriages are contracted in child-
hood, the wife being purchased by money or by labour
rendered to the future father-in-law. The marriage tie is
strictly kept. All the labours of the house, the field, the
march, devolve on the women and children, and the men
may frequently be seen rocking the tiny bamboo cradle,
while the women are hoeing, digging, delving, tending the
live-stock, &c. Among these people vaccination is eagerly
sought after, as they have a horror of small-pox, cruelly
shunning persons who may chance to become infected with
the disease. Disease of any kind, however, is rare among
the Lepchas, though they are subject to rheumatism and to
intermittent fevers, with ague, caused by sleeping in the hot
valleys at the beginning and the end of the rains. They
have a particular dread of death. Their dead are burned
or buried, sometimes both, much depending on custom and
rank. In religion the Lepchas are marvellously mixed up,
and may be described as Buddhist-Hindu-Demonolators.
Each tribe has a priest-doctor, or exorcist, who by prayers
24 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
and invocations drives out the devils, which are supposed
to be the originators of all bodily ailments. These priests
profess mendicancy, and sing, dance, beg, bless, Curse, and,
masked and draped like harlequins, often play the part of
merry mountebanks. Those that affect more of the Lama
Buddhist carry the “Mani,” or revolving praying-machine,
and wear rosaries and amulets; others again are all tatters
and rags. Good and evil spirits are devoutly believed in,
and the latter, who are supposed to dwell in every mountain,
rock and grove, are conciliated by prayers. Altogether the
Lepchas may be summed up as a race conspicuous for
their honesty, their power as carriers and mountaineers,
their skill as woodsmen, and their unfailing cheerfulness of
disposition. Numerically weak, it is well that they are
not of a pugnacious character, otherwise they would have
been long since exterminated by their turbulent neighbours
in Nepaul and Bhutan. The women, it may be added,
make excellent children's servants, and the men are not
averse to turn their hands to any indoor work.
Dr. Hooker pays the following high tribute of praise to
the Lepchas :--“A more interesting and attractive com.
panion than the Lepcha I never lived with : cheerful, kind
and patient with the master to whom he is attached ; rude
but not savage, ignorant, and yet intelligent. With the
simple resource of a plain knife he makes his house and
furnishes yours, with a speed, alacrity, and ingenuity that
wile away that well-known long hour when the weary pilgrim
frets for his couch. In all my dealings with these people,
they proved scrupulously honest. Except for drunkenness
and carelessness, I never had to complain of any of the
merry troop ; some of whom, bare-headed and bare-legged,
possessing little or nothing save a cotton garment and a
long knife, followed me for many months, from the Scorching
THE ABORIGINAL TRIBES OF SIKKIM. 25
plains to the everlasting snows. Ever foremost in the
forest or on the bleak mountain, and ever ready to help to
carry, to encamp, collect, or cook, they cheer on the
traveller by their unostentatious zeal in his service, and
are spurs to his progress.” The great traveller also tells
the following touching anecdote of one of his Lepcha
boys —“I here found that I had lost a thermometer for
high temperatures, owing to a hole in the bag in which my
attendant carried those of my instruments which were in
constant use. It had been last used at the hot springs of
the Kinchinjhow glacier; and the poor lad was so concern-
ed at the mishap, that he came to me soon afterwards, with
his blanket on his back and a few handfuls of rice in a bag,
to make his salaam before setting out to search for it.
There was not a single inhabitant between Lachoong and
that dreary spot, and strongly against my wish he started,
without a companion. Three days afterwards he overtook
us at Keadom, radiant with joy at having found the instru-
ment: he had gone up to the hot springs, and vainly
Sought around them that evening; then rather than lose
the chance of a daylight search on his way back, he had
spent the cold October night in the hot zwater, without fire
or shelter, at 16, ooo feet above the sea. Next morning
his search was again fruitless; and he was returning discon-
solate, when he descried the brass case glistening between
two planks of the bridge crossing the river at Momay,
over which torrent the instrument was suspended. The Lep-
chas are generally considered timorous of evil spirits, and
especially averse to travelling at night, even in company.
However little this gallant lad may have been given to
superstition, he was nevertheless a Lepcha, born in a warm
region, and had never faced the cold till he became my
servant ; and it required a stout heart and an honest one
26 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
to spend a night in so awful a solitude as that which
reigns around the foot of the Kinchinjhow glacier.”
Resembling the Lepchas in many respects, the Limboes
have several well-marked distinctive characteristics. They
are more sinuey and slender, and neither plait their hair
nor wear ornaments; instead of the Ödin, they wear in their
belts the Äußeri, or Nepaul curved knife, while for the strip-
ped kirtle of the Lepcha is substituted loose cotton trousers
and a tight jacket ; a sash is worn round the middle, and
On the head a small cotton cap. Their complexion also
is more yellow, and their eyes are smaller and more ob-
lique than in the case of the Lepchas. The Limboes
formerly ruled over East Nepaul, and were driven from
their strongholds by the Goorkhas. They are a brave and
Warlike race, reputed also to be very cruel, putting the
old and the weak, women and children indiscriminately
to the sword, Many of them are to be found in our Goor-
kha regiments. Their customs resemble those of the Lep-
chas, with whom they intermarry. They mourn for, burn,
and bury their dead, raising a mound over the corpse,
erecting a head-stone, and surrounding the grave with a
little paling of sticks; they then scatter eggs and pebbles
Over the ground. The Limboes are Buddhists, and they
have priests of a higher order than those of the Lepchas.
Their marriage ceremony is similar to that of the Mechis
of the Terai, a cock and a hen being decapitated by the
priest, and omens read from the blood. Like most hill
tribes they practise polyandry. The Limboo language is
different to the Lepcha, and unlike the latter, has no written
characters.
Another aboriginal tribe named the Bhuteas are found
in considerable number throughout Darjeeling. They are
the hewers of wood and drawers of water, taking Service
THE ABORIGINAL TRIBES OF SIKKIM. 27
as porters, dandy-bearers, &c. It is to be observed that
the term “Bhuteas" does not mean the natives of Bhutan ;
the latter are called Bhutanese, or Dhurma people, in allu-
Sion to their spiritual chief, the Dhurma Rajah, or sovereign
pontiff of Bhutan, and spiritual head of the red-capped
sect of Lama Buddhist. The Bhuteas are of several
classes, some coming from Tibet and others from Bhutan, a
third clan being indigenous to Sikkim (though undoubtedly
former emigrants from Tibet); and a fourth being a cross
between the Tibetan-Bhutea and the Lepcha. The Tibetan-
Bhutea is the best of the lot, but he is turbulent and
cruel, and of his morals the less said the better. The
Bhutan or Dhurma Bhuteas are most commonly seen at
Darjeeling. They are the coolies and drudges, doing most
of the real hard work of the place. The Sikkim Bhuteas,
also called Arrats, are a turbulent and drunken lot, a re-
mark which also applies to the mongrel class, who are
known as Sharpa Bhuteas. To take all the varieties to-
gether, it may be said generally that the Bhuteas are a
most filthy race. Their sole attire is a long loose woollen
robe, confined at the waist by a belt or a rag of unknown
hue. The upper part of this garment forms a receptacle,
into which they cram all sorts of incongruous articles, in-
cluding often putrid fish or meat, which they use as a relish
with their food. They carry long knives in their belts.
Both men and women wear silver rings set with turquoises
and square amulets of gold and silver upon their necks,
and on their arms above the elbow ; in their ears large
round earrings, often of solid gold, and so heavy that they
drag down the lobe of the ear in a very ugly manner.
The women also load their necks with strings of coral and
glass-beads, also pieces of amber, glass, and agate. These
ornaments simply represent the savings and worldly wealth
28 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
of the individuals who wear them. The Bhuteas of both
Sexes are tall and of large frame, and their capacity for car-
rying heavy loads is marvellous. They usually carry their
burdens by means of a strap fastened across the forehead,
a practice which is said to conduce to the prevalence of
goitre among them. They are a most industrious race.
The women spend most of their time, when not carrying
loads, in Spinning wool ; from this they weave a particu-
larly thick woollen cloth, of which they manufacture their
own garments. The Bhuteas keep large herds of cattle in
the Forest Reserves, and they bring into Darjeeling sup-
plies of milk and butter. Polyandry is a recognized insti-
tution among them. As a race they are devoid of delicacy
and modesty, and the marriage tie, where it exists at all,
has but Scanty respect paid to it. They are greatly given
to drunkerness, and distil all manner of alcoholic poisnos
from rice, wheat, and millet. Their religion is a sort of
depraved Buddhism ; they are followers of the red-capped
Sect of Lamas, and believe in the efficacy of the praying-
machine ; but they offer all sorts of propitiatory gifts to
evil spirits, and surround their houses with tall bamboo
flag-staffs, from which fly cotton streamers covered over
with block-type prayers for preservation against the “evil
one.” Some of the Bhuteas are nomadic in their habits,
migrating with the seasons with their herds of cattle. They
are the medium of a large portion of the trade in Salt,
wood, musk, cattle, &c., with the Tibetans. They bury
their dead on the mountains, raising cairns over them.
Their language is a dialect of the Tibetan, and has no
written characters. There are several Bhutea villages
within a radius of six or seven miles from Darjeeling sta-
tion, where the race may be seen amidst their evidently
congenial surroundings of mud and filth.
THE ABORIGINAL TRIBES OF SIKKIM. 29
Within recent years Nepaulese have come into Darjeel-
ing in great numbers, their services being eagerly sought
for on the tea-plantations, and they now form nearly 7o
per cent. of the total population. They are a pushing
thriving race, very prolific, and great colonizers. The
Nepaulese are excellent agriculturists, as well as carpenters,
blacksmiths, tailors, &c.; they accordingly find ready
and well-paid employment, being also engaged as domestic
servants, syces, leaf-cutters, &c. Those who enter Dar-
jeeling usually settle down in the district, some of them
being fugitives from Nepaul on account of minor crimes
for which no extradition trerty exists, or because of their
having been head-over-ears in debt. Moreover, on re-
turning to their country they are mulcted in considerable
sums, a payment which they are naturally reluctant to incur.
The Nepaulese will live in the same village with the Lep-
chas, but they occupy a separate quarter to themselves.
They are divided into almost innumerable tribes or clans,
erroneously called castes. In physique they are wiry, light,
and agile, short and slim, wonderfully active and hardy,
and warlike and brave to a degree. The Goorkhas, who
form the ruling clan, make soldiers second to none all the
world over, and the British Goorkha regiments are one of
the great elements of strength in our native army. They
are, however, by no means a quarrelsome race, which is
well, for every Nepaulese carries a deadly-looking curved
knife, called a Aukeri, and can use it with great effect when
occasion demands. Their religion is a strange mixture
of Hinduism, Brahmanism, and Buddhism, with traces of
Paganism pure and simple.
The Lepchas, Limboes, Bhuteas, and Nepaulese by no
means exhaust the hill tribes to be met with in Darjeeling,
However they constitute the most important part of the
3o GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
aboriginal Himalayan inhabitants, and minor races need not
be dealt with in detail. Mention may just be made of
the Magras, who inhabit the lower levels of Nepaul, and
have overflowed in considerabel numbers into British
Sikkim; and of the Moormis, who dwell on the lands on the
Sikkim-Nepaul frontier, and may be said to belong to both
countries. Fuller particulars, however, may be given in re-
gard to the Tibetans proper, who in the cold season
come into Darjeeling to trade, bringing with them ponies,
yaks, sheep, goats, rock-salt, musk, and other commo-
dities. They take back with them tobacco, broadcloth,
piece-goods, and other articles. When in the district
these people usually camp out in small light tents on
the Lebong Spur, I, ooo feet below Darjeeling. They
are polyandrous, it not being uncommon to find one
woman occupying a tent with six or seven men. Their
features are truly Mongolian, and the men are an uncouth
wild-looking lot, middle-sized, squarely built, and evidently
strong and hardy. They do not wear beard, whiskers or
moustache, removing every hair from their faces by means
of tweezers. The men wear their hair either in pig-tails
or flowing, as fancy dictates, Their dress consists of a
long thick blanket robe, fastened round their waists by a
leather belt, in which they stick their iron or brass pipes,
and to which they suspend their long knives, chop-sticks,
tobacco pouch, tweezers, tinder box, wooden Cup, and a
miscellaneous assortment of other useful articles. The
dress of the women is somewhat similar, but they wear
in addition a short sleeveless coat over the long robe,
drawn round the waist by a girdle of broad brass or silver
links. Their hair is braided into two tails, and they have
a peculiar habit, when travelling, of Smearing their faces
with a black Sticky mess of coal-tar consistency.
TEIE ABORIGINAT, TRIBES OF SIKKIM. 31
This pigment of grease is not intended to conceal their
charms, as some travellers have supposed, but to protect the
skin against the biting mountain winds. Both sexes wear silver
rings and earrings, set with turquoises, and square amulets
upon their necks and arms, which are boxes of gold and
silver, containing Small idols, or the nail-parings, teeth,
or other reliques of some Sainted Lama, accompanied with
musk, written prayers, and charms. The Tibetan method
of salute is to loll out the tongue, grin, nod, and scratch
the ear ; but this procedure entails so much ridicule in the
low countries that they do not practise it to strangers.
Dr. Hooker’s description of Tibetans on the march is
very vivid —“These groups of Tibetans,” he writes, “are
singularly picturesque, from the variety of their parti-col-
oured dresses, and their Odd appearance. First comes a
middle-aged man or woman, driving a little silky black yak,
grunting under his load of 260 lbs. of Salt, besides pots,
pans, and kettles, stools, churn, and bamboo vessels, keep-
ing up a constant rattle; and, perhaps, buried amongst all,
a rosy-cheeked and lipped baby, sucking a lump of cheese-
curd, The main body follow in due order, and you are
soon entangled amidst sheep and goats, each with its two
little bags of salt: besides these stalks, the huge, grave, bull-
headed mastiff, loaded like the rest, his glorious bushy
tail thrown over his back in a majestic Sweet, and a thick
collar of scarlet wool round his neck and shoulders, setting
off his long, silken coat to the best advantage ; he is de-
cidedly the noblest looking of the party, especially if a fine
and pure black one, for they are often very ragged, dun-
coloured, sorry beasts. He seems rather out of place, neither
guarding nor keeping the party together, but he knows that
neither yaks, sheep, nor goats require his attention, all are
perfectly tame, so he takes his share of work as Salt-carrier
32 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
by day, and watches by night as well. The children bring
up the rear, laughing and chatting together ; they, too, have
their loads, even to the youngest that can walk alone.”
Such are the chief hill races that go to constitute the
heterogeneous population of the Darjeeling District. We
shall make yet another extract from Dr. Hooker’s fascinat-
ing and deeply interesting volumes. Writing on the mixed
nature of the community, he remarks –“ That six or
seven different tribes, without any feudal system or coercive
head, with different langauges and customs, should dwell
in close proximity and in peace and unity, within the con-
fined territory of Sikkim, even for a limited period, is an
anomaly ; the more so especially when it is considered that
with the exception of a tincture of the Buddhist religion
among some few of the people, they are all but Savages, as
low in the scale of intellect as the New Zealander or the
Tibetan, and beneath those races in ingenuity and skill as
craftsmen. Wars have been waged among them, but they
have been neither sanguinary nor destructive, and the fact
remains no less remarkable, that at the period of our occupy-
ing Darjeeling, friendship and unanimity reigned amongst all
these tribes, from the Tibetan at 14, ooo feet to the Mechi of
the plains, under a sovereign whose temporal power was
wholly unsupported by even the semblance of arms, and
whose spiritual supremacy was acknowledged by very few.”
It will thus be seen that Darjeeling is one of the most
polyglot places on the face of the earth. The vernaculars
spoken are Lepcha, Bhutea, Nepauli, Tibetan, Hindi, Ben-
gali, and Hindustani. There is further a hill patois called
Pahari, written in Hindi or Devanagri (“Language of the
Gods”), and used in all official police reports. Sanskrit is
also understood and written by the Lamas.
CHAPTER IV.
BOTANICAL FEATURES.
Belts of Vegetation—Plant Zife of the Zerai—Commence-
ment of the Hill Forests—Tropical Trees—The Temperate
Zone—Magnificent Forest Scenery—Dearth of Fruits—
Successful Cultivation of European Vegetables—English
A/ozwers—Athododendrons and Magnolias—A, and Zife on
the Aea/s—The AEegion of Perpetual Snozw.
THE zones of vegetation through which the traveller
passes in ascending the Himalayas are well-marked, and on
a clear day, standing upon one of the lofty Spurs, the ob-
server can easily distinguish these well-defined belts of
varied plant life. From the Terai to the limit of perpetual
snow a dozen climates are passed through, each possessing
its own distinctive flora.
The Darjeeling Terai is covered with stunted and bushy
timber. The valuable săl tree has been wholly destroyed,
though it is met with in abundance in the Nepaulese Terai,
this latter district being called the Morung. In the sub-
montane country the grass is very rich, partly owing to the
moisture of the climate, and partly to the retiring waters of
the rivers. Large herds of cattle from the plains of the
Ganges are driven to these feeding grounds. There are
also many kinds of great coarse grasses, sometimes twenty
feet in height, which are burnt down by the Mechis so as
to afford them cultivable patches. The vegetation of the
D. G. 3
34 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
Terai differs entirely from that of the Indian plains, and is
distinctly Himalayan. The trees chiefly met with are the
acacia, dalbergia Sissoo, and a Scarlet-fruited sterculia.
There are numerous climbers—among them convolvulus,
vines, and bignonias. Terrestrial orchids appear, with ferns
and weeds of hot, damp regions.
From the plains to a height of I, ooo feet a giant forest
replaces the stunted trees of the Terai. The gulleys are chok-
ed with vegetation, the trunks of the trees are richly clothed
with epiphytal orchids, pendulous lycopodia, many ferns,
and similar types of the hottest and dampest climates. The
white or lilac blossoms of the convolvulus, like thunbergia
and other acanthaceae, are also predominant and very
handsome features of the shrubby vegetation. A succulent
character pervades the bushes and herbs, occasioned by
the prevalence of the nettle tribe. Large bamboos rather
crest the hills than court the deeper shade. The charac-
teristic vegetation of this zone is as follows:–Figs of five
kinds, date trees (phoenia), Wallichia caryotoides, cycas
pectinata, twelve kinds of bamboo, phylanthus emblica,
acacia, grislea, marlea, Sterculia, dillenia, Cassia, trophis
sissen, butea, mimosa, Catechu, Soapworts, tereben-
thaceae, symplocus, climbing leguminosae, cucurbitaceae,
wild mulberry, three kinds of nettle, boehmeria euphorbia,
turmeric, ginger, ferns in great variety, acanthaceae,
bondellata, lycopodia, randia, and oak.
As the ascent continues, between 1,000 and 4,000 feet,
the prevalent timber becomes more gigantic, and is fes-
tooned by climbing leguminosae, which sometimes sheath
the trunks, or span the forest with huge cables, binding
tree to tree. Their trunks are also clothed with orchids,
climbing pothos, peppers, vines, convolvulus, and bignonias.
BOTANICAL FEATURES. 35
The beauty of the drapery of the pothos leaves is pre-
eminent, whether for the graceful folds the foliage assumes,
or for the liveliness of its colour. Among the smaller trees,
the wild banana is conspicuous and abundant, its crown
of very beautiful foliage contrasting with the smaller-leaved
plants amongst which it nestles; next comes a screw-pine
(Pandanus) with a straight stem and a tuft of leaves, each
eight or ten feet long, waving on all sides. Bamboo
abounds everywhere : its dense tufts of culms, Ioo feet and
upwards high, are as thick at the base as a man's thigh.
Twenty or thirty species of ferns, including a tree-fern, are
met with, luxuriant and handsome ; while foliaceous lichens
and a few mosses appear at 2, ooo feet. Among the other
vegetation are gordonia, pandanus, Săl, toon, bombax or
cotton tree, banian and others of the genus ficus, orange,
peach, lemon, and wormwood. Such is the plant-life of
the tropical forests of the outer Himalayas.
At about 4,000 feet a great change takes place in the
vegetation, marked first by the appearance of an English-
looking bramble, with a very good yellow fruit. It is known
locally as the “yellow raspberry.” Scattered oaks of a
noble species, with lamellated cups and magnificent foliage,
succeed; and along the ridge of the mountain to Kurseong,
4,860 feet above sea-level, the change in the flora is com-
plete. Here now the birch and maple trees are found, and
there are quite a number of plants reminding one of the
temperate climate of England—the violet, stellaria, arum,
viccinium, wild strawberry, and geranium. Mosses and
lichens carpet the roadsides and banks ; the birds and
insects are very different from those below ; the wind
blows colder; and everything proclaims a marked change
in climatic conditions. Mingled with these English-like
flowers are tree-ferns, pothos, bananas, palms, figs, peppers
36 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
numbers of epiphytal orchids, and similar genuine tropical
genera, the uniform temperature and humidity of the cli-
mate favouring the extension of tropical plant-life into a
temperate region, exactly as the same conditons cause simi-
lar forms to attain higher latitudes in the Southern hemis-
phere (as in New Zealand, Tasmania, and Chili) than they
do in the northern. This mixture of temperate and tropi-
cal vegetation continues for 2, ooo feet above Kurseong.
Ascending from Kurseong, the traveller zigzags along
the face of mountains clothed with magnificent forests of
chestnut, walnut, oaks, and laurels. Dr. Hooker vividly
describes this glorious wealth of plant-life. “It is difficult
to conceive,” he writes, “a grander mass of vegetation; the
straight shafts of the timber-tree shooting aloft, some naked
and clean, with grey, pale, or brown bark; others literally
clothed for yards with a continuous garment of epiphytes,
one mass of blossoms, especially the white orchids, which
bloom in a profuse manner, whitening their trunks like snow.
More bulky trunks were masses of interlacing climbers,
enclosing a hollow, once filled by the strangled tree, which
had long ago decayed away. From the sides and summit
of these, supple branches hung forth, either leafy or naked;
the latter resembling cables flung from one tree to another,
swinging in the breeze, their rocking motion increased by
the weight of great bunches of ferns or orchids, which were
perched aloft in the loops. Perpetual moisture nourishes
this dripping forest ; and pendulous mosses and lichens are
met with in profusion.”
Up to 6,ooo feet the funereal cypress grows well, being
planted in the vicinity of Buddhist temples. It is not
indigenous to Sikkim, but is imported from Tibet and
{Bhutan.
BOTANICAL FEATURES. 37.
At 7,500 feet English-looking plants continue to be met
with in abundance. Here also the noble white rhododen-
dron, with enormous and delicious lemon-scented blossoms
strewing the ground, flourishes in all its glory. The trees
are one-half oaks, one-quarter magnolias, and nearly another
quarter laurels, among which grow Himalayan kinds of
birch, alder, maple, holly, bird-cherry, common cherry,
Weeping willow, and apple. In this zone over sixty species
of ferns may be collected, chiefly of temperate genera.
The absence of leguminous plants is a remarkable feature,
it being too high for the tropical tribes of the warmer eleva-
tions, too low for the Alpines, and too moist for those of
temperate regions; cool, equable, humid climates being
generally unfavourable to these plants. There is also a
marked absence (in the usual proportion at any rate) of
such common orders as compositae, cruciferae, ranuncula-
ceae, and grasses. The plants that predominate are the
rarer and more local families, as those of rhododendron,
Camelia, magnolia, ivy, cornel, honeysuckle, hydrangea,
begonia, and epiphytal orchids. Among the varieties of
rhododendrons—which, it may be parenthetically remarked,
flower in the months of April and May—are the magnifi-
cent white rhododendron with lemon-scented leaves, already
mentioned ; the scarlet rhododendron, vying with it in
beauty, the rhododendron argentum, a tree growing as high
as forty feet, perhaps most glorious of all, with splendid mass
of flowers and leaves twelve to fifteen inches long, wrinkled
and deep green above, silvery below ; and the rhododen-
dron dalhousiae, a slender shrub which grows as an epi-
phyte, and bears from three to six white lemon-scented
bells, four-and-a-half inches long and as many broad, at the
end of each branch.
Darjeeling is not a good fruit-growing district. This is
38 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
caused by a singular and almost total absence of the direct
rays of the Sun during the ripening season, a bright sky
being as essential to the maturing of fruit as a warm autum-
nal atmosphere. The winter of the plains in India being
more analogous in its distribution of moisture and heat to a
European summer, such fruits as the peach, vine, and even
plum, fig, strawberry, &c., may be brought to bear well there
in March, April, and May ; but none of these fruits thrive
on the Sikkim Himalayas, though its temperature nearly
approaches that of England, on account of the rain and
fogs, which are so prevalent. There is in this respect a
great difference between the climates of the Eastern and
Western Himalayas, at equal elevations. At Simla, for ex-
ample, the winters are colder, but the summers are warmer
and less humid, the rainy season is shorter, and the
sun shines much more frequently between the heavy showers;
the conditions are thus much more favourable for the
cultivation of English fruits, and they are there brought to
a state of considerable perfection. In Darjeeling the Euro-
pean apple will scarcely ripen, and the pear not at all.
Vines, figs, pomegranates, plums, apricots, &c., will hardly
succeed even as trees. Peach trees grow at Leebong, but the
fruit falls from the branch when scarce reddened and still
hard. Currants and gooseberries show no disposition to
thrive. The strawberry is the only fruit that really ripens,
which it does in great abundance. Of the wild fruits,
almost the only eatable kinds are the native walnut and
some brambles (of which the “yellow ’’ and “ground”
raspberries are the best), some insipid figs, and a very sour
crab apple. Of tropical fruits cultivated below 4, ooo feet,
oranges and indifferent bananas alone are frequent. Lemons
of various kinds are also grown, but the season for these is
very short. Oranges abound in winter, and are excellent.
BOTANICAL FEATURES. 39
Naspatis, a kind of pear, which is fairly nice when stewed,
grow freely on the lower slopes of the hills; and the
passion flower fruit, or grenadilla, is obtainable in the Dar-
jeeling bazar in the months of August and September.
Mangoes are brought from the plains, for though wild in
Sikkim, the cultivated kinds do not thrive. The pine-apple
plant may be seen occasionally, but it does not bear fruit
in these regions. Unlike European fruits, English vege-
tables, on the other hand, thrive remarkably well throughout
the summer at Darjeeling, and the produce is very fair,
sweet and good, but inferior in flavour to the English. Splen-
did potatoes are grown in abundance. English flowers also
flourish splendidly in and around Darjeeling station, almost
all our familiar home kinds being grown. Among many
others geraniums, calceolarias, pinks, roses of the most
charming varieties, mignonette, violets, fuchsias, white and
pink daisies, and dahlias of the most brilliant colours and
every variety of size.
Above Darjeeling the deep humid forests of oaks and
magnolias, with laurels interspersed, continue, with also a
species of cinnamon; this style of vegetation ascending up to
8,500 feet. The magnolias are magnificent. Like the rhodo-
dendrons they flower in the months of April and May.
The white-flowered variety predominates from 7,ooo to
8, ooo feet. It blossoms so profusely that when it sheds its
flowers, the mountain sides often appear as if sprinkled
with snow, The purple-flowered kind hardly occurs below
8, ooo feet. It forms an immense, but rather ugly tree,
black-barked and sparingly branched, leafless in winter and
also during the flowering season, when it puts forth from
the ends of its branches rose-purple, cup-shaped flowers,
whose fleshy petals strew the ground. On its branches
grows the beautiful epiphytal rhododendron dalhousiae
4O GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
already described. At this elevation a large number of
scandent or climbing trees are found, which twist around
the trunks of others and strangle them ; the latter gradually
decay, leaving the sheath of climbers as one of the most
remarkable botanical phenomena of these mountains. Rho-
dodendrons are met with in abundance and great variety,
with superb foliage and beautiful flowers. A kind of moun-
tainash and the common English yew now appear. The trunks
of the last-named are often eighteen feet in circumference;
the red bark is used as a dye, and for staining the foreheads
of the Brahmins in Nepaul. An erect white-flowered rose
(Rosa Sericea, the only species occurring wild in Southern
Sikkim) grows in great profusion ; its numerous inodorous
flowers are pendent, apparently as a protection from the
rain, and it is further remarkable as being the only variety
of rose with four petals instead of five. A currant, some-
times growing epiphytically on the trunks of large trees, is
also common. Amongst the herbs are many of great
interest, as a rhubarb and an aconite, the latter yielding a
deadly poison. Of European genera are to be found
thalictrum, anemone, fumaria, violets, stellaria, hyperi-
cum, geraniums, balsams, epilobium, potentilla, paris, and
convallariae, the root of the last-named also giving a very
virulent poison. The rarity of pines is a most curious
feature in the botany of the region, for between the level
of 2,500 feet (the upper limit of the long-lived pine) and
I, ooo feet (the upper limit of the yew), there is no con-
iferous tree whatever on the Outer ranges of Southern Sikkim.
The general prevalence of figs, and of their allies the nettles,
up to nearly 1 o, ooo feet, is another remarkable point in the
botany of the Sikkim Himalayas. The bramble does not
grow above this level, notwithstanding that it flourishes in
such profusion below it. The entire absence of whortle-ber-
BOTANICAL FEATURES. 4 I
ries and cranberries in the Alpine Himalayas is likewise very
remarkable, and they are not replaced by any substitute.
As the ascent continues, larches and firs, and bushes of
dark juniper, scarlet berberry, and yellow rose are found.
Silver-firs, which attain 35 feetin girth with a trunk unbranch
ed for 4o feet, are met with, but are gradually replaced by
evergreen rhododendrons, which grow in inconceivable
profusion, especially on the slopes facing the south-east. At
12, ooo feet this is the only form of tree vegetation, besides
scattered bushes of rose spiraea, dwarf juniper, stunted
birch, creeping willow, honey-suckle, berberry, and moun-
tain ash. Dwarf rhododendrons, with strongly-scented
leaves, and abundance of a little andromeda, with woody
stems and tufted branches, give a heathery appearance to
the hill-sides, the prevalence of lichens, which colour the
rocks, adding an additional feature to the resemblance to
Scotch Highland scenery. Here are also found, most
curious to tell, two of the commonest of all British weeds, a
grass (Poa annua) and the shepherd's purse. At 13, ooo
feet the ground becomes everywhere hard and frozen, and
now only such plants as compositae, grass, and arenaria are
found. One curious mountain plant, Saussurea gossypina,
forms great clubs of the softest white wool, six inches to a
foot high, its flowers and leaves seeming clothed with the
warmest fur that nature can devise. But generally speak-
ing, the Alpine plants of the Himalayas are quite unprovid-
ed with any special protection of this kind. At these great
elevations also are found, lurking in nooks, such plants as
tufted alsinaceous, Saussurea, parnassia, minute primroses,
draba, wormwoods, saxifrages, gentian, forget-me-nots,
white clover, dock, the Alpine larkspur, chick-weed, ZOe/.
Ahinium glaciale, a groundsel, a ranunculus, artemesia,
astragali, androsace, grasses, sedges, lichens, and mosses
42 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
Ponies ascending to these heights, 15, ooo to 19, ooo feet,
will scratch away the snow, and nibble at the scanty
herbage. The line of everlasting snow varies greatly, as
much as 5,000 feet, the range may be taken as 15, ooo to
2O, ooo feet, on different mountains, according to exposure.
Vegetation, therefore, ceases sooner on some peaks than on
others. At 19, ooo feet Dr. Hooker found an Arctic Euro-
pean lichen (Zecidea oreima), so faintly discolouring the rocks
as hardly to be detected without a magnifying glass At
22, ooo feet he met with a yellow lichen (Borrera), but
this was only a visitor, migrating over the lofty slopes of
Tibet, blown about by violent winds. This is the highest
point at which plant-life has ever been discovered. Of
Course these immense elevations do not occur in the Dar-
jeeling District, but we have strayed beyond to the lofty
mountains on the Tibetan frontier so as to make this
synopsis of Himalayan botany complete.
CHAPTER V.
NATURAL HISTORY AND GEOLOGY.
Aird Zife in the Zerai—Złs Arezz—Animals on the Hills—
A.eeches—Insect Scourges—Moths and Butterflies—Birds–
Aish–ZXomestic Animals—Geological Areatures—Minera/
froducis—Moraines.
THE animal life of the Darjeeling District presents no
such grand and unique features as the plant-life. In the
Terai, birds are a conspicuous feature of the natural history,
being of many species interesting either from their habits,
beauty, or extensive distribution. During one journey Dr.
Hooker noted no fewer than sixteen kinds of swimming
birds, several of them migratory and English. These in-
cluded the shoveller; white-eyed and common ducks; the
merganser, the Brahmini, and the Indian goose; common
and Gargany teal; two kinds of gull; one of Shearwater,
three of tern, and one of cormorant. Besides these he met
with three kinds of egret, the large crane, stork, green
heron, and the demoiselle; the English sand-martin, king-
fisher, peregrine falcon, sparrow-hawk, kestrel, and the
European vulture, the wild peacock, and jungle fowl. In
addition to all these varieties, the Terai has at least Ioo
peculiarly Indian birds, of which the more remarkable
are several kinds of mina, starling, vulture, kingfisher,
magpie, quail, Snipe, wood-cock, green-pigeon, partridge,
florican, and lapwing. Of larger animals, tigers, rhinoceros,
44 GUIDE BOOK TO I)ARJEELING.
deer, wild hog, and a distinct species of dwarf hog are pretty
numerous, while a few elephants and wolves are also found.
The hare abounds, and with the teal, is the best game in
this part of India. In the hill-districts there is a decided
scarcity of animal life. Sambur deer are found on the
lower ranges, and here elephants and tigers are occasion-
ally encountered. Bears, leopards, and musk deer are to
be met with in the upper ranges, the bears descending the
hills when the maize crops are approaching ripeness. Tigers
are very occasionally seen and still more rarely shot, but
leopards are somewhat more common. Big game, however,
have been practically extirminated in the lower hills by the
extension of the tea-planting industry.
The last time a bear was shot within five miles of Dar-
jeeling station was about 1884, and sportsmen have to go
far afield if they are to get a shot at anything. The musk
deer is a pretty grey animal, the size of a roebuck, and
Something resembling it, with coarse fur, short horns, and
two projecting teeth from the upper jaw. The musk, which
hangs in a pouch near the navel of the male, is the well-
known object of traffic throughout India. The female and
the young male are very good eating. The musk deer
ranges between 8,000 and 13, ooo feet on the Himalayas,
often scenting the air for many hundred yards. In the
wooded valleys barking deer are tolerably plentiful, and an
occasional wild hog may be encountered. The inevitable
jackal and the pariah dog abound in every district. Packs
of wild dogs are sometimes met with, and occasionally
cause considerable injury to cattle even in the neighbour-
hood of Darjeeling. On the skirts of the pine forests
large monkeys are found, and a curious long-tailed animal,
Ailurus ochraceus, peculiar to the Himalaya, something
between a diminutive bear and a squirrel, Marmots and
NATURAL HISTORY AND GEOILOGY. 45
tailless rats (Goomcher) are to be found at high altitudes,
these migrating into Sikkim from Tibet. The last remark
also applies to the wild sheep, a huge animal of whose
dimensions the term sheep gives no idea ; they are very
long-legged, stand as high as a calf, and have enormous
horns, a trophy much coveted but rarely secured by the
sportsman.
Snakes are comparatively rare in the Himalayas, and as
a rule very shy. The large cobra does not inhabit the
mountain regions. The venomous black Cobra, however, is
met with occasionally, and about a dozen species of viper
have been identified. Harmless green Snakes are common
enough, likewise the beautiful whip-snakes which, with tail
coiled round twigs of trees, dart an unerring aim at their
insect prey. Lizards are very numerous, as also is the
common Bengal toad in the marshes, a remarkable instance
of wide geographical distribution, the same Batrachian being
common at the level of the sea under the tropics. In
many districts tree frogs create a great disturbance during
the night with their peculiar metallic clack. Leeches liter-
ally swarm up to 8,000 feet, and are most troublesome
during the rains both to man and beast. They lurk in the
grass jungle and the leaves of trees, and boots and gaiters
are unavailing to keep them out. Dr. Hooker says that he
had often 50 or 60 at one time on his ankles. Their bite
is painless, but is followed by considerable effusion of
blood. The punctures should not be scratched, otherwise
sores may result, especially in the case of those whose
constitutions happen to be low.
Hornets and scorpions are occasionally met with, and
both sometimes inflict very painful stings on travellers.
Bees are widely distributed. They build pendulous nests,
46 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING,
which are so large sometimes as to be conspicuous features
in the landscape. In the Teesta Valley, honey-seekers
scale the precipitous rocks by means of cane ladders ; this
pursuit appearing an extremely perilous one, the long
thread-like canes in many places affording the only footing
over many yards of cliff. Great ants’ nests are also found
in the forests. Mosquitoes and midges perform their irritat-
ing functions in the lower and medium levels. Sand-flies are
numerous at high elevations. Another pest is the dipterous
insect called the Peepsa, which Swarms on the banks of the
streams; it is very small and black, floating like a speck
before the eye; but its bite is very irritating, and leaves a
spot of extravasated blood under the cuticle. Animals are
almost driven mad, and rush into any water near at hand to
rid themselves of this pest. Yet another insect plague is a
large tick which infests the small bamboo, and which the
traveller through the jungle cannot prevent from coming on
his person. They get inside his dress, and insert the pro-
boscis deeply, without causing hurt, This proboscis is
barbed, and the tick, buried head and shoulders in the
flesh, can be extracted only by force, the operation being a
very painful one. In the woods tropical cicadas make a
deafening noise during the heat of the day and towards
evening, and glow-worms fly about at night. At an eleva-
tion of 17,ooo feet bees, may-flies, and gnats abound, and
there are also many varieties of Arctic insects in these high
regions. Darjeeling boasts a profusion of beautiful butter.
flies and moths; the varieties of the former number about
2,000, and of the latter about 3,000. There are some
superb varieties of large tropical swallow-tails, black, with
blue, scarlet or yellow patches on their wings, In the val-
leys these may be seen in their thousands; they especially
love to settle during the heat of the day on the damp sand
NATURAL HISTORY AND GEOLOGY. 47
of a river-edge, where they sit balancing themselves with a
rocking motion, resembling a fleet of yachts on a calm
day. The moths are also most beautiful, and there is in
Darjeeling a splendid field for the collection of these and
of butterflies. Beetles likewise abound, the number of
varieties being no less than 5, ooo in rough figures.
We have already described the birds of the Terai. In
the hill-country among the varieties met with are larks,
finches, sparrows, with Occasionally the hoopoe ; cormo-
rants, waders, geese and ducks, these being in course of
migrating; grouse, Alpine pigeons, and horned pheasants;
swallows, ravens, and red-legged crows. All these are to he
found at high elevations. Lower down, the horn-bill, the
mina, the jungle fowl, and the green pigeon are met with.
The nightingale is a hardy bird, its song being heard when
the thermometer is the freezing point. It migrates to
the Himalayan valleys in October and November till the
cold of early spring drives it further south to the plains of
India, whence they return north in March and April. In
and around Darjeeling station there is a remarkable paucity
of bird life. The so-called “ubiquitous crow’’ for exam-
ple is here conspicuous by his absence. A few of the tribe
are found at Jalalapar ; these were imported by the Maha-
rajah of Burdwan, but their number, about a dozen to a
score all told, shows no sign of increasing. The cuckoo,
however, is fairly common and is constantly heard in April
and May.
There are few lakes in the Himalayan mountain region,
only two of any size being found in the Darjeeling District.
Fish are consequently not very abundant. About a dozen
different kinds, however, are found in the rivers, and the
sportsman will get excellent mahseer fishing in the Teesta
48 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
One of the most remarkable facts in the zoology of Asia is
that no trout or salmon inhabit any of the rivers that flow
south from the Himalayan range into India, the so-called
Himalayan trout being merely a species of Carp ; but this
widely-distributed natural order of fish is found in the Oxus,
and in all the waters of Central Asia that flow north and
West.
The domestic animals of Darjeeling merit a few words of
mention. The hardy Tibetan ponies we have already re-
ferred to, and may just add that for Sure-footed carriers
along the most dangerous-looking paths they can hardly be
surpassed. The distances they will travel, the heights they
will ascend to, and the weights they will carry during a
working day, are also remarkable. The cows of the district,
though generally resembling the English in form, stature,
and colour, have humps, and grunt rather than low. The
yak comes from Tibet, and is a very tame, domestic animal,
often handsome, and a true bison in appearance. It is
invaluable from its strength and hardiness, accomplishing,
at a slow pace, twenty miles a day, bearing either two bags
of salt or rice, or four to six planks of pinewood slung along
both flanks. Their ears are generally pierced, and orna-
mented with a tuft of Scarlet worsted ; they have large and
beautiful eyes, spreading horns, long silky hair, and grand
bushy tails ; black is their prevailing colour, but red, dun,
parti-coloured, and white are common. In winter, the
flocks graze below 8,000 feet, in consequence of the great
quantity of snow above that height; in summer they find
pasturage as high as I 7,ooo feet, consisting of grass and
small tufted sedges, on which they browse with avidity.
The yak is chiefly used as a beast of burden; and much of
the wealth of its owner is derived from its rich milk and
curd, which are eaten either fresh or dried, or powdered
NATURAL HISTORY AND GEOLOGY. 49
into a kind of meal. It is also ridden, especially by the
Lamas, who find its shaggy Coat warm and its pace easy ;
under such circumstances it is always led. The yak can-
not bear damp heat, for which reason it will not live in
summer below 7,ooo feet, where liver disease carries it off
in a very few years. The wild yak or bison of Central Asia,
the progenitor of the tame variety, is immensely greater in
size, it being, indeed, the largest animal found in Tibet. A
good, though not an unusually large, specimen, stuffed,
may be seen in the Mammal Gallery of the Indian Mu-
seum, Calcutta, and may be compared with the diminutive
domesticated yak, the contrast being a striking one. Sheep
are used as beasts of burden throughout the hill-country.
They are very tame, patient creatures, travelling twelve miles
a day with great ease, and being indifferent to, rocky
ground. They carry a load of 40 lbs. Goats and dogs are
utilized in the same way. Pigs are kept and thrive, while
geese, ducks, and fowls are also reared in large numbers.
The Sikkim cock does not wake the morning with the
shrill crow of the English chanticleer ; his note is more
a prolonged, howling screech. This is one case out of
several where we meet in India animals resembling Our
own varieties at home to the eye, but not to the ear.
Turning now to the geological features of the region, we
find that the Terai is composed of alternate beds of Sand,
gravel, and boulders brought down from the mountains.
These deposits contain no fossils. The general appearance
and mineral constituents favour the theory that the base of
the Sikkim Himalayas was once washed by a great Ocean,
which received the contents of its rivers, and wore away its
bluff spurs, the alluvium of the Gangetic Valley being no
doubt deposited in deep water, whilst the coarser matter
was accumulating at the foot of the mountains. Ascending
D. G. 4.
5O GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
from the Terai, we have soft massive sand-stone and clunch
beds; these make up the Tertiaries, which occur as a narrow
band fringing the base of the hills. North of these is a
narrow band of Damuda rocks in a more or less altered
condition, and including various alternations of quartzite,
shales, slate, and beds of friable anthacrite coal. Overlying
these are some thousand feet of slates, mostly of grey and
green tints, and including here and there a band of quartz.
ite. As the hills are ascended, these slates are found
to pass, more or less gradually, through mica-schist into
gneiss. From Kurseong to Darjeeling the gneiss is contin-
uous, verging in some places towards mica-Schist. Dolo-
mite occurs at a still higher altitude, and within British
territory. There is no granite in the Darjeeling District
proper, but further north, at loftier ranges, it penetrates the
gneiss in the form of numerous veins, the intrusive rock
being sometimes fine-grained, in other cases largely crys-
tallized and composed of pearly white prisms of felspar,
glassy quartz, and milk-white flat plates of mica, with occa-
sional large crysuals of tourmaline.
The mountainous district of Darjeeling has been carefully
investigated for minerals by the officers of the Geological
Survey. Coal measures exist at several points, which are
easily exposed, and give a good chemical analysis. The
difficulty, however, in working them remuneratively would
be very great; moreover, the friable nature of the coal, the
high inclination of the seams, their rapid variations in
thickness, and the shattered condition of the rocks, are
conditions against coal-mining ever becoming a remunera-
tive industry in Darjeeling. It is said, however, that the
experiment is about to be tried. Both iron and copper are
worked in several places by the Nepaulese, but the charac-
ter and accessibility of the mines are not such as to attract
NATURAL HISTORY AND GEOLOGY. 5 I
European capital. Lime can be procured in abundance
from dolomite, tertiary limestone, and calcareous tufa.
The last-named is now largely burnt in kilns. Gems or
crystals of any size or beauty are not found in the country.
A characteristic feature of the region is a large number of
ancient moraines, these being present in every valley at or
about 7,oco to 8,000 feet elevation. These prove that at
one time the glaciers descended fully so much below the
position they now occupy. This can only be explained by
a change of climate, or by a depression of the mountain
mass equal to 8,000 feet since the formation of these
moraines. Another striking point is the existence of a num-
ber of old lake beds, which are strewn with great boulders.
These are quite dry in the cold weather, but marshy
during the rainy season. Many of the valleys are terraced
pebble beds, rising, in some cases, eighty feet above the
river; these could only have been deposited when the
streams debouched into deep water. Along the gorges are
also to be found numerous huge boulders and rocks round-
ed by glacial action. In conclusion, mention may be made
of one or two natural phenomena, namely, caverns in the
hills (one of them near the Cutcherry Hill in Darjeeling
station being superstitiously believed by the natives to
extend all the way to Lhassa); a natural bridge of stone
across the Ramman between the junction of the Ratho and
the Sri with that river; a hot-spring at the Mangphu copper
mine on the Teesta, and a 'chalybeate spring about three
miles east of Darjeeling station.
CHAPTER VI.
RIVERS AND MOUNTAINS.
Z%e Zeesta ; its Zzibutaries—Zhe Great Rungeeſ—Zhe
Mahanada—The Balasan—The Mechi—Zofties: Peaks
in British Territory—Table of Heights and Distances—
. Adeligious Monasteries—Aeights of Passes info Złżey
The Range of Everlasting Snow—Magnificence of the
Spectacle—Gorgeous Sunset AEffects.
, THE District of Darjeeling naturally divides itself into two
geographical divisions—the Terai or sub-montane marshy
strip immediately beneath the hills, and the ridges and deep
valleys of the lower Himalayas. The principal rivers are
the Teesta, the Mahanada, and the Balasan, all possessing
numerous affluents. The main lines of drainage are the
Teesta and the Mahanada and their tributaries, except in
the extreme east, where the Superfluous water is carried off
by the Jaldhaka. The great water-shed of the district is
the Singli La Range, reaching from Kinchinjunga, in In-
dependent Sikkim, to the plains of Bengal. At its northern
extremity this range suddenly all but terminates in a huge
precipice; it is joined to Kinchinjunga by a narrow saddle-
back-shaped ridge. The Goom Range, which joins the Singli
La Range below Tonglo, forms a subsidiary water-shed line.
The waters on the South and west of this line all drain
eventually into the Mahanada, whilst those to the north and
east find their way into the Teesta,
RIVERS AND MOUNTAINS, 53
The Teesta, like many others of the great rivers in North-
ern India, rises on the further side of the Himalayas, its
source being the Chalamu Lake in Tibet, though it is also
said to have another head water in Kinchinjunga, in Inde-
pendent Sikkim. It bursts through a great mountain barrier
before it reaches British territory. For some distance it
forms the northern boundary between Sikkim and Darjeeling,
till it receives the waters of the Great Rungeet, when it turns
to the South into British territory, and after flowing through
the hill portion of the district, passes through Jalpaiguri and
Rangpur Districts, finally falling into the Brahmaputra
below Bagwa in Rangpur. Its course is about 90 miles,
through some of the most magnificent scenery in the world.
Among the hills its banks are precipitous and lofty, and
clothed to their summits with dense forests. The Teesta is
not fordable within the Darjeeling District at any period of
the year; but a little below its confluence with the Great
Rungeet, a fine suspension bridge has been thrown across
the stream, which keeps open throughout the whole year the
great trade route through the Jeylep La Pass into Tibet.
At the point where the Teesta debouches on the plains,
through a gorge known as the Sivak Gola Pass, it is fifty
yards broad; its volume is very considerable, and it becomes
at Once navigable for boats of two tons burthen, although
navigation is very difficult and precarious owing to rapids
and numerous rocks and large stones in the bed of the river.
Its tributaries include the Ranchu and Roli, on the left bank;
and on the right, the Great Rungeet, Ranjo, Rayeng, and
Sivak. The Great Rungeet is an important stream. It rises
amongst the glaciers of Kinchinjunga and its sister peaks.
It enters the Darjeeling District from the west, and forms a
part of the northern boundary, flowing from west to east until
it joins the Teesta. The valley of the Rungeet is a narrow
54 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
gorge, through which the troubled river, about eighty yards
wide, rushes along over a gravelly bed. The banks are
shelving, and covered with forest or jungle. Its principal
affluents are the Rungmo, Little Rungeet, and the Ramman.
These last-named rivers also have tributaries, but they are
litte more than mountain streams. The Ramman, it may
be mentioned, is not fordable at any time of the year.
The Mahanada, while passing through Darjeeling, is com-
paratively a small stream, and for a portion of its course
during the cold season it loses itself altogether in the sands
of the Terai. Its chief tributaries join it below the Darjeel-
ing District boundary, after leaving which it becomes an
important river, passing through Purniah and Maldah, and
falling into the Ganges at Godagari, just within the borders
of the Rajshahai District. The source of the Mahanada is
near Mahaldiram Hill; its banks are covered with trees
and jungle, and it is fordable during the dry season.
The Balasan takes its rise a few miles south-west of
Darjeeling station, and after a southerly course enters the
Terai, when it divides into two steams, one of which,
the New Balasan, branches off and joins the Mahanada,
while the parent stream continues its southerly course till it
enters Purniah District. The new channel is said to have
been formed by the Mechis damming up the stream for the
purpose of fishing. The river has many tributaries both
in the hills and in the plains. It can be forded at several
places in the cold and dry months.
The Mechi river is in the Darjeeling Terai, and marks its
western boundary. It takes its rise in the Lingallah Range,
on the Nepaul frontier, flowing in a southerly direction till
it passes into the Purniah District. The river is fordable
throughout the year, except immediately after heavy rains.
RIV li RS AND MOUNTAINS. 55
There are very few lakes in Darjeeling, only two being of
any importance, and these small. The one is a few miles
east of the Teesta, and is 550 yards long by 200 yards
broad; the other lies about six miles south-west of Hope
Town.
The great mass of mountains which constitute Darjeeling
and stretch beyond it to the north almost baffle description,
The loftiest peaks are situated outside British territory;
but within it, on the Singli La Range, marching with Nepaul,
are several mountains above Io, ooo feet in height. The
highest of these are—Phalut, height 1 1,811 feet; Saburkum,
II,636 feet; and Tango, Io, of 4 feet. Situng is another
bold peak in the district, of conical form, situated south-
east of Darjeeling station. The two great points near lar-
jeeling station from which to view the Snowy ranges are
Observatory Hill and Tiger Hill, the range of sight from the
latter being more extensive—Mount Everest, distant Io.7
miles, being in view from it on a clear day. Mount
Everest lies north-west from Darjeeling; and Kinchinjunga.
45 miles distant, almost due north ; between these moun-
tains, the two loftiest in the world, stretches the great range
of perpetual snow. It is impossible, by written description,
to localize the position of each individual peak. The
following table, however, giving names, heights, and distances
in miles on a direct line from Darjeeling, will be found
useful. By aid of a good map the position of the mountains
may be determined ; or, better still, some one acquainted
with the locality may point them out to the visitor.
AWame. Beight. Distance.
Everest (from Tiger Hill) ... 29, OO2 . . . ... I O7
Kinchinjunga tº º s ... 28, IS6 ... ... 45
Janu (in Nepaul) ... ... 25.304 . . . ... 46
Kabru tº ſº tº ... 24,015 . . . • . . 40
56 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
AWame.
Chumala Rhi
Pauhan Rhi
Donkia Rhi
Kangchenjhau
Chomiumo tº tº 0 e - e.
Pandim
Takcham
Narsing
Narim
Dependikang or Chumanago -.
Kabur Peak e - tº * @ s
Gipmochi
Tagula
Lampheram
Lingtu . . . . .
ICirsong
Singli La
Sundukphu
Phalut
Saburkum * - O
Menan (in Bhutan)
Richila (in Bhutan)
Tonglo * * *.
Tendong * - ©
Senchal Hill & © 6
Tiger Hill
Chumsering
Pemayangtse
Senon • •- .
Rangi un
Songchonglo & © e tº º e
Rinchinpung º ºg wº
Neor
Deolo
Aleight.
23.944
23, 186
23, 136
22. 509
22,300
22, OI7
I9,2OO
18, 145
I 7,572
I 7,325
I5,827
14,518
13,348
I2,827
12,612
12,258
I2, 126
II,929
II,811
II,636
10,637
I O, SOO
IO,O74
8,676
8,600
8,514
6,945
6,922
6,614
6,305
6,266
6, 191
6,005
5,590
-*
Distance.
82
I 5
On many of the peaks are religious monasteries occupied
by Lamas. These are usually barn-like structures erected
on a rude stone platform.
RIVERS AND MOUNTAINS. 57
The following are the heights of the chief Passes into
Tibet, in their order from south to north :— -
Jelep La Pass ... iº tº º ... I4,388 feet.
Tankra La Pass ... tº º º ... I6,000 , ,
Donkia Pass tº e tº & © e ... 18,400 , ,
Kongralama La Pass * * * ... I6,000 , ,
The Jelep La Pass is the chief channel of trade, being open
all the year round. -
No word-painting can adequately depict the grandeur
of the spectacle presented by the snowy range of Himalayan
mountains. When the clouds clear away and the magni-
ficent sight bursts upon the spectator's gaze, the stupendous
height of the peaks comes upon him as a great surprise.
The line of everlasting snow can be traced from east to
west almost as far as the eye can reach, the mighty Everest
and the almost as grand Kinchinjunga forming what we
may call the Pillars of Hercules at either extremity. Be-
tween these two giant mountains, the highest known peaks
in the world, runs a jagged line of dazzling white. Betwixt
this line and the spectator intervene imposing mountain
ranges, snow-capped and broken by almost perpendicular
gorges. Nearer still is a sea of wooded hills, with rivers
deep down threading dense tropical forests like silver lines,
the whole forming what is beyond all question the most
sublime mountain landscape in the world.
When tinged by the rays of the rising or the setting
sun, the snowy range is seen in its grandest aspect. The
delicate tints of pink, amber, and gold baffle descrip-
tion. Probably no man ever beheld the glorious scene
under more favourable conditions or from more numerous
points of view than Dr. Hooker. The following is a vivid
description of the spectacle —“The firmament appeared of
58 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
a pale steel blue, and a broad low arch spanned the horizon,
bounded by a line of the little fleecy clouds; below this the
sky was of a golden yellow, while in successively deeper
strata, many belts or ribbons of vapour appeared to press
upon the plains, the lowest of which was of a dark leaden
hue, the upper more purple, and vanishing into the pale
yellow above. Gradually the golden lines grew dim, and
the blues and purples gained depth of colour; till the Sun
set behind the dark blue-peaked mountains in a flood of
crimson and purple, sending broad beams of gray shade
and purple light up to the zenith and all around. As
evening advanced, mists rapidly formed below me in little
isolated clouds, which coalesced and spread out like a
heaving sea, leaving nothing above their surface but the
ridges and spurs of the adjacent mountains. This rose like
Capes, promontories, and islands, of the darkest leaden hue,
bristling with pines, and advancing boldly into the Snowy
Ocean, or starting from its bed in the strongest relief. As
darkness came on, and the stars arose, a light fog gathered
round me, and I quitted with reluctance one of the most
impressive and magic scenes I had ever beheld.” Here is
another sunset effect, painted as graphically as words can
paint such a display of nature :-‘‘As the sun declined, the
snow at our feet reflected the most delicate peach-bloom
hue ; and looking west from the top of the Pass, the scenery
was gorgeous beyond description, for the Sun was just
plunging into a sea of mist, in a blaze of the ruddiest
coppery hue. As it sank, the Nepaul peaks to the right
assumed more definite, darker, and gigantic forms, and
floods of light shot across the misty ocean, bathing the
landscape in the most wonderful and indescribable chang-
ing tints. While the luminary was vanishing, the whole
horizon glowed like copper from a smelting furnace, and
RIVERS AND MOUNTAINS. 59
when it had disappeared, the little inequalities of the rugged
edges of the mist were lighted up like a row of volcanos
in the distance. I have never before or since seen any-
thing which for sublimity, beauty, and marvellous effects,
could compare with what I gazed on that evening from
Choonjerna Pass. In some of Turner's pictures I have
recognized similar effects, caught and fixed by a marvellous
effort of genius; such are the fleeting hues over the ice, in
his Wheelers,’ and the ruddy fire in his ‘Wind, Storm,
and Rain,’ which one almost fears to touch. Dissolving
views give some idea of the magic creation and dispersion of
the colours, but any combination of science and art can no
more recall the scene, than it can the feelings of awe that
crept over me, during the hour I spent in solitude amongst
these stupendous mountains.” In another passage Dr.
Hooker awards the palm of beauty to the Swiss Alps,
though characterising these as inferior in sublimity, extent,
and height to the Himalayas. He adds:–“In either case
the observer is struck with the precision and sharpness of
their outlines, and still more with the wonderful play of
colours on their snowy flanks, from the glowing hues reflect-
ed in orange, gold, and ruby, from clouds illumined by the
sinking or rising sun, to the ghastly pallor that succeeds
with twilight, when the red seems to give place to its com-
plimentary colour, green. Such dissolving views elude all
attempt at description, they are far too aerial to be chained
to the memory, and fade from it so fast as to be gazed
upon day by day, with undiminished admiration and plea-
sure, long after the mountains themselves have lost their
sublimity and apparent height.”
To those who have not beheld the everlasting snows of
the Himalayas, these passages, from the pen of a master
hand, may serve to convey some idea of the majestic
6o GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
grandeur of the “cloud - capp'd towers, the gorgeous
palaces,” that stand forth against the horizon, calm, cold,
stately, sublime in their immutability, awe-inspiring in their
loneliness. But it is impossible to express in words the
impressions and sensations that are given rise to by the
contemplation of these stupendous mountains. The most
eloquent descriptions cannot but fail to convey to the
mind's eye the magnificence of the panorama. It must be
gazed upon to be appreciated. Once witnessed, the scene
will remain for ever ineffacble from the memory.
CHAPTER VII.
THE STATION OF DARJEELING.
General Zie of the Zozen—Offservatory //7//—Chaurusta—
Zhe Ma//– Zhe Shrubbery—Tozen Hal/–Station Amuse
ment Club—St. Andrezaj's Church—Secretariaſ—The
Cemetery—Zloyd Botanic Garden—The old Rungaroon
Garden—The Scotch Mission—The ſail—The Bazar—
An Animated Scene — Some Strange Curios—The ZXazjeel.
ing Club—/alapahar Military Depóź—Hotels—Boarding-
houses—Contemplated Improvements in the Station.
THE Town of Darjeeling occupies a mountain ridge,
stretching from south to north, which, at a point called the
Chaurusta, about the centre of the station, gives off two
spurs, one to the right and the other to the left, known
respectively as Lebong and Birch Hill. The ridge on
which the station is situated is very narrow at the top ;
along it most of the European houses are perched, while
others occupy positions on the flanks. The Eden and
Jubilee Sanitariums, the Police Lines, the Bazar, and the Rail-
way Station are built on the lower portion of the western slope
of the ridge, and below these lie the Jail, the Botanic Gar-
den, and the native town, chiefly occupied by the poorer
classes of natives, and consisting of huts built without
method or regularity. Almost all the houses in the town
are built of bricks or stone, and roofed with corrugated
or plain iron sheets—some of the buildings, such as The
62 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
Shrubbery (the residence of His Honor the Lieutenant-Gov-
ernor of Bengal), the new Government Offices, the Eden
Sanitarium, the Deputy Commissioner's house, and the villas
belonging to His Highness the Maharajah of Cooch Behar
and other residents, being exceedingly picturesque. The
effect which the sight of the station produces upon the new-
comer as the train gradually wends its way down the incline
from Ghoom is charming. The town is a pretty grouping
of bungalows set in scenery, which for grandeur and sub-
limity cannot be surpassed.
Observatory Hill is the most prominent height in the
town, and may be taken as a convenient point from which to
make a survey of the public buildings. The hill, it may be
mentioned, is no longer an observatory station, this having
been transferred to St. Paul’s School, of which more here-
after. At the foot of the steep incline is the Chaurusta, or
“meeting of four roads.” Here there is a Band stand,
where the Volunteer Band plays of an evening, and Calcutta
society is wont to congregate during the after-work ride or
walk, The Mall runs round Observatory Hill, and com-
mands fine views of the valleys far below covered with tea-
gardens, the Lebong Spur, and the snowy range in the
distance, with Kinchinjunga, king of all, towering aloft, its
height and double-peaked summit distinguishing it from all
the other mountains. Round the Mall are a number of
fine bungalows, including The Shrubbery, the Darjeeling
home of the Lieutenant-Governor of Bengal, and the Her-
mitage, the residence of the Maharajah of Cooch Behar,
The former is a commodious mansion, situated in extensive
and prettily laid out grounds. On a lower level to The
Mall, running round the same spur, is Birch Hill Road, a
beautiful winding pathway shaded by fine foliage, amidst
which that of the tree fern is conspicuous. The glimpses
THE STATION OF DARJEELING. 63
of scenery along this pathway are magnificent, every bend
disclosing new beauties.
Near Government House is the Cricket Ground; also the
Town Hall, and St. Andrew's Church. The Town Hall is,
from a social point of view, the most important public
building in Darjeeling. It is a plain but commodious
structure, and capitally suited for the purposes for which
it is used. Here are the head-quarters of the Station Amuse-
ment Club. Well laid out Tennis Courts adjoin the build-
ing, and Balls, Concerts, and Theatrical Entertainments are
also held under the auspices of the Club. The Doorgah
Poojah holidays, at the end of September and beginning
of October, when “all Calcutta” comes up for a few days to
the hills, is especially the season of festivity, the Club
organizing for the occasion Theatricals, a Saturday “Pop,”
Rifle Shooting Competitions, Cricket Matches, Sports, Sub-
scription Balls, a Fancy Dress Ball, and a Fancy Fair,
During these ten days Darjeeling is at its gayest. When
the Ball Room is not required for other purposes, the Club
uses it as a Skating Rink, this amusement being one of the
most popular and fashionable in the station. To become a
member of the Amusement Club, an introduction by a
member is necessary. The subscription is Rs. 8 per month
for a single person who plays Tennis, Rs. 6 without use of
Tennis courts; for a family Rs. 12. The Rink subscription
is separate, being Re. I per month, with Rs. 4 entrance fee,
The Town Hall also contains reading and other rooms, the
former being supplied by the Amusement Club with the
leading newspapers and periodicals of the day.
Adjoining the Town Hall is St. Andrew's Church, a plain
barn-like structure occupying the summit of a little knoll.
The Old Church, on the same site, was founded in 1843.
64 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
The foundation - stone of the present edifice was laid by
Bishop Milman in 1870. The Church seats about 360 people.
The east window is rather pretty, and there are about a dozen
tablets in memory of former residents, planters in the
neighbourhood, and visitors who have chanced to die a
Darjeeling. The most notable is that to Lieutenant-General
Lloyd, who took part in the founding of Darjeeling as a
British Sanitarium (wide Historical Chapter), and who died
in the station in 1865, aged 76 years. The Chaplain of St.
Andrew’s Church also ministers to the soldiers at Jalapahar.
. On the western slope of the hill, below The Shrubbery, is
the new Secretariat, a very handsome building completed in
1887. It contains the offices of the Deputy Commissioner,
and of the other Government officials of the district, and
also the Law Courts. Not far off is the cemetery, finely
laid out on the hill-side in several terraces with steps com-
municating. Many of the gravestones are of great interest.
One dated 11th August 1886, and erected by the Asiatic
Society of Bengal, is to the memory of H. J. Alexander
Csona de Korosie, a native of Hungary, and an eminent
philologist. He compiled a dictionary and grammar of the
Tibetan language, and died at Darjeeling on his way to
Lhassa. A number of distinguished soldiers and explorers
(several of these latter of foreign nationality) are buried
here; likewise many children, doubtless brought up from
the plains too late for the bracing hill air to restore them to
health. On the same slope, but higher up, are the Loretto
Convent School for Girls and St. Joseph's School for Boys,
both managed by the Jesuit community; and also a small
Roman Catholic Chapel.
Beneath St. Andrew's Church and the Town Hall, with the
Eden Sanitarium midway between, is the Lloyd Botanic
THE STATION OF DARJEELING. 65
Garden, named after the townsman of that name, founder
of the local Bank, who made a gift of the site. The
Botanic Garden of Darjeeling was originally situated at
Rungaroon, six miles from the station, at the lower edge
of the great forest which clothes the Senchal mountain.
This garden was established by Sir Richard Temple, then
Lieutenant-Governor of Bengal. It was recognized that
rich as are the hills around Darjeeling in many beauti-
ful sorts of trees, they are yet destitute of the most remark-
able orders of the Himalayan region, namely, the coniferae—
the cedars, firs, pines, larches, spruces, cypresses, and others,
which are such usual and striking objects in other parts of
the mountainous country. The cultivation of many species
of the rhododendron genus, which are found in such
magnificence in the higher parts of Darjeeling District, and
of the neighbouring state of Sikkim, also offered an interest-
ing field for research. There were, further, many flowering
trees and shrubs growing in other quarters, which by care-
ful study might be acclimatized at the Darjeeling Station,
a locality so favored by nature for botanical experiments.
Moreover, the growth of a large tea industry in the surround-
ing districts, the approach of the railway, the proximity of the
cinchona plantations, the presence of head-quarters of the
Forest Department of Bengal during several months in each
year, and other material causes combined to afford en-
couragement for an undertaking of this description on the
part of Government, and to promise the successful issue
of such efforts as might be made for the advancement of
practical science and for the public benefit. Accordingly,
the Rungaroon Botanic Garden was founded in 1875. The
elevation of the site (6,ooo feet, and therefore consider-
ably lower than that of eeling), its convenient distance
(six miles) from the station, the excellent soil, and the
D. G. 5
66 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
abundance of water for most months of the year caused
Rungaroon to be selected, an additional reason being that
the land was Government property. The choice, however,
as we shall see, proved to be an unfortunate one. Runga-
roon soon grew to be a garden of great beauty — which it
indeed is to this day, being a favourite place for pic-nic
parties (see chapter on “Excursions”). Plants of all kinds
—epiphytes, Orchids, gingers, &c., that would grow at the
elevation of Rungaroon, were collected and attached to the
trees, and a representative piece of virgin forest was con-
structed. The vacant spaces were filled up with species of
plants indigenous to Nepaul, Sikkim, and Bhutan. A third
section was reserved for exotic plants of botanical interest
and suited to the clima!e and elevation. More attention,
however, was from the first given to the growth of indige.
nous plants than to that of exotics, and every flowering
plant growing naturally in these districts between 8,000 feet
and 9,000 feet, was considered worthy of being tried,
either in the cleared or forest portions of the garden.
However disaster fell upon the garden. The position
proved to be a most exposed one at certain seasons of the
year, and it was swept by periodical hail-storms, these com-
pletely destroying the young plants, and severely damaging
even the older trees. The conclusion was reluctantly come
to in 1875 that the experiment would have to be aban-
doned. At this juncture Mr. Lloyd, of Lloyd's Bank,
Darjeeling, came forward with the handsome offer of the site
on which the present Botanic Garden stands on the slope
below the bazar. The offer was accepted by Government,
and the situation has been found to be a most suitable one,
being within the station and well sheltered. Rungaroon,
it may be added, is still used by Government as a forest.
aursery. The Lloyd Garden is tastefully laid out, and
THE STATION OF DARJEELING. 67
contains a number of conservatories. The flowers chiefly
cultivated are English varieties, there being few flowering
plants at this elevation indigenous to the neighbourhood,
and those from a lower level dying off during the cold
season. The one great drawback to the garden is the
prevalence of huge grubs, some of them five inches long
and over an inch in circumference, which literally infest
the place; this is supposed to be due to the fact that close
by was the old municipal “tip” for town refuse. Careful
experiments are also made in the garden in naturalising
English potatoes. At first these succeeded splendidly in
and around Darjeeling station, but latterly there has been a
falling off, due to the fact that altered climatic conditions
deteriorate the tubers and render them more liable to
disease. The garden works at a profit, the net gain in the
year 1887-88 being close on Rs. 1, ooo. . . " ..
Near the Lloyd Botanic Garden is Lochnagar, where the
Scotch Mission is located. It has a church, also used as a
school-room, an Anglo-Vernacular School, a Vernacular
school, a printing press, a bazar preaching-house, and a
book depôt. Attached to the Mission are four catechists,
for the Nepaulese, Lepchas, Bhuteas, and plainsmen re-
spectively. The people are preached to in the bazar on
Sundays, and visited at their houses and on the tea-gardens'
on week days. The Mission has also twenty Vernacular
schools scattered all over the division, with an attendance
of over 8oo pupils, of whom about Ioo are girls. Work in
translating the Gospels into the various Vernaculars is also
performed by the Mission.
Further down the slope, immediately beneath the Botanic
Garden, is the jail, an establishment of unpretentious ap-
pearance, consisting of several barracks surrounded by a.
68 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
high brick wall. It usually contains about Too prisoners.
All long sentence convicts are sent to the Presidency Jail,
Calcutta. The industries followed in the prison are the
baking of bread and the making of cane chairs, some of
the prisoners also work outside in charge of a warder; their
distinctive marks are the prison costume, a wooden tally,
with number inscribed, round the neck, and an iron ring
round the left ankle. The jail used to supply the whole
station with bread, but it has now competitors in the shape
of four private bakeries in the town. -
The bazar is in the hollow below the main ridge of the
station. The Eden Sanitarium overlooks it from a rising
knoll at the northern end ; this establishment is fully
described in a subsequent chapter. Near here is a Hindoo
temple, surmounted with rather an elegant cupola, and a
tiny church-like building, the meeting-place of the Brahmo
Somaj community. The Municipal Office, an unattractive
looking building, is also at the foot of the Sanitarium Hill,
overlooking the Boatanic Garden. The bazar itself is not up
to the requirements of the town. The weekly market is held
on Sunday, when hillmen from considerable distances and
labourers from the surrounding plantations come in in large
numbers. The Scene on these occasions is varied, curious–-
almost unique. There will be seen Lepchas, Limboos,
Bhuteas, and Nepaulese, mixed up with the Hindoo,
Mahomedan, and Eurasian servants of European gentle-
men. Every conceivable article is on sale—from praying-
wheels and local curios down to much-advertised English
hair-dyes and soothing syrups for infants. Sheep, goats,
pigs, poultry, eggs, butter, vegetables, and tea, together
with European pickles, jams, sardines, tinned meats, and
other stores, are the chief edible constituents of the
heterogeneous assortment of articles offered for purchase.
THE STATION OF DARJEELING. 69
The vending and purchasing proceed amidst much noise,
the light-hearted hill people, men and women, laughing,
Singing, shouting, playing practical jokes on each other,
every broad face shining with good temper and mirth.
The rosy-cheeked women, some of them with really hand-
Some faces, are quite unlike their Hindoo sisters in the
plains; they enjoy the most perfect freedom, and laugh and
romp about like veritable children. Many of them have
their youngest-born strapped to their back in the inevitable
bamboo basket, little yellow chubby morsels of humanity,
pretty enough, though we cannot endorse the opinion of
the Hon’ble Emily Eden, as expressed in her diary, that
“little native babies are much prettier than little English
ditto.” Altogether, this bright and merry Sunday morning
Scene should on no account be missed by the visitor to
Darjeeling.
When in the bazar, the visitor should not fail to pay a
visit to the depôt of Mr. Paul Möwis, which forms the only
museum, so to speak, in the locality. It always contains a
large assortment of curios, such as praying-wheels of
various kinds, tom-toms made of human skulls, and trum-
pets made of human thigh-bones, these being used in the
Buddhist temples, lamps, censers, bells, brass cups, and
other furnishings of temples, metal figures of Buddha, and
weapons used by all kinds of hill races. It may here be
explained that nearly all the curiosities for sale in Darjeel-
ing are made simply for the dealers, it being very difficult
to get a genuine article that has been in actual use in the
temples or the houses of the people. The hand praying-
wheels are most curious; they are revolved from left to
right, to the monotonous dirge of “Om Mani Padmi Om,”
meaning, “Hail to him of the Lotus and the Jewel.” The
prayers are inside the cylinder, printed from wood on bands
7o GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
of paper a yard long, each band having inscribed upon it
four prayers. These are in Sanscrit, the language in which
the Lamas keep all their records. The double-headed
tom-tom, or small drum, is formed of two crowns of human
skulls cemented together back to back ; each face is then
covered with parchment, and encloses some pebbles. The
human thighbone fashioned into a trumpet is also very
remarkable. It is often that of a Lama, and is valuable
according to its length. A Darjeeling tradition tells that
one of the first Europeans buried at the station, a tall man,
was disinterred by resurrectionist Bhuteas for his “trum-
pet-bones.” Among the other curios, may be mentioned
the Bhutea locks, made of brass, a most ingenious piece
of mechanism ; they serve their purpose admirably, and are
an amusing puzzle as well. Mr. Möwis is also an enthusi-
astic entomologist, holding diplomas from the Universities
of Berlin and Leipsic. He has always on show and for
sale beautiful moths, butterflies, and beetles, of which,
taken together, there are some Io, ooo varieties to be found
in the District of Darjeeling.
Beneath the bazar is the Lowis Sanitarium for natives
described hereafter. Still further down is Fernie Cottage,
the Bhutea-Lepcha boarding school. A few hundred
yards to the South of the bazar is the Railway Station, a
very plain erection. On the slope above the bazar and the
railway are the Police Lines, the public Dispensary, the
Post and Telegraph Office, the Union Chapel, the office of
the Darjeeling Mezws, and the Darjeeling Club House.
The three first named call for no special mention. The
Union Chapel is a plain edifice, belonging to the Dissenting
community. The Darjeeling AWews, the only newspaper
in the district, is an old-established journal. It is published
weekly, on Saturdays, and contains lists of visitors and
"THE STATION OF DARJEELING. 7 I
residents. It also serves as a guide to the amusements
and doings of the day. The Darjeeling Club has for its
home a very handsome and well-situated bungalow. . It
admits two classes of members, permanent and tempo-
rary. Admission to permanent membership is by ballot,
the entrance fee being Rs. 70, and the monthly subscrip-
tion Rs. 7 to Rs. 3, according to distance from the station.
Visitors to Darjeeling may, if considered eligible, be made
temporary members by the Committee for any period not
exceeding three months; they have to be proposed and
seconded by permanent members, and pay a monthly sub-
scription of one gold mohur, or Rs. 16. The Club contains
sleeping accommodation for resident members, or members
temporarily visiting the station. It also has a library, from
which books may be taken by ladies residing in the town
without any gentleman of their families, on payment of a
monthly subscription of Rs. 4.
Two and-a-half miles south of the Chaurusta is the military
depôt of Jalapahar. It is reached by the Auckland and
Western Jalapahar roads. On the slopes above these high-
ways are many fine bungalows, among them being Little
Chevremont, the hill home of the Lord Bishop of Calcutta.
Further along is Colinton, the residence of the Ezra family
of Caloutta, quite the “show’’ bungalow of the station, the
large glass-houses attached being filled with a grand display
of flowers. The hill is crowned by the extensive estate of
St. Paul's School, dealt with fully in a chapter to follow.
Here also is the Qbservatory, of which more anon. At
Jalapahar there are a parade ground and barracks accom-
modating 150 soldiers. There are also quarters for a
mounted battery of artillery. In connection with the depôt
are a Protestant Church and a Catholic Chapel, where
services are held by the Pastor of St. Andrew's Church,
72 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJ EELING.
and by the Jesuit Fathers from Loretto College respectively.
The sanitarium for soldiers used to be still further along
the spur of hills, at Senchal, over 8, ooo feet high ; but the
situation was found to be too cold and exposed, and the
site was changed to the present one.
The hotels in Darjeeling are two in number, Wood-
lands and Drum-Druid, being the names of the establish-
ments. Both are well-conducted. The hotel charges are
Rs. 7 per diem, or Rs 6 per diem when the stay made is
for a month. Ponies cost Rs. 3 per diem, or Rs. 4 when
the ride extends beyond the limits of the station. It may
here also be mentioned that “dandies,” or palanquins, are
paid for at the rate of 4 annas each carrier for the first hour,
and 2 pice an hour afterwards, or 8 annas a day; two
Carriers suffice for a child, and three or four for an adult.
There are a number of excellent boardinghouses in
Darjeeling, the principal being Rockville, Rosebank (for-
merly the residence of the Maharajah of Burdwan), Gresham
House, Step-a-side, Ada Villa, and Meadow Bank, the last-
named being in connection with Drum-Druid Hotel. The
charges average Rs. 6 per diem.
A number of improvements are contemplated in the
station. The bazar, for example, has been found to be
inconveniently small, and to serve its purpose there should
be much more covered space. At present it is nearly all
open, there being only two roofed sheds of any dimensions,
one being a general market, and the other the meat market.
We believe the Municipality intend to remedy this gradu-
ally, by spending a sum of RS. Io, ooo annually for five
years. This expenditure, it is calculated, will provide the
town with a spacious bazar, with roofing over its whole area.
A further improvement would be the holding of markets
THE STATION OF DARJEELING. 73
more frequently than once a week. Darjeeling is increasing
rapidly, and this system is found to be quite behind the
age, often causing perplexity to householders as to the pro-
curing of supplies towards the end of the week. Another
Municipal scheme in embryo is to convert the old Town Hall
in the bazar, a small portion of which is at present occupied
by the Government Printing Press, into a place of recrea-
tion for the middle-class Europeans who now resort in such
numbers to the station. The Amusement Club, which has
its quarters at the new Town Hall, is rather exclusive—
inevitably so, it must be admitted, by everyone who knows
Indian Society; the carrying out of this proposal would,
accordingly, meet a very proper demand, the facilities for
recreation being thus equalized in the case of both classes.
We understand also that a private company has taken up
one of the roads above the bazar, and intends to build there
some fifteen small double-storeyed houses for Europeans
containing four or five rooms, and at rentals not exceeding
Rs. 50 per month. This scheme, when carried out, will
bring up to the station a still larger contingent of middle-
class European visitors, so that the providing of a special
Amusement Club for them becomes all the more desirable.
‘CHAPTER VIII,
THE EUROPEAN AND NATIVE SANITARIUMS.
Establishment of the Eden Sanitarium—/ts Aims and
Objects—Medical Staff—Scale of Charges—Initial Cost—
Zhe Zozvis /ubilee Sanitarium—Z3epartments and Rates
—Success of the Institution.
THE Eden Sanitarium is a handsome building occupying
a commanding situation on a small detached hill almost in
the centre of the station. It is undoubtedly one of the most
useful institutions in the whole of Bengal. The want of a
European hospital in Darjeeling to meet the requirements
of patients and convalescents coming up from the plains
had for long been apparent to the Civil Surgeons in charge
of the station. The matter was represented to the late
Lieutenant-Governor, Sir Ashley Eden, and he warmly
supported the idea of establishing a good and well-organiz-
ed paying European hospital. This was in 1881, and it
was resolved at first to open a temporary hospital giving
private accommodation to Seven patients, and a building
near the Municipal dispensary was adapted and equipped,
partly at the cost of Government and partly from funds
raised by private subscription and from the proceeds of a
bazar held during the Doorgah Poojahs in 1880. The tem-
porary hospital was inaugurated in May 1881, and closed
in April 1883, when the Eden Sanitarium was opened for
the reception of patients. During that time a considerable
THE EUROPEAN AND NATIVE SANITARIUMS. 75
number of patients had been treated in the temporary
hospital, paying one rupee daily only as a hospital charge and
providing their own diet, fuel, and lighting. The success
of the temporary hospital was encouraging to the prospects
of the larger and permanent one, and the hopes then enter-
tained have been more than realized.
The building of the Eden Sanitarium was actually com-
menced in November 1881, and it should have been
handed over by the contractors to Government in August
1882. Delays, however, occurred, more particularly in the
finishing work, and the Committee of Management did not
obtain possession of the building till April 1883. As,
however, the arrangements of the Committee had been
Complete for months past, it was at once possible to open
the institution and admit patients. The invalids occupying
the temporary hospital were transferred to the new Sani-
tarium, and within the first week several patients who had
been waiting for the opening of the institution came up
from Calcutta. The Committee from the first recognized
the fact that in a large number of cases it will always be
necessary to admit a relative or attendant in addition to
the patient. The Sanitarium, as an institution where only
paying patients are received, is materially different from
an ordinary hospital, where a patient is admitted and main-
tained at the cost of the hospital funds, in many cases
charitable, and in India usually provided by Government.
At the Sanitarium the patients are on a totally different
footing, and have a right to expect, in return for what they
pay, quite different treatment and rules to those existing in
ordinary hospitals. It constantly happens that a wife wishes
to be admitted with a sick husband, or zice versá, a mother
accompanies her sick child, or a sick lady is sent to the
hills with her children, or a daughter is in attendance on
76 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING,
a sick father, or even a special nurse accompanies a patient
to the Sanitarium. The institution might as well not exist
if admission were to be refused to these attendants or
dependents. From the first, among those who applied for
and received admission were many persons recovering from
sickness in the plains who were not of a class to be found
in the wards of an ordinary hospital, but rather in general
medical practice. This precisely accords with the aims of
the institution, which offers a change to a convalescent home
and careful medical treatment to invalids pulled down by
severe sickness or suffering from obstinate disease, who are
unable to take the sea voyage which richer people could
afford. It is also recognized by Government that it is
cheaper in the long run to send up its servants to Darjeeling
when they are out of sorts, for a few weeks' treatment in a
European climate instead of their having to take leave, or
linger on in a condition of inefficiency from illness at
Stations in the plains. It has been found that patients
come to the Sanitarium not only from all parts of the Lower
Provinces of Bengal, but also from great and unexpected dis-
tances. It is important to mention that an invalid carriage,
fitted with a spring couch, can be secured for the jour-
ney up the mountain railway, the special charge being
an extra first-class fare (Rs. 16-o-6). There is also an
invalid chair at the ferry over the Ganges, so that every
chance is given to patients whose strength may be greatly
reduced. The staff of the Sanitarium consists of a resident
medical officer, a steward, and two sisters from the St. John the
Baptist (Clewer) community, by arrangement with the Sister
Superior of the Lady Canning Home, Calcutta. The Sisters
superintend the nursing and other domestic arrangements
in place of a matron. Under-nurses are engaged to attend
to Cases that may require special attention, and patients
THE EUROPEAN AND NATIVE SANITAl{IUMS. 77
may also bring their own nurses. The Civil Surgeon of
the District is Manager and Medical Superintendent, and
visits the Sanitarium daily. An influential working Com-
mittee supervises the affairs of the establishment.
The building is a striking feature in the landscape, both
from its position and its ornate style of architecture. It
is two-storeyed, in the form of three sides of a square, the
main block running nearly north and South, the front being
towards the south. The internal arrangements are admir-
ably adapted to the purposes for which the institution was
intended. The rooms and wards are all well warmed,
ventilated, and lighted, and replete with modern conve-
niences and comforts. The centre or front block is for the
accommodation of first-class and intermediate patients, and
the two wings for second and third class respectively. For
the first-class and intermediate there are, on the upper
floor, eight sets of rooms, consisting each of bed, dressing
and bath room, and common sitting and dining rooms.
These rooms are reserved for ladies and married couples,
with or without children. On the ground floor are eight
similar sets of rooms, with common dining and sitting rooms,
for gentlemen. The charge for first-class accommodation
is Rs. 8/- per diem, and for intermediate Rs. 6/- per diem,
which covers rent of rooms, attendance, diet, lighting, fuel,
as well as medical attendance and medicine. A relative,
accompanying with a view to secure constant attendance on
a patient, or any other person in charge of a patient, is per-
mitted to reside in the Sanitarium on the payment of Rs. 6/-
per diem first-class, and Rs. 5/- intermediate, provided the
presence of such relative or attendant does not prevent
the admission of other patients. For children under 12
years and over 3 years of age, accompanying their parents,
the charge is Rs. 3/- daily for first-class, and Re. 1/8 for
78 GUIDE BOOK TO D RJEELING.
intermediate. For infants under 3 years of age the charge is
Re. 1/8 first-class, and Re. I intermediate. The charge for
second-class accommodation is Rs. 4/- per diem. There
are five small rooms, each containing two beds on the upper
floor for ladies or married couples, and the same number
on the ground floor for gentlemen. The verandahs in this
wing are enclosed and form public sitting-rooms, besides
which there are dining-rooms on each floor. The patients
in the second-class have the use of an English bath-room
and of a common lavatory on each floor. Relatives or
other persons accompanying patients are admitted on the
same conditions as in the first-class, but there is no reduc-
tion in the rates. The charge for children is the same as in
the intermediate. The charge for third-class accommoda-
tion is Re. 1/12 per diem. There is a large ward contain-
ing beds for women and children on the upper floor and a
similar ward for men on the ground floor. Besides this
there are common sitting and dining rooms on each floor.
On each floor also are bath-rooms and lavatories on the Eng-
lish plan. Relatives accompanying patients pay the full rates,
and are only accommodated in the Sanitarium provided the
beds they occupy are not required for patients, and are
given up if required. Children between 12 years and 3
years of age pay Re. 1/- daily, and under three years As. 12.
All patients pay for their personal washing. Patients wish-
ing to come to the Sanitarium must previously communi-
cate with the Superintendent, either forwarding to him a
medical certificate from their ordinary attendant, or furnish-
ing him with sufficient information regarding their health
to enable him to Sanction their admission. Urgent cases,
however, are admitted at any time without previous notice.
Ladies are admitted for their confinement into the first
and second class, subject to certain extra charges in addition
THE EUROPEAN AND NATIVE SANITARIUMS. 79
to the ordinary rates. These extra charges may be ascer-
tained on application to the Superintendent. A reduction
in the charges for first and intermediate class patients is
made in the case of Managers and Assistants of Firms,
Tea-Gardens, Indigo and Silk Concerns, Public Companies,
Banks, and generally of large institutions employing Euro-
peans, who subscribe annually to the maintainence of the
Sanitarium according to a fixed scale set forth in the Rules
and Regulations. No persons suffering from infectious or
contagious disease, fits, or insanity, are admitted as patients.
Visitors are allowed between the hours of 7 A M. and 9 P.M.
The cost of the construction of the Eden Sanitarium
was borne by the Bengal Government, the total, with
certain necessary changes and additions, being Rs. 1,72,339.
In this amount is included the cost of the Doulton Pottery
Stoves throughout the building, which burn coal and effect
a great saving in the consumption of fuel. The Govern-
ment also provided the institution with surgical instruments
and a free supply of medicines for the first two years of its
existence. The furnishing and equipment of the hospital
were carried out by public subscription, the total sum col-
lected being Rs. 23,750, of which the Maharajah of Burd-
wan contributed the handsome sum of Rs. Io, ooo. The
popularity of the Institution has steadily grown as its ad-
vantages and able management have become more widely
known. At almost every season of the year it is now occu-
pied to its utmost capacity, the accommodation being for
about Ioo patients.
The Lowis Jubilee Sanitarium, for Natives, established
in 1887 under the auspices of Mr. E. E. Lowis, Commis-
sioner of the Rajshye Division, stands below the railway
station some distance down the hill, The founding of the
8o GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
institution was resolved upon at a public meeting, attended
by Englishmen and by Natives, held in Darjeeling in May
1887, for the purpose of considering measures for erecting
a permanent memorial in honour of the Jubilee of the
Empress-Queen. The Maharajah of Cooch Behar made a
free gift of his Bryn Gwine property extending to seven and-
a-half acres and worth half-a-lakh of rupees, as a site for the
Sanitarium, while a sum of Rs. 9o, ooo placed by Rajah
Gobind Lal Roy at the disposal of the Commissioner of
the Rajshye Division to be spent on any work of public
utility was applied to the purposes of the institution. Gov-
ernment aid in the shape of the services of an Assistant
Surgeon for two years was also accorded, and the Sanitarium
was opened provisionally in September 1887, and perma-
nently on April 1st, 1888. The result has been an undouht-
ed and a somewhat unexpected success, the Native Medical
Profession giving the institution every support. Every en-
deavour has been put forth to make the existence of the
institution known to the Native community, and though at
first subscriptions were slow in coming in, the persevering
efforts of the Committee of Management have resulted in a
large sum being collected. The Sanitarium has two depart-
ments, the Hindoo Orthodox Department and the General
Department, there being three classes in each, at rates
ranging from Rs. 4-8 to Re. I per diem. The charges
include rent of rooms, diet, and medical attendance. In
the General Department the patients dine together English
fashion; in the Orthodox Department Native customs are
strictly followed, It has been found that the admissions on
each side are almost exactly equal. The popularity of the
institution is steadily increasing. An excellent beginning
was made, there being no fewer than 199 admissions in the
first year of its existence, and an extension of the buildings
THE EUROPEAN AND NATIVE SANITARIUMS. 8 I
had to be carried out. These patients came from 27 dis-
tricts of the Lower Provinces of Bengal, Calcutta sending
rather more than one-half. Provided for the amusement
of the residents are a tennis-court, a billiard-room; and a
library. The building is a handsome one, and any Euro-
pean visitor is made welcome by the Superintendent.
CHAPTER IX.
EDUCATIONAL ESTABLISHMENTS FOR EUROPEANS.
Parjeeling as a School Centre—/ēs Advantages—St. Paul’s
School—St. Joseph's College—Zoreſto Convent—ZDarjeeling
Girls' School—Arivate Boarding Schools.
THE climate of Darjeeling is so admirably adapted for
children that it is not surprising to find a large number of
European boarding-schools located in the station. Their
tendency is to multiply still further, for now that parents
find that the conditions of health in Darjeeling are quite
equal to those of England and that provision is made in
the different seminaries for giving their sons and daughters
a high-class education on thoroughly English lines, the
popularity of the place as a school centre is rapidly increas-
ing. The depreciated rupee and the heavy school charges
at home partly account for this result; and yet another
consideration, perhaps most important of all, is that parents
and children do not lose touch of each other, the holidays
are spent in the family circle, and a few hours' journey at
any time brings the School-boy or School-girl home, or the
father and mother up to the hills, on a visit equally pleasant
and beneficial to all parties. That most dismal drawback
to Anglo-Indian life, namely, the fact of children growing
up with little or no knowledge of their parents, and parents
passing into the vale of years ignorant of the character and
disposition of their children, is thus avoided.
EDUCATIONAL ESTABLISHMENTS FOR EUROPEANs. 83
|
The most important educational establishment for boys
is St. Paul's School; it occupies a splendid site on the
gummit of the Jalapahar ridge, commanding the best views
in Darjeeling. The Head-master's bungalow is no other
than Mr. Hodgson's house, so frequently referred to by
Dr. Hooker in his “Himalayan Journals.” On this classic
ground the Observatory is now very appropriately situated,
the scientific observations being taken under the super-
vision of the head-master, Mr. R. Carter, B.A., Oxon. The
school estate extends to 63 acres, and is finely laid out.
The establishment was originally in Calcutta, whence it was
‘emoved to Darjeeling in 1864. In 1888 the old school.
I
Wºm, were renovated and enlarged. The handsome new
-
building, known as Bishop Johnson's Hall, was also Complet-
ed in that year, the name being given in recognition of the
fact that this addition to the premises was mainly due to
the liberality and energy of that prelate. It may be men-
tioned also that to Bishop Johnson the school owes its
|
i Chapel. By these additions the accommodation of the
school has been increased to 170. The number of pupils
| now in residence or attendance is over Ioo boarders and
| about 20 day-scholars. The teaching staff comprises four
masters, educated entirely in England, three of whom are
| graduates, two of Oxford, and one of Trinity College,
Dublin, while the fourth holds a First Division Government
|Certificate. The other teachers are all highly efficient and
experience; Every attention is given to developing the
hysique of the boys, cricket and other manly sports being
sedulously encouraged, The establishment contains a well-
supplied library and reading-room, where Indian and home
papers may be read, and chess or draughts played. St.
Paul's School, it may be added, has achieved considerable
success in the examinations of the Calcutta University, to


t
l
84 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
which it is affiliated up to the B. A. degree; and pupils
from it have passed into the Engineering Colleges at Sibpur
(Calcutta) and Rurki. The fees, it remains to be stated,
are Rs. 360 per annum, or Rs. 4o a month, for the school
year of nine months (March to November).
St. Joseph's College stands on the slope beneath St.
Andrew’s Church and the Town Hall. It is a Catholic
seminary, formerly conducted by the Capuchin Fathers,
but now by the Jesuits. Pupils of other persuasions, how-
ever, are also admitted. The College at present teaches up to
the Entrance Examination of the University, and is conduct-
ed on exactly the same principles as St. Xavier's College,
Calcutta. A library of useful and interesting books is pro.
vided for the pupils. The School year is ten months, the
vacation being from 20th December to 20th February. The
terms are Rs. 5oo per annum, payable Rs. 50 monthly for
the 10 months of residence. The number of pupils is about
50 boarders and 4o day-scholars. There are 11 jºy
Fathers on the teaching staff. A magnificent new building
is being erected at North Point, a splendid site, the free *
gift of the Bengal Government. The new St. Joseph's
College will have a façade of 3oo feet and two wings of
3oo feet each, and will be one of the handsomest educa.
tional institutions in the Presidency. The estimated cost
is over two lakhs of rupees.
Just below St. Joseph's College is the Loretto Convent,
an institution for the education of young ladies. It is a
Catholic School, but Protestant pupils are also admitted;
and allowed to attend their own place of worship, provided
their guardians appoint a person to accompany them. The
course of studies reaches the standard of the University
Entrance Examination, and in addition such accomplish
f
s

EDUCATIONAL ESTABLISHMENTS FOR EUROPEANS. 85
-
ments as music, drawing, painting, French, German, and
Italian are taught. There is a well-furnished library in the
Seminary, and pleasant grounds surround it. Boys up to
the age of 12 are also admitted. The number of pupils
averages about 120 boarders (70 girls and 50 boys) and
4o day-scholars (20 girls and 20 boys). The terms are
Rs. 40 per month, not including extra branches of study.
There are about 24 Nuns in residence, from the far-famed
Loretto Convent, Dublin. This is the oldest school in
Darjeeling, having been established so far back as 1846.
Conducted on similar educational lines to the Loretto
Convent School, but on Protestant principles, is the DAR-
JEELING GIRLs’ SCHOOL, finely situated just below the Mall,
between it and the East Birch Hill road. It is under the
management of a Board, the Bishop of Calcutta and the
Lieutenant Governor of Bengal being ex-officio trustees.
'The terms are Rs. 25 per month for boarders, and Rs. Io
to Rs. 16 for day-scholars. Beyond the ordinary course of
study pupils may take up the usual branches of scholastic
accomplishments. The pupils number over 60 boarders,
and about a dozen day-scholars, a few of the latter being
little boys under the age of twelve. The school was
founded in 1875.
There is one private boarding school for young ladies
and little boys in the station, Hampton Court, Pleasant
Valley (Mrs. Sells). This school has the reputation of
being the most select school in the station.
There is a scheme on foot for starting a Non-Conformist
School on unsectarian principles, which may come into
| . º
existence before long,
CHAPTER X.
MUNICIPAL AND DISTRICT ADMINISTRATION.
Municipal Area, Population, and Revenue—Drainage—Dú ,
posal of Zozem A^efuse—Water-supply – District Area—- |
Population—Religious Classification–7owns and Villages
—Civil and Criminal Justice—Police—Éducation for the
Avatives—The Zillah Schoo!— Bhutea-Zepcha Boarding.
Alstað/is/.../nezzá,
THE Municipal area of Darjeeling station covers an area
of 5% square miles, and contains an ordinary population o
about 7,018 according to the Census of 1881; but being th;
great summer resort in Bengal from the heat of the plains, tha,
population necessarily fluctuates considerably according to
the season of the year. It is estimated that in the summer
months the number of inhabitants is about 12,Coo. The in.
come of the Municipality for the year 1888-89 amounted to
Rs. 1, 19, 199, excluding an opening balance of Rs. 26,520,
The expenditure amounted to Rs. 1,39,616. The year thus
closed with a balance in hand of Rs. 6, Io 3. Among the
duties of the Municipality is to provide for the maintenance! .
of a conservancy, a police establishment, and the road
of the station. The body was constituted in 1850, and
its crest is the appropriate one of two crossed Žužeris,
or Nepaulese knives, so commonly seen in the district.
The Municipal business has been guided by a succession}
of able and energetic Commissioners, who have had theſ;





MUNICIPAL AND DISTRICT ADMINISTRATION. 87
advantage, in many instances, of valuable advice and sug-
gestions from some of the cleverest and most experienced
officers of Government, who have resided in the town for
a few months of every year. It is not to be wondered at,
therefore, that the sanitary arrangements of the station,
which are also assisted by the natural lie of the land, a
bracing climate, and a fairly large Municipal revenue, are
everything that could be desired. The Sanitary Commis-
Sioner of Bengal (Dr. Gregg) pays the town this handsome
compliment:-‘‘Darjeeling is, without exception, the clean-
est, most healthy, and best managed Municipality I have yet
inspected, and the Municipal Commissioners deserve great
praise for the efficient manner in which they have performed
the duties of their trust.”
The drainage of Darjeeling is very good, and is gradually
being further improved year by year. Nearly all the drains
are made of stone, and all those in the bazar and native
town, as well as the important drains in the European
quarter of the town, have been soled with Mirzapore stone
or half-round glazed drain tiles, which makes it an easy
matter to keep them clean. The arrangements in connec-
tion with public latrines, bathing places, markets, roads,
registration of births and deaths, vaccination, and dispen-
saries are all excellent. The town refuse consists mainly of
street-sweepings, stable manure, and cook-room garbage.
It is collected in carts and conveyed to a spot below the
compound of Beechwood Cottage in the native part of the
town, north-west of the market, and is thence carried down
to the wooden “shoot” by a wire tramway 1, ooo feet in
length, which is thrown obliquely across the Chandmara
Jhora. The shoot is situated beyond the left bank of the
Chandmara Jhora at the head of the stream, which is dry
except in the rains. This stream enters the Jhora a long
88 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
way down the hill near the junction of the stream with the
Kag Jhora, a tributary of the Little Rungeet river. The
shoot is 788 feet long, 534 feet wide, and 2 feet deep, and
has an inclination of over 45°. Mehters are employed
along the course of the shoot to keep its channel free from
obstruction, and at the bottom to remove the rubbish to
some distance and throw it further down the khud. To
prevent the accumulation of rubbish which has hitherto
not been put to any useful purpose, a large portion of it is
burnt during the dry season.
The town has an excellent water-supply, brought from
natural springs in the Senchal hill through a six-inch main
pipe to the eastern foot of the Jalapahar hill near Jore
Bungalow, and thence through a four-inch pipe to the
collecting reservoir near Rockville boardinghouse. From
this reservoir it is distributed to the town in pipes of vari-
ous sizes as circumstances require. In the rains the water-
supply is more than sufficient, but in the dry months slight
scarcity is sometimes experienced.
The Administrative District of Darjeeling extends over
an area of 1,234 square miles. Its population, according to
the Census of 1881, was I 55,179 persons, but this figure is
now unquestionably considerably below the mark. The
development of the tea industry and of the region generally
has led to steady immigration, so that more than 50 per
cent. of the population were born outside the limits of the
District. Of these incomers, taking the returns of the 1881
Census, the only figures available, 55,000 are hill-men
from beyond the British frontier, chiefly from Nepaul ;
nearly 5, ooo are from the neighbouring District of Jalpai-
guri, and more than Io, ooo are from Purniah. The re-
mainder are composed of representatives from almost every
MUNICIPAL AND DISTRICT ADMINISTRATION. 89
province of India. The general results of the Census of
1881 may be summarized as follows:—Number of towns
and villages, 943; number of houses, 29,904; population,
I55, 179, namely, males 88,948, and females, 66,231 ; pro-
portion of males in total population, 57.45 per cent.; aver-
age density, I 25’7 persons per square mile ; villages per
Square mile, 76; persons per village, 163; houses per
square mile, 24'2 ; persons per house, 5'3. Classified
according to religious belief, the population was returned as
follows:–Hindus, 126,717; Sikhs, 3; Mahomedans, 8,204 ;
Christians, 842 ; Buddhists, 18,775; Brahmos, 14; aboriginal
religions, 624. The great bulk of the population consists
of aboriginal or semi-aboriginal tribes, among whom the
Nepaulese are the most numerous. The Lepchas, who are
considered the primitive inhabitants of Sikkim, are includ-
ed among the Buddhists, but are few in number, and the
race is said to be declining. The Nepaulese, includiug the
Moormis, are divided among no fewer than 42 sub-tribes,
and are returned among the Hindus. The Rajbansi Kochs
number 30,801. The Bhuteas are not returned separately
in the Census, but are included among the Buddhists.
Of the Hindus proper, the two superior castes of Brahmin
(numbering, including Babhans, Io,739) and Rajput (6,352)
are the most numerously represented, very few of the other
recognized Hindu castes exceeding 1,000 in number. The
population of Darjeeling increased by more than one-half
between 1872 and 1881, and is still growing at rapid rate.
The Nepaulese are coming across the frontier in large
numbers, and are eagerly welcomed by the tea-planters as
their most valuable labourers ; while Bengalis from the
plains are gradually extending over the Terai. The Brahmo
Somaj is represented by a few Bengali Government clerks
at Darjeeling station. The population may be roughly
90 - GUIDE BOOK TO DARJ EELING.
divided into those connected with the tea industry, and the
aboriginal agriculturists. There are no towns with the
exception of Darjeeling station, and Kurseong, situated in
the lower hills, twenty miles to the south, with a population
in 1881 of 4,033. Of the 943 villages, 769 contain fewer
than two hundred inhabitants; I 14 between two hundred
and five hundred ; 46 between five hundred and a thousand;
II between one thousand and two thousand ; and 3 upwards
of two thousand.
There are 3 covenanted officers stationed in the District,
and 6 Magisterial and 4 Revenue and Civil Courts open,
presided over by 6 stipendiary magistrates and 5 civil
judges. The District Police and the Municipal Police are
separate bodies. There is 1 policeman to about every 5
square miles of area, or to every 600 persons in the popula-
tion. The number of annual convictions, mostly for petty
offences, is about I to every 1oo of the population. The
district contains one Jail, at Darjeeling station, which is
necessarily an expensive establishment to keep up by reason
of the small number of prisoners confined. The jail popu-
lation is usually about 1 oo, this being in the proportion,
approximately, of 1 to every 1,500 of the population. Long
sentence prisoners are sent to the Presidency Jail in
Calcutta. -
Education has considerably advanced during recent
years, despite the difficulties caused by an aboriginal popu-
lation speaking various strange tongues, and dwelling in
widely scattered huts among the mountains. Up to 1860,
there was only one school in the District — the Govern-
ment English School, attended by 33 pupils. In 1872,
the number of schools had risen to 29, with 723 pupils.
In 1874, the schools further increased to 46 and the pupils
MUNICIPAL AND DISTRICT ADMINISTRATION. 91
to 994. The Census of 1881 returned 1,610 boys and 179
girls under instruction, and 5,686 males and 269 females
able to read and write, but not under instruction. The
principal educational institution is St. Paul’s School ; and
the other schools for European and Eurasian education are
St. Joseph’s Roman Catholic Seminary, the Darjeeling Con-
vent School, and the Darjeeling Girls' School in Darjeeling
station, and a Government boarding-school at Kurseong.
A Government boarding school for aboriginal tribes has
also been established in Darjeeling, at Fernie Cottage,
just below the Native Sanitarium, and is attended by
Bhuteas and a few Lepchas from Sikkim. The number
of pupils averages about thirty, of whom rather more than
half are boarders, the others being day-scholars. All the
students are taught English and Tibetan, the purpose
of the school being to train up a body of explorers, survey-
ors, and interpreters. In Darjeeling station there is also a
zillah or district school, where English is taught, as well as
Hindi. Well over Ioo pupils attend, the majority being
Nepaulese, Bhuteas, and Mahomedans from down country,
comparatively few Lepcha children taking kindly to educa-
tion. The Scotch Mission has also established a number
of primary Schools, chiefly for children of Nepaulese coolies
working in the tea-gardens. *
CHAPTER XI.
DARJEELING AS A HEALTH RESORT.
A Paradise for Children—Maladies benefited by a Stay in
the Hills—Diseases in which the Change is Undesirable—
General Character of Climate—Cause of the Humidity—
Zhe Seasons—Mecessity for Warm Clothing—Barometric
Aressure—Highest and Zozvest Temperatures for each
Month—The Mean Temperature—Éguable Pistribution of
APiurnal Zemperature—Boiling Point—/nfluence of ZXi-
minished Atmospheric Pressure on the Human Body —
A’ainfall—Monthly /)istribution.
THE fame of Darjeeling as a health resort is now world-
wide. It has not merely become the sanitarium of Bengal,
but invalids from all parts of India repair to this Himalayan
hill station ; and “globe-trotters,” so called, visiting the dis-
trict as a show place, come to appreciate the bracing climate.
Dr. Hooker described Darjeeling as a paradise for children,
and his words hold good to this day; he wrote as follows:—
“I believe that children’s faces afford as good an index as
any to the healthfulness of a climate, and in no part of the
world is there a more active, rosy, and bright, young com-
munity, than at Darjeeling. It is incredible what a few
weeks of that mountain air will do for the India-born child-
ren of European parents; they are taken there sickly,
pallid or yellow, soft and flabby, to become transformed
into models of rude health and energy.” The benefit to
DARJEELING AS A HEALTH RESORT. 93
their elders is no less remarkable, and there are few dis-
eases common to Anglo-Indians which will not be cured or
alleviated by a stay in this most delightful of health resorts.
Those in a thoroughly debilitated condition must, of course,
observe discretion; for after a long residence in the plains,
the large organs of the body are generally debilitated, and
in the hill climate the heart, the liver, the lungs, the sto-
mach, and the kidneys all have their work increased,—the
heart by the extra exertion of the hills, the lungs by the
rarefied air making deeper and more frequent respirations
necessary, the stomach by the additional quantity of solids
taken, the liver by the change from heat to cold, and
the kidneys from the action of the skin being diminished.
In advanced stages of cardiac disease, it may be pointed
out, the elevation is probably too great, and the heart is
unable to bear the increased strain. However, no one
seriously affected in any one of the five vital organs just
named would be so foolish as to proceed to Darjeeling or
any other health resort without skilled medical advice. It
may just be mentioned that the climate, from its equable
character, is simply invaluable in the case of consumptive
persons. A trip to the hills is, of course, next to a sea
voyage, the great specific for fevers. All minor maladies,
caused by over-work, climatic influences, or indigestion,
disappear like magic in Darjeeling, the dry season being
especially adapted for nervous diseases, Asthma, as a rule,
is not benefited, the extremely rarefied air being against the
patient who is suffering from this painful complaint. The
rains are not suitable for those subject to bowel complaints
unless great care is exercised, cases of diarrhoea having
sometimes to return to the plains to get relief. Hill-
diarrhoea, a very imperfectly understood malady, is some-
times prevalent during the wet season, even those not
94 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
specially predisposed being affected. But it may be truly
said of Darjeeling that it suffers less from this cause than
any hill station in India. Children do not seem to be
prejudicially affected by the rains; they are bright, happy,
and rosy-cheeked all the year round. Epidemics among
them are extremely rare; measles, whooping-cough, and
chicken-pox have now and again made their appearance,
but in an extremely mild form. As we have pointed out in
a previous chapter, the Sanitation of Darjeeling may be
described as excellent in every respect.
There is no disguising the fact that the climate of Dar-
jeeling is a humid one. Dr. Hooker characterized it as the
dampest region in the whole Himalayas, and explains the
reason in words full of admiration for the mighty operations
of Nature. “The breezes are south-easterly,” he says,
“bringing that vapour from the Indian Ocean which is
rarefied and suspended aloft over the heated plains, but
condensed into a drizzle when it strikes the cooler flanks of
the hills, and heavy rain when it meets their still colder
summits. Upon what a gigantic scale does Nature here
operate Vapours, raised from an ocean whose nearest
shore is more than 4oo miles distant, are safely transported
without the loss of one drop of water, to support the rank
luxuriance of this far distant region. This and other offices
fulfilled, the waste waters are returned, by the Cosi and
Teesta, to the ocean, and again exhaled, imported, expend-
ed, re-collected, and returned.” Throughout the greater
párt of the year this south-easterly wind, laden with mois-
ture from the Bay of Bengal, prevails. It rises at Sunrise,
and its vapours are early condensed on the forests at
Senchal; billowy clouds rapidly succeed Small patches of
vapour, which rolling over to the north side of the moun-
tain are carried north-west, over a broad intervening valley
DARJEELING AS A HEALTH RESORT. 95
to Darjeeling. There they hank on the east side of the
spur; and this being partially clear of wood, the accumula-
tion is slow, and always first upon the clumps of trees.
Very generally by 9 A.M. the whole eastern sky, from the
top of the Darjeeling ridge, is enveloped in a dense fog,
while the western exposure enjoys sunshine for an hour or
two later. At 7 or 8 A.M. very small patches are seen to
collect on Tonglo, which gradually dilate and coalesce, but
do not shroud the mountain for some hours, generally not
before 11 A.M. or noon. Before that time, however, masses
of mist have been rolling over Darjeeling ridge to the west-
ward, and gradually filling up the valleys, so that by noon,
or 1 P.M., cvery object is in cloud. Towards sunset it falls
calm, when the mist rises, first from Senchal, or if a south-
east wind sets in, from Tonglo first.
The seasons in Darjeeling may be indicated as follows:
Cloudy, misty weather is most prevalent in February, May,
June, July, August, and September. The spring com-
mences about the third week in February, and lasts till the
end of May. The small rains begin in May, the proper rains
setting in about the middle of June and lasting till about
the 20th of October, with intervals of fine weather. Winter
may be said to commence after the rains are over, and to last
till the middle of February. The most enjoyable period of
the year is unquestionably the latter part of October, Nov-
ember, and December, precisely the period when the season
is “off” in Darjeeling, and Calcutta people have all flocked
down to the plains. The closing days of December are
frequently misty and damp, with some rain. The first part
of January is often bright and clear, but towards the end of
the month thick penetrating fogs occur, and it is very cold,
usually followed by a fall of snow, then by bright weather
again, July and August are the rainiest months of the
96 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
year. Frosts set in in November and December, and the
weather is very fine and bracing; and as the atmosphere is
at its clearest, the views to be obtained with absolute cer-
tainty are magnificent.
From the above jottings and the subjoined tables of
temperature, rainfall, &c., it will be obvious that warm
clothing is necessary at Darjeeling. A waterproof is also
an essential ; and as the Sun is powerful at mid-day, a sun
helmet or hat should not be omitted from the hill kit.
Strong boots for climbing are likewise necessary. Other
hints that may prove useful are that no bad effects need
result from a wetting if the clothes and socks are changed
immediately on returning home, and that it is wiser to bathe
in tepid water, cold bathing being in the vast majority of
Anglo-Indian cases too great a shock to the liver.
The following is a table of Barometric Pressure and
Temperature for the four years 1884–87, the records being
made at the St. Paul’s School Observatory. The letters
H. B. R. stand for Highest Barometric Reading,” H. T.
for “Highest Temperature,” and L. T. for Lowest Tem-
perature —
Month. 1884, 1885. 1886. 1887.
January ... H. B. R. ... 23.178 23:168 23:198 23:094
H. T. 54'5 52 “I 55 '2 45-6
L. T. 32 °o 31 ‘O 3 I'5 22 °2
February H. B. R. ... 23°162 23'o60 23'o62 23: 148
H. T. ..., 5 I ‘I 5 I ‘4 53°3 59-6
L. T ... • 25*4 26'5 27-9 22'2
March H. B. R. ... 23°162 23°196 23:174 23°104
- H. T. .
64' I 64'2 63'9 60°3
38"I 35°5 37'3 39'4
L.
T.
DA P JEELING AS A HEALTH RESORT. 97
Month. 1884. 1885. 1886. 1887.
April . H. B. R. ... 23°122 23: 138 23162 23:190
H. T. 68-8 68'5 68.9 66'2
L. T. 42°6 349 389 41' I
May ... H. B. R. ... 23'098 23'I42 23°144 23'124
H. T. . 66-9 69'7 67.2 72°3
L. T. 43’8 439 42.9 46.7
June . H. B. R. ... 23 O2O 23'I I2 23:046 23:ooo
H. T. 69'.2 72°4 72°5 68.9
L. T. 48 6 52 “I 46'5 52' I
July . H. B. R. ... 23'O26 23:074 23:036 23:052
H. T. 72°5 7o'o 69'9 7o:6
I, T. 54°6 55-6 56'4 54'3
August . H. B. R. ... 23°oS4 23 O40 23:076 23:070
H. T. 7 1-8 69'2 72°o 7I '4
L. T. 53.8 54"5 55'9 54'3
September . H. B. R. ... 23'164 23-176 23:164 23-130
H. T. 7O'5 69' I 69' I 71 °o
L. T. 53' I 48°o 53 'O 53'2
October ... H. B. R. ... 23°256 23: 176 23: 172 23, 1918
H. T. 64'7 68.5 65 "I 58-6
L. T. 42 "3 42 7 42°8 43'4
November . H. B. R. ... 23. I42 23°234 23' 190 23:226
H. T. . . 617 59-6. 6.5-9 58°o
L. T. 35'9 38°5 4 I "O 40'O
December ... H. B. R. ... 23°202 23. I?2 23°164 23 IA4
- H. T. 56-6 54'4 60°2 57'2
L. T. ... 329 33 ‘I 3I '4 34'3
The elevation of St. Paul's School Observatory, it may
be mentioned, is 7,426 feet, about 500 feet higher than the
station itself, the Chaurasta being 6,998 feet above sea-level.
D. G. 7
98 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
The mean temperature for the whole year may be taken
as 56° Farenheit. A most notable point is the uniformity
of temperature. There is a difference of only 22° between
the hottest and the coldest months; London, with a lower
mean temperature, varies 27°. The diurnal distribution of
temperature is equally even, the difference between the
maximum of the day and the minimum of the night being
only
During the rains, about tº a º ... 8°
3 * ,, winter, about e tº gº ... I2°
22 ,, hot season, about as tº ge ... I 5°
It is this characteristic that renders the climate especially
suited to consumptive patients. The greatest heat is about
noon, owing to the prevalent cloud, especially in the rainy
season, when the Sun Shines only in the early morning if at
all, and the clouds accumulate as the day advances.
The mean barometric pressure is 23’oro. It varies 161,
the barometer being lowest in July and highest in October.
The following table of boiling-points, with elevations, will be
found interesting and useful :— -
Height above Boiling Point:
Place. Degre
Sea-level. Fº:#.
Sea-Level e - e e Q Nil e s e 2 [2"
Observatory, St. Paul's School 7,426 tº e sº I99'4
Senchal tº a º ... 8,600 tº e ſº 197'o
Tongu © º Q ... I2,75I tº gº tº 1897
Loukia Pass s sº º ... 18,400 tº dº e 1812
A curious calculation has been made in regard to the
difference in atmospheric pressure on the human body in
the plains of Bengal and at Darjeeling. At the level of the
sea, a man of ordinary bulk and stature is pressed upon by
a superincumbent weight of 30,000 pounds, or 13% tons.
An inch rise of the barometer shows that this load is
DARJEELING AS A HEALTH RESORT. 99
lightened, sometimes in a few hours, by nearly 1, ooo pounds.
At Darjeeling the load is reduced no less than 22,500
pounds, with no appreciable result on the frame, however
suddenly it be transported to that elevation. People take
pretty much the same amount of food, drink, sleep, exercise
and work, not only without inconvenience, but without
perceiving any greatly altered conditions. The visitor at
first finds himself short of breath after every slight ascent,
and sometimes experiences a painful feeling at the base of
the lungs; but these sensations pass away after a few days.
On ascending to 14, ooo feet, Owing to the greatly dimin-
ished supply of oxygen, exercise brings on vertigo and head-
ache. When still higher elevations are reached, lassitude
and tension across the forehead ensue, with retching, and
a sense of weight dragging down the stomach, probably
due to the dilatation of air contained in that organ. Such
are the all but invariable effects of high elevations, though
they vary with different individuals according to the sudden-
ness and steepness of the ascent, the amount and duration
of exertion, and the length of time previously passed at
great heights. Dr. Hooker, for example, who may be con-
sidered as having become gradually and thoroughly accli-
matised, found his organic functions wholly undisturbed at
an elevation of 17,ooo feet ; and when his body was at rest,
could detect no increased quickness of pulse or of res-
piration. It is a curious anomaly that the Tibetan, born
of lofty elvaetions and from infancy inured to cold and
diminished armospheric pressure, still suffers when he
crosses passes 18, ooo or 19,000 feet high, and apparently
neither more nor less than the man from the plains. It
can be shown that under ordinary circumstances the aver-
age man, who makes 18 respirations per minute, requires at
15,000 feet of elevation to make 8 additional inhalations in
I oo GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
order to compensate for the deficiency of oxygen in the air
at that height. It is obvious that this must have a subtle
influence on health.
Next as to rainfall. It may just be pointed out that the
rain-gauge takes no account of the enormous deposition
from mists and fogs at Darjeeling. The average recorded
rainfall for the five years 1882-83 to 1886-87 was 113.86
inches. In 1887-88 the fall was II6'44. To show the
monthly distribution, we shall select three representative
years:
I884. 1885. I888.
Years. About the Exceptionally Exceptionally
average. rainy. dry,
January tº gº tº “23 ‘46 O'62
February e tº º 3'27 * I O O'go
March ... tº gº º '4O 3°33 O'97
April ... tº gº & 3'92 9:64 3' I 4
May tº ſº º & Cº º 5'34 9°9C 3-88
June ... tº gº tº 2 I "2O I9'72 8'53
July tº º tº tº º ſº 3o'o8 39'64 39'66
August ... * * * 22° 18 28'50 22°92
September e tº $. O'24 28’SI I2 “OO
October ... tº ſº º II ‘45 I '8o ‘OS
November e tº ſº *O2 “OO ‘50
December g tº e • I 8 *OO “OO
Io? '5I I4I '90 93'2O
The rainfall records may be thus Summarized —In Janu-
ary and February, practically no rain; in March, April,
and May, not much ; in June, July, August, and September,
nearly every day rainy; second half of October, very little
rain; November and December, practically none, .
CHAPTER XII.
EXCURSIONS.
Walks or Æides around the Station—/a/aft whar, Senchal,
and 7%ger Hil/—Zie of the Peaks—View of Mount.
Azerest—A’ungaroon Boſanic Garden—Ghoom Rock–
Zebong Spur—The Bhutea Bustee—A Buddhist Zemple
–7%e Cane Bridge over the Aºungeet—/unction of Great
A'ungeet and Teesta—The Iron Suspension Bridge—
Z2007, the Zeesta to the Plains—Tonglo–Scene from
the Summit—Sundućhu–Pha/u?—Synopsis of Złiner-
azy—/ourney to #2 /e/eſ Za A'ass—Zämerazies to the
Złżeń and AVépaul Frontiers—Short Áouſes to the Sikkima
Mozzasſeries.
THE visitor will find a number of pleasant walks in and
around Darjeeling station, Personal and health considera-
tions will decide when a pony or a dandy is necessary. The
Chaurasta is the fashionable promenade in the evening, and
the walk or canter may be prolonged round the Mall. Birch.
Hill Road, lower down the spur, is four miles round, with a
sharp incline at each end. Magnificent views of the snows
are to be obtained on a clear day, and valleys dotted over
by tea-plantations. Birch Hill Park, which is on the road.
just below The Shrubbery, is very pretty, with little nooks
and comfortable seats, and occasional glimpses of the snows.
I O2 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
The climb from the Mall to the summit of Observatory Hill
is a moderately stiff one ; there are seats at the top, and the
view is superb. The Botanic Garden is reached by a very
steep descent; it is a pleasant place to spend an hour in,
there being seats amidst shading trees and bright blooming
flowers. The Victoria Waterfall, on the road from the
Bazar to Rosebank, is also easy of access. During the rains
the Cascade is a fine one. All these little expeditions may
be made on foot; but most persons, gentlemen as well as
ladies, unaccustomed to the hills, find it wiser to take a
pony Or a dandy, for there is a good deal of climbing in-
volved, especially in the case of the return journey from the
Botanic Garden.
When excursions come to be made further a field, perhaps
the very best to take first is that to Tiger Hill, ziá Jala-
pahar and Mount Senchal. This is a most enjoyable ride,
the path gradually ascending as it winds along the ridge of the
mountains. The banks on either side abound in rare and
beautiful plants, and magnificent forests of Oak, magnolia,
and rhododendron are traversed. In April and May, when
the magnolias and rhododendrons are in bloom, the scene
is simply gorgeous. Among the other trees seen around are
the laurel, mapel, birch, chestnut, hydrangea, and fig. In
spring immense broad-leaved arums spring up, with green or
purple-striped hoods that end in tail-like threads, 18 inches
long, which lie along the ground ; and there are various
kinds of Convallaria, Paris, Begonia, and other beautiful
flowering herbs. At least 30 ferns may be gathered on
this excursion, but the tree-fern does not ascend so high.
Jºn route are passed Jalapahar Barracks and Ghoom Village,
7,372 feet high. Mount Senchal itself is 8,163 feet high,
and Tiger Hill 8,514. Midway between the two latter are
the old dismantled barracks, the site having been aban-
EXCURSIONS. IO3
doned owing to its being so exposed and so far from
the station. At Senchal is a bungalow, where tiffin may
be partaken of. Once for all it may be pointed out
that permission to use the Government bungalows must
be obtained beforehand by application to the Deputy
Commissioner's Office, the Secretariat. No bungalow can
be occupied without a pass. The houses are furnished,
but in every case the excursionists must bring their own
provisions.
Mount Senchal is the nearest point to Darjeeling station
from which Mount Everest, the loftiest peak in the world, can
be seen. The mountain appears over the intervening ranges
just like the tip of the Smaller end of an egg. The view is
still more grand from Tiger Hill. From this height Ever-
est on a clear day is distinctly visible. It lies on a line
passing a little to the left of Phalut, and owing to its great
distance (IoT miles) appears less lofty than some of the
nearer peaks. From both Tiger Hill and Mount Senchal
a glorious view may be obtained of Kinchinjunga, and the
group of lofty mountains clustering around it— Kabru,
Kabur, Pandim, Janu, and Narsing. These appear to the
eye all close together, though such is by no means the case.
The Nepaul range is also in view, the prominent peaks from
south to north being Tonglo, Sundukphu, Phalut, and
Singli La. (For the heights and distances of all these
mountains wide Table, Chapter VI. Their locality may be
very easily determined by means of Map II, showing the
lie of the principal peaks.) The plains of India are also
commanded, with the courses of the Teesta, the Mahanada,
and the Balasan. Beyond Tiger Hill, it may be pointed
out, is Senchal, G. T. S. (Grand Trigonometrical Survey)
Station, some 5oo feet still higher, and not to be confound-
ed with Mount Senchal previously mentioned. From Ob-
IO4. GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
servatory Hill to Tiger Hill is a distance of a little over 7
miles. But in all hill excursions it is best to reckon by
time, not by mileage, as the steepness and straightness of
the roads are the great points that determine the duration
of the journey. This journey may be made comfortably
within four hours to Tiger Hill and back.
Another favourite and interesting excursion of about the
Same duration is to the old Botanic Garden at Rungaroon.
Jalapahar and Ghoom are passed as before, and then a
descent is made into the valley to the left. There is
here a Forest Bungalow, and the spot is a favourite one
for pic-nics, the scene being one of great beauty. A full
description of the garden has been given in a previous
chapter.
Yet another excursion in this direction is to Ghoom Rock,
about 3 miles due west of Ghoom Village, on the road to
Phalut. The rock is a huge boulder, curiously propped up
at the base by other masses of stone, and with a zig-zag
path running round its face. At the top is a seat, and a
fine view is commanded. This, again, is a frequent resort
for pic-nic parties. -
A trip which possesses great interest and involves the
minimum of hard work is that to Kurseong. The forenoon
train from Darjeeling should be taken, the twenty miles
being comfortably accomplished by tiffin time. Here the
up train is passed, and a goodly Company usually meets in
the Clarendon Hotel for the mid-day meal. The visitor
should arrange to stay overnight at this comfortable hostel-
ry. Around Kurseong are many beautiful walks, and, as
we have seen in a previous chapter, the forest scenery is
quite different to that of Darjeeling, plant life of the tropical
and temperate zones being strangely mingled. From the
EXCURSIONS. IO 5
hill behind the hotel a magnificent view can be obtained
On a clear day, the snowy range, the Teesta, the Balasan,
and the plains of India all being commanded. Kurseong
possesses a club, a cutcherry, a large school, a church, and
a sanitarium for Roman Catholic priests. The climate is
considerably warmer than that of Darjeeling, the elevation
being only 4,860 feet, and invalids often find it beneficial to
make a stay at the lower level preparatory to ascending to
the more rarefied and colder air above.
An easy journey is down to the wooded spur called
Lebong, where, the temperature being some ten degrees
warmer than at Darjeeling, peaches and other English
fruit trees flourish, but do not produce fruit. It is a com-
paratively easy walk down, but most persons find the aid of
a pony or of a dandy for the return journey necessary.
Round here are a number of tea-gardens, the plant thriving
admirably at this elevation, and one of these gardens
should, if possible, be visited. Below the spur is the village
of Ging, Surrounded by steeps cultivated with rice, maize,
and millet. In making this excursion, the descent is com-
menced from the Chaurasta. The Bhutea bustee (or village)
is soon reached, and the visitor, either going or coming,
should not fail to pay the Buddhist temple, or gompa, a
visit. The building is easily distinguished by the long
poles, with fluttering rags attached all around it. These
rags, often inscribed with prayers, are votive offerings to
evil spirits, and the Bhuteas tie them to wands near their
houses, to forest trees, and to any other convenient projec-
tion. The temple is a fairly good example of the Buddhist
place of worship. In the vestibule are a large number of
praying cylinders. One is fully six feet high, is worked by
a strap attached below, and rings a bell at every revolu-
tion. One of the attendant Lamas will readily start off
Ioô GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
with his prayers a the request of the visitor; the difficulty
is to get him to stop again, the dreary reiteration of “Om
Mani Padmi Om * being in no way improved by the peri-
odical clink of the bell. Inside the temple proper, on the
altar so to speak, are numerous idols, brass cups, lamps,
trumpets, bells, &c. On either side of the altar are re-
Cesses, Containing books and manuscripts carefully rolled
up in cloths. The side walls are covered with paintings,
but the interior is so dark that it is almost impossible to
make them out. In the body of the temple are huge tom-
toms and gongs. There is a room above the temple, to which
access may sometimes be obtained, where more manu-
Scripts and idols are kept, The Lamas will also, on request,
Produce a tom-tom made of a human skull, and a trumpet
fashioned from a human thigh-bone. A little above the
temple, and a prominent object from The Mall, is a chait,
or monument erected to the memory of some Lama. The
chait of Sikkim is borrowed from Tibet, and consists of
a Square pedestal, surmounted by a hemisphere, the convex
end downwards; on this is placed a cone, with a crescent
on the top. Such a monument is venerated by the people,
Who, when passing it, often repeat the invocation, “Om
Mani Padmi Om.”
A more ambitious trip is made by prolonging this last
excursion to the Lebong Spur through Badamtan to the
Cane bridge over the Great Rungeet River, this bridge being
on the road to Tumloong, capital of Independent Sikkim.
The bridge is situated just below the junction of the
Rungeet with the Rungmo, and is 6,ooo feet lower than
Darjeeling station. The road distance as the crow flies is
eleven miles, and the path an excellent one. At ten miles
distance from Darjeeling is the junction of the two streams.
The Rungeet makes its way through a dense forest; in the
IEXCURSIONS. Io 7
opposite direction the Rungmo comes tearing down from
the top of Senchal, 7,000 feet above. Its roar is heard and
its course is visible, but its channel is so deep that the
stream itself is nowhere seen. The descent to the river is
exceedingly steep, and the banks are clothed with impene-
trable jungle. The pines on the arid crests of the hills
around form a remarkable feature; they grow like the Scotch
fir, their tall red trunks springing from the steep and dry
slopes. The cane bridge is situated at a most wild and
beautiful spot. The structure is about eighty yards long,
and oscillates over the boiling torrent forty feet below. It
is not a bridge to be crossed by nervous people, more
especially as it is now greatly out of repair. These curious
Himalayan cane bridges have been thus technically de-
scribed:—“The main chains supporting the bridge are Com-
posed of five rattan canes each ; the sides are of Split Cane
hanging from each main chain as loops, two feet apart and
two feet deep. Into these loops the platform is laid, Com-
posed of three bamboos, the size of a man's arm, laid side by
side, the section of the bridge resembling the letter V, in
the angle or base of which the traveller finds footing. Out-
riggers, to prevent the main chains being brought together
with the weight of the passenger, are placed at every ten or
twelve feet in the following manner: under the platform
and parallel to the stream strong bamboos are passed and
from their extremities to the main chain (of cane) split
rattan ropes are firmly tied. This prevents the hanging
loop or bridge from shutting up and choking the passenger.
The piers of these bridges (for there are several of them)
are generally two convenient trees, through whose branches
the main chains are passed, and pegged into the ground on
the opposite side.” A Lepcha, carrying 14olbs. On his
back, will cross such a bridge without hesitation, slowly but
Io8 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
steadily, and with perfect confidence. European visitors,
however, find the achievement one of no small difficulty, and
in the case of the Rungeet Cane bridge—sadly out of
repair, as we have previously remarked — will prefer the
dug-out ferry boat, which plies from bank to bank across
a deep broad pool a little below the precarious looking
structure. Under all circumstances the passage should
certainly be made, as the tourist who crosses the river
rests foot in the territories of the semi - independent Rajah
of Sikkim.
The excursionist may return to Darjeeling by the way he
Came, or, if he has made arrangements as to ponies, coolies,
bedding, provisions, &c., he may proceed along the right
bank of the Rungeet to its junction with the Teesta, and
thence to the new iron suspension bridge. In this latter
case, all impedimenta should have been sent on to the
Travellers’ Bungalow at Pashok. From the cane bridge to
the Teesta is a six or seven miles ride, along an excellent
road, skirting the Rungeet the whole way. River, forest,
and mountain combine to produce effects of scenery that
are to be surpassed in few parts of the world. Orchids and
ferns abound; beautiful whip-snakes, partly coiled round
twigs of trees and bushes, gleam in the Sun; butterflies of
the most gorgeous hues sail majestically across the path ;
and in the crystal waters of the river large fish are seen
darting about. The junction of the Rungeet and the Teesta
is a spectacle not to be forgotten ; it may simply be said
that the spot presents what is undoubtedly one of the most
magnificent scenes within easy access of Darjeeling, A most
curious phenomenon is the marked difference in colour of
the two streams—the Teesta being sea green and muddy,
the Great Rungeet dark green and very clear. The waters
preserve their distinctive colours for some hundred yards, the
EXCURSIONS. Io9
line separating the two being most distinctly drawn. The
Teesta, or main stream, is much the broader, more rapid,
and more deep. The rocks which skirt its bank are cover-
ed with a silt or mud deposit, owing to the vast number
of glaciers it drains. This fact also makes its waters
colder by several degrees than those of the Rungeet.
The latter stream, though it rises amongst the glaciers of
Kinchinjunga and its sister peaks, is chiefly supplied by
the rainfall of the outer ranges of Senchal and Singli La,
and hence its waters are clear except during the height of
the rains. -
The iron suspension bridge has replaced a cane structure
near the same spot. Its importance to trade is great, as
this road, open all the year round, is the main traffic route to
Tibet through the Jelep La Pass. The bridge is handsome
and substantial. Pashok Bungalow lies above the junction
of the two rivers, about three miles distant, the ascent
being a fairly stiff one. Here the excursionist may rest for
the night, his distance from Darjeeling station being fifteen
miles. The shortest route home is through the forest on
the Tungbu Ridge and under Senchal; the road is good
all the way, and the scenery striking. But we should
advise, if time be available, that the traveller should follow
the course of the Teesta right down to its exit from the
mountains by the Sivok Gorge, whence, Zid Siliguri and the
Mountain Railway, the return may be made to Darjeeling.
This magnificent ride will well repay the time and the
trouble expended. The thickly-wooded bank affords shelter
from the heat ; while the stream itself, now foaming in its
rocky bed, now forming a still deep pool, together with the
background of hill stretching beyond hill, makes up a
grand picture of natural scenery not to be surpassed all
the world over. There are several Government bungalows
I IC) GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
along the route, arrangements for occupying which must
be made beforehand, and the journey will occupy about
three days.
Another and still more ambitious trip than the last
named, is to Phalut, on the Singli La Range, which, as we
have previously explained, is an immense spur running
from Kinchinjunga right down to the plains of India. The
road is through the Goomphar Forest past Ghoom Rock,-
already described. At the 13th mile from Darjeeling is
Jore Pokri Bungalow, where breakfast should be partaken
of. Tonglo is 23 miles out by the path, height Io,070 feet,
with a bungalow for the first night's rest. The scene from
this peak has been finely described by Dr. Hooker, and the
passage will form the very best guide to the excursionist.
“From the summit of Tonglo,” he says, “I enjoyed the
view I had so long desired of the Snowy Himalaya ; Sikkim
being on the right, Nepaul on the left, and the plains of
India to the southward; and I procured a set of compass
bearings, of the greatest use in mapping the country. In
the early morning the transparency of the atmosphere
rendered this view one of astonishing grandeur. Kinchin-
ſunga bore nearly due north, a dazzling mass of snowy
peaks, intersected by blue glaciers, which gleamed in the
slanting rays of the rising Sun, like aquamarines set in
frosted silver. From this the sweep of snowed mountains
to the eastward was almost continuous as far as Chola,
following a curve of 150 miles, and enclosing the whole of
the northern part of Sikkim, which appeared a billowy
mass of forest-clad mountains. On the north-east horizon
rose Donkia (23,176 feet), and Chumulari (23,929). Though
both were much more distant than the snowy ranges, being
respectively eighty and ninety miles off, they raised their
gigantic heads above them, seeming what they really are,
EXCURSIONS. I I I
by far the loftiest peaks next to Kinchinjunga; and the
perspective of snow is so deceptive, that though from forty
to sixty miles beyond, they appeared as though in the same
line with the ridges they overtopped. Of these mountains,
Chumulari presents many attractions to the geographer,
from its long disputed position, its sacred character, and
the interest attached to it since Turner's mission to Tibet
in 1783. It was seen and recognized by Dr. Campbell, and
measured by Colonel Waugh, from Sinchul, and also from
Tonglo, and was a conspicuous object in my subsequent
journey to Tibet. Beyond Junnoo, one of the western
peaks of Kinchinjunga, there was no continuous snowy
chain ; the Himalaya seemed suddenly to decline into
black and rugged peaks, till in the far north-west it rose
again in a white mountain mass of stupendous elevation at
eighty miles distance, called, by my Nepal people, Tsungau.’
From the bearings I took of it from several positions, this
is probably on the west flank of the Arun valley and river,
which latter, in its course from Tibet to the plains of India,
receives the waters from the west flank of Kinchinjunga,
and from the east flank of the mountain in question. It is
perhaps one which has been seen and measured from the
Tirhoot district by some of Colonel Waugh's party, and
which has been reported as being upwards of 28, ooo feet in
elevation ; and it is the only mountain of the first class in
magnitude between Gosainthan (north-east of Katmandoo)
and Kinchinjunga. To the west, the black ridge of
Sakkiazung, bristling with silver-firs, cut off the view of
Nepal; but south-west, the Myong valley could be traced
to its junction with the Tambur about thirty miles off:
beyond which to the south-west low hills rose on the distant
horizon, seventy or eighty miles off; and of these the most
conspicuous were the Mahavarati, which skirt the Nepal
II 2 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
Terai. South and south-east, Sinchul and the Goong range
intercepted the view of the plains of India, of which I had
a distant peep to the south-west only.”
From Tonglo to Sundukphu, height II,975 feet, the dis-
tance by the path is about 15 miles over a road that is
fairly good, though at times rather trying for nervous people.
Here a glorious view of the snowy range is obtained. At
Sundukphu is another rest-house. Thence to Phalut,
height II,81 I feet, is I 3 miles, the peak being distant only
I9 miles from Darjeeling as the Crow flies. Another tra-
vellers’ bungalow is situated here, and the sunrise and sun-
set scenes viewed from this point are unsurpassable. This
journey, it will be seen, is an arduous one ; but the Scenery
is superb, and the expedition unequalled by any that can
be made from Darjeeling. It goes without saying that
careful arrangements beforehand are absolutely necessary.
The best times for undertaking the journey are from the
middle of October to the middle of November, and from
the middle of March to the middle of May, as during these
periods of the year the sky is almost cloudless. Towards
the end of March and the beginning of April, the rhododen-
dron forests at Tonglo and Sundukphu are one blaze of
brilliant and variegated colours. The following is a sum-
marized itinerary of the route :- -
1st Stage.—Darjeeling to Tonglo (total distance 23 miles)
—Past Ghoom Rock to Jore Pokri, 13 miles, where ponies
are changed; Manay Bhunjan (Temple); 16th and 17th
miles up, 18 zig-zags ; 2 oth mile, 4 zig-zags, then through
bamboos over undulating ground ; 22nd and 23rd miles,
II zig-zags to top. -
2nd Stage.—Tonglo to Sundukphu (total distance 15
miles)–27th mile, bottom of descent; 29th mile up, 17 zig-
EXCURSIONS. II 3
zags; 32nd mile, Kala Pokri Bungalow, where tiffin should
be taken; 35th mile, steep ascent, 26 zig-zags.
3rd Stage.—Sundukphu to Phalut (total distance 13
miles)—Undulating, through pines; about half-way, 4 steep
zig-zags down; through pines and rhododendrons; rise to
Suburkum, II,684 feet; down sharp steep Saddle, khud to
left; rise, and zig-zag to Phalut, I 1,81 I feet.
An itinerary of the route from ZXazfeeling to Pha/u?.
Mile-
posts.
xvii
II
I
23
I4
Darjeeling to Tonglo,
23 miles. About 6 hrs.
Height.
Forest Bungalow
Top of rise to Goom
Rock
Goom Rock
“To Lingla” (Rise)
Top
Turn to left and descend
* * * * * * * * * * * *
Jore Pokri
Simoona (descend to
right)
Manay Bhunjun (Tem-
ple
Up 18 zig-zags (16 short
ones)
Dead Trees
Hut: top of zig-zag
No. 17
6,98o
7.45O
7,675
7,575
7,800
7. IOO
7, I5O
7,450
7,615
7,650
7, I5o
6,500
7,600
7,930
;|| ºff Heat
T}escend
17 Saddle (ascend) 9,850
xxiv || 5 Descend 9,750
18 . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,7CO
IO A pretty hollow 9,4CO
xxvi 29 | . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,500
xxvii | 15 | . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,950
24. Bottom of Descent 8,525
(Saddle)
xxix | 15 Up 17 zig-zags 9,050
I4 Top 9,550
xxx | 8 | . . . . . . . . . . . . 9,45C
3 Saddle 9,400
xxxi 20 Saddle IO, I5o
IO Saddle 9,900
8 Saddle Io, IOI
xxxii | 7 | . . . . . . . . . . . . Io,2IO
5 Saddle
8
I4
I3
5
.
Sundukphu to Phalut,
13 miles. About 4% hrs.
|Undulating -
Pine Valley, to right.
Rocky Valley to right: .
descend slightly
Saddle
Sundukphu to right: open .
ground in front.
Water to right: undulating
Leave open ground : through
pines
Long Saddle.
Descend
Saha undulating
Pool to left: through pine
Saddle : then ascend
Juniper Trees: then descend,
to Bamboos (water)
4 steep zig-zags down
Saddle and descend
Bottom and then rise
F

xviii 9 tº tº e º 'º e & g º e g e 8, 150 5 *
KALA PokRI Io, I 3O IO Saddle and rise
I3 Fairly level 8,350 - e
xxxiii 18 Ascend 10,325 || 6 |Rhododendrons and pines and
xix 7 Bamboos 8,450 turn left. Saddle : fine pines to
I I Saddle Io,900 right
IO Descend slightly 8 Rise to Suburkum
I4. First Pines IO,9To
3 Turn to left 8,415 º II SUBURKUM (T.S., 11,684)
Descend
xx 7 • & e º is a tº e s tº 8 º' 8,776 12 | Down sharp steep saddle
I3 Open ground Io,7oo
5 || 4 zig-zags (2 long ones) || 8,900 sº IO Bottom \ w,
XXXV IO Saddle : begin steep Io,475 - 3
5 Through Bamboos 9,000 ascent IO Saddle P+
25 26 zig-zags ??
IO Undulating tº º II Sharp Saddle &
xxxvi 30 | . . . . . . . . . gº tº e II,4OO ,3
xxi tº e º e e º e º 'º & 9, IOO 17 | Saddle ; steep khud to 3
SUNDUKPHU (T. S., | 11,975 left ă.
8 * tº o g º ſº tº ſº tº 9,4CO 11,929) 7 and rise J
6 Saddle 9,400 6 Level (water)
2 Zig-zags 9,400 IO Sharp to left
7 | Begin II zig-zags to top | 9,400 7 Water
(2 long ones) sº
xxiii 14 | TONGLoo (T. S. Io,074) || Io,070 18 Sharp to left: and zig-zag to
PHALUT (T.S., II,8II)
Obs. 1.-Time in minutes from point to point. Obs. 1.-Go afoot from Tongloo to lowest point.
2.—Time given implies trotting on level
ground from Darjeeling to
The rest only steady walk of pony.
3.—Change ponies at Jore Pokri.
4.—Heights taken with a Casella's Aneroid.
5.—Mile-posts as in January 1882. .
Simoona.
2.—No good water along road above Io,000 ft.
3.—Tiffin at Kala Pokri.
4.—Sheep are muzzled above Kala Pokri to
prevent them eating the Aconite plant.
3.
1 I6 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
The last excursion we shall refer to is that up to the
Jelep La Pass, a distance of about 86 miles. The road to
the suspension bridge over the Teesta has already been
described. Crossing the river, Kalimpong, an observation
station for trade in transit is reached. From thence five
easy marches bring the traveller to the foot of the Pass,
the road nearly all the way being passable for ponies. The
ascent to the summit (14,388 feet) is long and trying, but
when the climb is accomplished a magnificent view of Tibet
amply repays the journey. The town of Chumbi, in Tibet,
where the Rajah of Sikkim used to spend a portion of every
year, is about 20 miles distant. The Pass is at present
occupied by British troops.
The subjoined synopsis of routes particularizes and am-
plifies the above information.
ROUTES TO THE TIBET AND NEPAUL FRONTIERS.
Darjeeling to Badamtam * 2,500
7160 (ziá Rungeet Valley).
Or
Darjeeling to Pashak " 3,000
(vid Rangyaroon.)
Badamtam |
- to
. Or ICalimpong * 4,000
Pashak
| Rinkinpong 4,700
I&alimpong to Or
and back l Deolo 5,580
(Rissoom * 6,4IO.
Kalimpong to . or
Pedong+ 4,760
Rissoom to Dumsong 6,310.
and back
NoTE.—At places marked * there are Government Bungalows, particulars regard-
ng which can be obtained at the Deputy Commissioner's Office. No Bungalow can
be occupied without a pass.
f' Means there is a Hut at this place.
On return journeys down hill, two marches can often be done in one day.
& º figures give th; approximate height of the places against which they are
printed.
EXCURSIONS, I 17
Rissoom |
Or to Dulapchin 3,200
Pedong ſ
Dulapchin to Lingtam 4,630
Jeyluk # 9,060
Lingtam to | Or
Gnarik IO,OOO
Jeyluk to Gnatong £ I2, O3O
Gnatong to Kophu : I2,700 Lake Bidangcho.
Kophu to Jeylep Pass I4,390
and back
Kophu to Sharab I2,500 Lake Nemitzo.
(visiting Gnatui Pass eye route) I4, 4CO
Sharab to Byutan I2,OOO
(visiting Yakla Pass en route) I4,4OO
( Barfonchent II,000
Byutan to i to
Chomnaga: I2,OOO
Barfonchen
Or | to Chola Pass I4,550
Chomnaga
and back
Barfonchen
Or | to Phiungong I2, I 30
Chomnaga
Phiungong to Rangpo [. 4,500
Rangpo to Tumlong t 5,290 Residence of the
Mah a raja of
Sikkim.
Tumlong to Rangpo
Rangpo to Gantok + 5,800
Gantok to Dikhilingt 5,000. Copper Mines.
Dikhiling to Rissoom.
Rissoom to Kalimpong.
Kalimpong to Darjeelign.
ALTERNATIVE ROUTES TO ABOVE.
Darjeeling to Sharab (as above.)
Sharab to Gantok.
Gantok to Darjeeling (as above.)
t Means there are Huts at these places.
# Means there are Monasteries.
On return journeys down hill two marches can often be done in one day.
tº . figures give the approximate height of the places against which they are
printed.
I 18 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
Darjeeling to Tumlong (as above.
by Passes.
Tumlong to Silling.
Silling to Lingmo.
Lingmo to Yongong F.
Dulling + Passing the Do Mani or
Yongong to | Or “Rock of Prayer.”
Barpong. -
Dulling
Or | to Tassiding # 4,600
Barpong
Tassiding to Pemiongtchi + 6,920
Pemiongtchi viá Rub-
denchi, Geysing and
Changachelling; .
(7040) to Yangtheung.
Yangtheung to Samdongden.
Samdongden to Head of Kulhait
Stream,
Kulhait stream to Phulloot * 11,81o
zzá Singlila.
Phulloot to Sundukphu “ 11,930
Sundukphu to Tongloo “ I O,O74
Tongloo to Jor-pokhri “ 7,555
Jor-pokhri to Darjeeling. *
Silling
OY | to Tingchum.
Tumlong
Tingchum to Ringum.
Tumlong to Nampatam.
4. zyżó Mafila.
Nampatam to Ringun.
Ringun to Nangama.
Nangama to Choonthang f 5,070
Choonthang to Lachung f 8,790
Lachung to Yeumthang II,900. Hot Springs.
Yeumthang to Momay Samdong f 15,300
Note.—At places marked * there are Government Bungalows, particulars regard-
ing which can be obtained at the Deputy Commissioner's Office. No Bungalow can
be occupied without a pass.
f Means there are Huts at these places.
3. Means there are Monasteries.
On return journeys down hill two marches can often be done in one day.
• º figures give the approximate height of the places against which, they are
printed.
EXCURSIONS. II 9
Momay Samdong to Donkia Pass 18, 1 oo
and back.
Momay Samdong to Sibula Pass 17,580 ) Only practicable
Sibula Pass to Phalung Pass º: in very fine
Phalung Pass to Giagong I 5,490 weather.
Choonthang to Latong 6,950
Latong to Lamteng t 8,88o
Lamteng to Tallum Samdong: 1 1,500
Tallum Samdong to Siphu Rocks near Tangu : 12,800
Siphu to Sittong 14, OOG
Sittong to Giagong.
Giagong to Bhomtzo
Bhomtzo to Cholamoo Lakes
Cholamoo Lakes to Momay Samdong
(z)i& Donkia Pass.)
Darjeeling to Badamtam
Badamtam to Namtehi + 5 580
Namtchi to Tenai 4,770
Temi to Lingmao
(and on as above.)
Kalimpong to Lolegaon * 5 OSO &
Lolegaon to Songchongloo 6,260
and back.
Lolegaon £O Rissoom
(zyżó Labah) 6,600
Lolegaon to Pemling
Pemling to Nimja
(zyżó the Lakes.)
Nimja to Gurubatan 2, OOO
Rissoom to Pasheteng * 6,ooo
Ambiokh 2,92G
Pasheteng to | Or
Gurubatam *,
Gurubatam to the Dooars.
NotE. –At places marked " there are Government Bungalows, particulars regard-
ing which can be obtained at the Deputy Commissioner's Office. No Bungalow can
be occupied without a pass.
f Means there are Huts at these places.
: Means there are Monasteries. tº
On , eturn journeys down hill two marches can often be done in one day.
The figures give the approximate height of the, places against which they a
printed.
I2O GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING,
SHORT ROUTES TO THE SIKKIM MonASTERIES.
Darjeeling to Phulloot (as above.)
Phulloot to Barpong (as above.)
Barpong to Namtchi,
Namtchi to Badamtam.
Badamtam to Darjeeling.
Darjeeling to Mintugong t 5,240
(vid Tukwar and Goke.)
Mintugong to Rinchingpong'ſ 5,570
Rinchinpong to Pemiongtchi
(vić Geysing and Robdenchi.)
OTHER ExCURSIONS.
Darjeeling IO Rangbee.*
Rangbee to Serail “ or Mongpoo.”
Or
Serail to Mongpoo.
Mongpoo iO Reaing."
Reaing to Pashak.
Or
Reaing to Kalimpong.
zyżó the Rilii.
Darjeeling to Badamtam,
Badamtam to Pashak
(vid Runjeet and Teesta Valleys.)
Pashak to Darjeeling.
RIDES IN THE NEIGHBOURHOOD OF DARJEELING STATION,
Senchal” and Tiger Hill.
Sonada, Pachim and Rungbool.”
Rangaroon Botanical Gardens.
Ghoom Rock.
The Lebong Spur.
Birch Hill,
Tulkvar.
Hope Town.
NotE.—At places marked * there are Government Bungalows, particulars regard-
ing which can be obtained at the Deputy Commissioner's Office. No Bungalow can
be occupied without a pass.
f Means there are Huts at these places.
Qn return journeys down hill two marches can often be done in one day.
. The figures give the approximate height of the places against which they are
printed. -
TRAVELLERS’ BUNGALOWS IN DARJEELING DISTRICT,
RURSEONG, PANKABARI AND SILIGURI.
Önder the Deputy Commissioner.
Distance from Height. Distance from
PLACE. Darjeeling. PLACE. Darjeeling. Height.
Miles. Feet. Miles. Feet.
I. Senchal 5 8,000 9. Dentam 64 4,500
2. Rangiroon 6% 5,7CO Io. Rimbik 43 6,200
3. Badamtam 7% 2,500 II. Merig 25 5,000
4. Jorpokri I2 7,400 12. Kalimpong 23 4,OOO
5. Tonglu 2I IO,O74 13. Rissisoom 34% 6,4Io
6. Sandakphu 35 II,929 14. Rangli 47% 2,590
7. Phalut 48 II,8II 15, Sadongchen 56 6,500
8. Cheabhanjan 54 Io,32O 16. Gnatong 65% I2,300
Under the Executive Engineer, P. W. D., Darjeeling.
17. Pedong 35 4,760 20. Riang 23% 625
18, Pashok 17% 3,300 21. Kalijhora 30% 55o
19. Teesta Bridge 18 viá Rungeet 710
Nos. 4 to 8 are on the Nepal Frontier Road, Nos. 14 to 17 on the
road to the Jelap Pass, and Nos. 19 to 21 are on the Teesta Valley
Road. From Phalut to Dentam the road is very rough. The Bunga-
low at Dentam is a converted Bhootia house. Rimbik is the apex of
a triangle of which the road from Phalut to Sandakphu is the base.
Merig is on the Nepal Frontier Road to the plains. Rissisoom is on the
Daling road to the plains.
2. A'afe of ſees.—There is an uniform rate of Rupee I per night
for each occupant.
For occupation by day only, the rate is 8 annas for each, person,
up to a maximum charge (except for the P. W. D. Bungalows) of Rs. 8
for a party.
In the case of Senchal, Rangiroon and Badamtam Bungalows, the
rate ſor occupation by day only is 4 annas for each person, up to a
maximum charge of Rs. 4 for a party.
I 200 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
3. The Bungalows are available only for persons provided with
passes from the office of the Deputy Commissioner or of the Executive
Engineer. To this rule, whether for officers on duty or tourists, there
is no exception. A separate pass must be obtained for each occupant
for each Bungalow whether going or returning.
4. Refund of Bungalow fees is not allowed. All passes must be
made over to the Chowkidar in charge.
5. The Bungalows (except Rimbik) are furnished with Beds,
Tables, Chairs, Lamps with wicks, Candlesticks, Crockery and Glass
and kitchen utensils. A party of five or six can be accommodated at
Bungalows, I–9 and I2 and I3. At the remaining Bungalows a party
of two only can be accommodated. Visitors must take their own Bed-
ding, Cutlery, Linen and provisions of every kind as well as candles or
oil for lighting. There is no resident Khansamah at any Bungalow.
Firewood is provided free on the Nepal Frontier Road Bungalows.
At Kalimpong four annas a maund must be paid before delivery of the
wood. Ordinary bazar supplies are obtainable at Jorpokri, Dentam,
Ralimpong, Teesta Bridge and Pedong.
6. A permanent sweeper is maintained only at Rungiroon. At
I&alimpong, Jorpokri, and Teesta Bridge, sweepers can be hired on
the spot. Elsewhere travellers must take sweepers with them and no
passes will be issued except on this condition.
7. Travellers wishing to return to Darjeeling from Chiabhanjan
through Sikkim can do so in 4 marches stopping at Dentam, Rinchin-
pong and Chakang.
September 1891.
CHAPTER XIII.
AGRICULTURE, MANUFACTURES, AND TRADE.
Aroducts of the Zerai—The Croſs in the Hill Z)istricts—
Zea, the Staple Zndustry of Paz feeling—History of the
Fnterprise—Increase in the Mumber of Gardens and in
the Outturn—Coolies and their Wages—Method of Tea
Cultivation—Plucking and Manufacture—Scene on a
Tea Estate—The Bhuſea Carriers—Cinchona—Mongpo
Garden and Aactory—F3%eriments zwiſh //ecacuanha-
Arorest A’eserves—/ungle Products—Zocal Manufactures—
Alocal Trade—Traffic with Megaul, Sikkim, Tibet, and
Bhutan,
RICE constitutes the staple product of the Terai district.
Subordinate crops in the plains are cotton, jute, pulses, oil-
seeds, mustard, tobacco, and sugarcane. As usual through-
out Bengal, there are two rice harvests every year, -the
one reaped in winter and the other in the Hindoo month
Bhadra (August to September). Rice cultivation is rapidly
extending through the Terai. Irrigation is industriously
practised, and manure is applied, though not extensively;
Bengali and Nepaulese cultivators use the plough, and
plough cultivation is also extending among the aboriginal
tribes, especially in the tract to the east of the Teesta. The
nomadic method of agriculture known as ſum, which con-
sists in burning down a fresh patch of jungle land each
I 22 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
successive year, is decreasing. The dao or hill knife is used
for all rustic operations. The yield of rice per acre varies
from 8% cwts., or 12 maunds, to 3% cwts. per acre. The
cultivation of tea has largely developed of late years in the
Terai. The yield per acre is much greater than in the hills,
but the quality is not of the same high standard of ex-
cellence. Cotton is somewhat extensively cultivated by the
Mechis along and under the lower ranges of the mountains.
In the hill-country the chief crops are Indian corn, millets
(murwah, &c.), wheat, potatoes, two kinds of rice (not in
large quantity), mustard, betel-leaf, tobacco, beans, Carda-
moms, and, most important of all, tea. Cardamoms is a
valuable crop, and is chiefly grown in the lower valleys.
The plant takes nearly three years to ripen, and is cultivat-
ed with great care and attention, principally by Nepaulese.
In the lower valleys irrigation is resorted to for the cultiva-
tion of rice. Elsewhere the natural rainfall is sufficient.
The hill agriculturists seldom or never apply manure to
their fields.
The staple industry of Darjeeling is the cultivation and
manufacture of tea. It has been established entirely by
British enterprise and British capital, and is conducted
under skilled European supervision. The discovery of tea
in India dates from 1826; when a Mr. Bruce, who com-
manded a flotilla of gunboats in Upper Assam in the first
Burmese war, found the plant growing wild, and brought
down with him a number of plants and seeds. It was not
till some time after tea cultivation had established itself in
the Assam Valley, that any attempt was made to introduce
it into Bengal proper. The first regular tea-garden in Dar-
jeeling was opened in 1856; and after the natural mistakes
of the first few years, the business took firm root in the
district, and has continued to prosper with accelerating
AGRICULTURE, MANUFACTURES, &c. I 23
progress. The following table will show the growth of the
industry:-

Acre ultiva-
Years. Nº ºf §.". º Outturn in lbs.
& g for tea.
I866 39 I6,392 433,715
I868 44 Io,067 851,549
1870 56 II,046 1,689, I86
1872 74 I 4,503 2,938,626
1874 II3 18,881 3,927,91 I
1875 I 2 I 22, 162 4,600,758
1880 I55 28,367 5, 160,314
1882 I 54 25, IO 5 6,596,456
1883 I65 44,482 8,080,293
1887 I69 54,235 9,944,356
I888 I 74 57, 181 IO,274, I 3 I
The following table shows the relative proportion of
mature plants during the past two years:—

Years Acres under Mature | Acres under Imma- Acres taken up
{- Plants. ture Plants. for cultivation.
1887-88 32,481 6,871 I4,883
1888-89 35,755 9, 17O I2,256
In 1887-88 the yield per acre under mature cultivation
showed an average of 306.1 lbs. In 1888-89 the figure was
lower, namely, 287.3 lbs. The cost of cultivation (which
includes rent) ranges from 26 shillings to Ioo shillings per
acre, and the cost of manufacture from 72 shillings to
78 shillings per acre. The plantations extend from the
Terai at 2co feet above sea-level up to 7,000 feet of eleva-
tion. A great extent of forest land has been cleared in
consequence of the extension of the industry. The plant
I 24 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
grown is almost exclusively the Chinese or the hybrid kind ;
the indigenous variety is very rarely cultivated. The number
of coolies employed on the various estates varies from 45 to
35o ; their wages are Rs. 5 to Rs 6-8 for men, Rs. 4-8 for
women, and Rs. 2 to Rs. 4 for children. Labour is plenti-
ful,-the light nature of the work attracting numerous immi-
grants from the surrounding hill states, especially Nepaul.
The plantations often suffer severely from red spider, green
fly, and mosquito blight. This last-named insect causes
most apprehension in the lower ranges of the hills. The
plague is said to be increasing, and to be more serious than
the red spider ; the bud being attacked and the plant not
allowed to mature. The red spider proves a terrible scourge
in some gardens, and baffles the energies of the most ener-
getic planter. A white grub turning into a brown beetle
attacks the roots, and wherever it makes its appearance is
exceedingly destructive. Machinery has been introduced
with marked success into all but the smallest gardens, and
Steam has taken the place of water-power on many estates.
The processes of manufacture have also been greatly im-
proved ; greater regard is paid to the withering and manipu-
lation of the leaf, and plucking is more carefully attended
to than formerly. The opening of the North Bengal State
Railway and of the Darjeeling and Himalayan Railway has
immensely increased the facilities for the transport of the
tea to Calcutta, whence it is shipped to London, the great
tea mart of the world.
The following account of the modus operandi of tea culti-
vation and manufacture in the Darjeeling District originally
appeared in The Field newspaper, and was reprinted in
the Bengal Statistical /čeporter. The writer states that
his information is founded on personal observation and
experience;—-
AGRICULTURE, MANUFACTURFS, &c. I 25
* Having selected an advantageous site as regards soil,
facilities of procuring labour and means of transport, a good
lay of land, jungle that can readily be got rid of, water, and
a healthy situation ; and having made arrangements for the
tea seed required for the year's planting, a temporary bun-
galow is erected of bamboos and grass, and a number of
sheds run up for the coolies. Operations usually commence
in October at the close of the rainy season.
‘Presuming that it is intended to make a plantation of
Ioo acres, some two or three hundred men, women, and
children are set at work to cut down the jungle, probably
composed of forest trees, and long, coarse tiger grass; the
rushwood and undergrowth being cut first and the big
grass later, so that when they fall they may lie on the
underwood; the very heavy timber being ringed or barked,
and left standing. After allowing sufficient time for the
timber and grass to become thoroughly dry, the whole is
set on fire, and any unconsumed logs of timber that are left
are gathered together in a heap and fired again. Having
burned the jungle, the coolies are set to work to dig out
the small roots, and where that is done, the whole is dug
some four or five inches deep. The land is then staked off
with bamboo stakes at distances of four feet apart, showing
where the tea plants are to be. Holes of 18 inches by I
foot in diameter are next dug at each of the stakes, in which
the surface soil is placed. This work is generally all com-
pleted by the end of November. Three or four seeds are
now placed in the soft soil of the holes, and pushed down
to the depth of an inch.
‘The garden being thus planted, attention is paid to
erecting more substantial buildings, which generally consist
of a bungalow for the manager, with stables, cook-house, and
I 26 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
all necessary out-buildings attached, and a number of com-
fortable houses for the coolies. All that now remains to be
done is to keep the garden quite free from weeds, and to fill
up any vacancies that may occur from time to time from a
nursery that is made when the plantation is first commenced.
On new plantations the soil is so rich that manure is un-
necessary, and only attracts insects which are likely to
destroy the plant while young.
“When the tree arrives at maturity, it is with tea as with
all other cultivations. It has been proved in England, and
all countries where really high cultivation is followed out,
that the higher the system pursued, the greater the profit.
Deep hoeing is necessary from time to time between the
lines of trees as weeds appear, while around the trees them-
selves careful hand-weeding goes on. The third year all
the plants should be from 4 to 5 feet in height; they are
then pruned down to 20 inches, in order that the young
leaves may be plucked readily, and also to promote the
growth of new wood and tender shoots. Pruning has to be
done in the cold weather, say between November and Feb-
ruary, when the sap is down. The sooner after the sap
goes down the better, for the Sooner will the tree then
“flush,” or fling out new leaves in the spring. A month or
six weeks after pruning, the new shoots are on an average
from 6 to 8 inches high, and can now be picked ; and from
this period all through the rains, or for a space of eight
months, successive “flushes” take place at intervals, varying
from fifteen to twenty days, according to soil, degree of
cultivation, moisture, and system of pruning adopted. The
tea plant is said to “flush” when it throws out new shoots
and leaves. A light cultivated garden should in its fifth or
sixth year yield 500 lbs. of manufactured leaf per acre; and
the outturn should increase yearly till the plant is in its
AGRICULTURE, MANUFACTURES, &c. I 27
twelfth year, when it has arrived at maturity, and should give
900 lbs. per acre. Although it reaches maturity in twelve
years, the plant has been known to yield just as freely at
thirty years of age.
“As soon as the “flush ’’ is in a sufficiently advanced
state, as many hands as can be spared (the preference being
given to women and children, on account of their gentler
touch) are sent, provided with large baskets, to pluck the
leaves. Tea can be made of the young tender leaves only ;
the younger and more succulent the leaf, the better tea it
makes. As a rule, it is found too expensive to pluck the
leaves separately, although the principle in plucking is to
leave the bud at the axis of the leaf down to which it is
plucked intact, and not destroy it by plucking the whole
stem. The leaves are named as follows, from the teas they
would make, supposing that there are named six leaves
on a shoot of the tree :—I, Flowery Pekoe ; 2, Orange
Pekoe ; 3, Pekoe ; 4, Souchong; 5, Congou ; or mixed to-
gether—1, 2, 3, Pekoe ; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Pekoe Souchong. If
No. 6 be taken into account, it would make a coarse kind
of Bohea.
‘In the evening all the leaf-pluckers are called to the
factory, where, after weighing the leaf in their respective
baskets, it is spread lightly on bamboo mats or trays, tier,
above tier, to allow the leaf to wither. There are several tests
to show when the leaf is withered Fresh leaf gathered in the
hand, and held near the ear, crackles, but no sound should be
heard from withered leaf. The stalk of withered leaf will
bend double without breaking; but fresh leaf stalks, if bent
very little, will break. In dry weather, if there is any sun
when it is brought in, the leaf is generally sufficiently
withered by the morning; but should it not be ready, it is
I 28 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
put out in the sun, or, if there is no sun, artificial withering
is resorted to,
“When sufficiently withered to roll without breaking, a
quantity of about 30lbs. is given to each man, who rolls it
on a strong wooden table (unless this is done by a steam
rolling machine lately invented) covered with a fine bamboo
mat, the slightly rough surface of which enables the leaf to
roll better. As much leaf as can be conveniently held in
both hands is taken by the men from the heap, and this
they roll with a backward and forward motion till the leaf
gets in a soft state, and when in the act of rolling it gives
out juice freely. When rolled sufficiently, it is formed into
tight-compressed balls.
‘The balls accumulated are allowed to stand until fer-
mented. This is the most important point in the whole
manufacture. The fermentation should be stopped in the
ball just at the right time, which practice alone enables one
to do. As a rule, the inside of the ball should be of a
rusty red colour. The fermentation is stopped by breaking
the ball and spreading the leaf out on mats, and without
delay putting it out in the sun. When it has become
blackish in colour, it is again collected and re-spread, so
that the whole of it should be affected by the sun. With
bright Sunshine, an hour, or even less, suns it sufficiently.
It is then placed on trays above charcoal fires, where it is
shaken up and re-spread several times until it is quite dry
and crisp. Any piece then taken between the fingers
should break with the slightest attempt to bend it. The
manufacture is now completed : the roll has become tea.
The tea has now to be sifted, and the various qualities
separated. For this purpose, sieves of different meshes are
used, the highest quality tea falling through the finer sieves,
AGRICULTURE, MANUFACTURES, ETC. I 29
and the coarser tea through the larger sieves. All the red,
hard, unrolled leaf is now ſanned and picked out of the
tea, and mixed with the Bohea. All the black teas, with the
exception of Flowery Pekoe, are made in this manner. The
manufacture of the latter is simple enough. When the
leaves from each shoot are collected, they are exposed to
the Sun, spread out on mats, until they have well shrivelled.
They are then placed over small and slow charcoal fires,
and so roasted very slowly. If the above is well done, the
Pekoe tips come out a whitish orange colour. The whiter
they are the better. Flowery Pekoe is quite a fancy tea,
and very seldom made.
“To make green tea, the leaf must be brought in twice in
the day. What comes in at one o’clock is partly made the
same day. The evening leaf is left till the following morn-
ing, laying it so thick that it will not wither. The leaf is
then placed in hot iron pans over a small furnace, at a
temperature of, say, 160°, and stirred with sticks for about
seven minutes, until it becomes moist and sticky. It is then
too hot to hold long in the hand. It is next rolled for two
or three minutes on a table until it gets a little twisted, after
which it is laid out on mats in the Sun for about three
hours, and rolled twice during that time, always in the sun.
It is then again placed in the pans at the same heat as
before, and worked with sticks until it becomes too hot to
hold. It is then stuffed as tight as can be into canvas
bags; the mouth of the bag is tied up, and the bag beaten
with a flat, heavy stick to consolidate the mass, and so it is
left for the night. Next morning it is taken out of the
bags and worked with sticks as before in the pans for nine
hours without intermission. During this last process the
green colour is produced, and the tea is made. The follow-
ing are the kinds into which green tea is sorted:—I, Ends;
D. G. 9
I 30 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
2, young Hyson ; 3, Hyson ; 4, Gunpowder; 5, Dust ; 6,
Imperial. The indigenous or hybrid plant makes the best
black tea, and the plant produced from seed originally
imported from China the best green tea.
‘The tea is now, after another drying over charcoal fires,
packed in boxes lined with lead, containing from 80 lbs. to
Ioo lbs, each, and sent down to the Calcutta market, where,
as a rule, it is disposed of by public auction, and fetches
from (according to quality) Is... to 2s. per lb.’
In the above extract, we have retained the paragraph
relating to green tea, though this is now seldom or never
made in the Darjeeling District. The visitor should on no
account fail to inspect one of the numerous tea-gardens
which are within easy access of the station. Such an expe-
dition is interesting, not only from seeing the tea in all its
stages, but also for the study it affords of the picturesque
hill-people. The Nepaulese coolies are a happy-go-lucky
lot, cheerful and in good condition, and, despite a liberal
coating of dirt, by no means bad-looking. They are in
every respect superior to the labourers from Bengal, and
that they are better off on the tea-gardens than in their own
country is proved by their immigrating in such large num-
bers, bringing their wives and children, and settling perma-
nently in British territory. A tea-garden, despite the regular
and unromantic way in which the stunted bushes are laid
out acre beyond acre, is not devoid of picturesqueness. The
planters’ bungalows are almost invariably charmingly situat-
ed on some spur from the hill-side, and the stranger, even
without any letter of introduction, is sure of that hospitable
welcome which has come to be associated with the very
name of planter. Every day around Darjeeling the visitor
will not fail to observe the long strings of sturdy Bhutea
AGRICULTURE, MANUFACTURERS, ETC. I3 I
coolies carrying up to the railway terminus the heavy chests
of tea, supported on their backs in their peculiar manner,
tough grass-bands Crossing their foreheads. The im-
mense weight these coolies, both men and women, can
carry in this manner is truly wonderful.
Only less interesting than that of tea is the history of
the cinchona industry in Darjeeling. The cultivation of
cinchona was commenced by Government in 1862, Dr.
Anderson, of the Botanic Garden, Calcutta, superintending
the new enterprise. A case containing 249 plants and 58o
seedlings was carefully despatched, and arrived with the loss
of only eight plants, though the journey took fifteen days,
After a period of doubt and disappointment, the prospects
of the new enterprise began to look bright. By 1875, the
plantation yielded 2, III,931 lbs. of dry bark, which produced
1,989 lbs. of quinine, valued at 24, 3, 182 ; the expenditule
for the year had been 24, 5,217. This was the first season
when the young trees came into bearing. Soon the enter-
prise became not only self-supporting, but highly profit-
able. In 1882, the year's working resulted in a net gain
of 24, 13, ooo, equal to a dividend of I3 per cent. On the
capital expended. The saving effected by Government
that year by the substitution of cinchona febrifuge for qui-
nine was 24.35, ooo. The number of cinchona plants includ-
ing the nursery stock, at the Government plantation on
1st April 1888, was 5,335,504, of which 2, 182, ooo were
of the kind known as succiritóra, or red bark, which yields
a mixture of quinine with cinchonodine and cinchonine, and
2,950,200 hybrid and calisaya ledgeriana, which yield only
quinine. The policy of replacing the red bark plant by
these latter varieties is being steadily adhered to, 375,092
trees of the former kind having in the year 1887-88 been
uprooted for their bark, and 424,200 seedlings of the
I 32 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
hybrid and ledgeriana kinds planted instead. The crop
of the year 1888-89 was the largest ever harvested, amount-
ing to 373, Ioo lbs. of dry bark, of which 207,460 lbs.
were red, 128,770 ledgeriana, and 36,870 hybrid. The
out turn of medicine at the factory, which is regulated
by the demand, was 6, 178 lbs. of ordinary cinchona febri-
fuge, 284 lbs. of crystalline febrifuge, and 1,283 lbs, of
sulphate of quinine. This amount was issued to the Medi-
cal Depôts at Calcutta, Bombay, and Madras; to the
Inspector-General of Civil Hospitals, Bengal ; and to the
Inspector-General of Jails, Bengal; while about one-third
was sold to Government officers and to the general public.
The balance sheet showed a net profit on the year's working
of Rs. 27,844, a most satisfactory result considering the
unprecedentedly low price of quinine products. The ex-
periments which have been made to introduce the species
of cinchona, which yield the hard Carthagena and Cuprea
barks, have hitherto been unsuccessful; but three new varie-
ties procured from South America in 1883 have been
cultivated with success. The quality of the bark yielded
by these plants is not generally inferior to that of the
calisaya ledgeriana, and the introduction of these varieties
is considered to be one of the most important and interest-
ing experiments which have ever been made at the planta-
tion. At the same time the fact has to be recorded that,
within the last two years, a new chemical process for the
manufacture of sulphate of quinine has been discovered.
By this process quinine can be obtained in a form undistin-
guishable, either chemically or physically, from the best
brands of European manufacture. The future of the cin-
Chona plantations is therefore involved in some doubt,
though it is as yet too soon to speak with certainty on the
economic value of this chemical discovery. On the other
AGRICULTURE, MANUFACTURES, ETC. I 33
hand, it may be mentioned that the cinchona industry in
Ceylon is certainly coming to an end, the planters there
cutting down their trees to replace them by tea. Through
this, the quinine market has of late been greatly over-
stocked, and prices in consequence enormously depressed.
But cinchona planting has now practically ceased in Ceylon,
so that the Darjeeling garden will be soon rid of its most
formidable rival. The Government cinchona garden and
factory are at Mongpo, a beautiful Himalayan valley, seven-
teen miles from Darjeeling station, and are well worth a
visit, the road being an admirable one through fine scenery.
Here experiments in the cultivation of IPECACUANHA have
also been tried, but not hitherto with much success.
The principal pasture grounds in Darjeeling are the
reserved Government forests, and in the rains the highest
mountains. The Forest Reserves, scattered all over the
district, cover a total area of 439 Square miles. The right
of pasturage is rented by the Forest Department. Large
herds of cows and buffaloes are depastured by Bhuteas,
Lepchas, and Nepaulese, the station of Darjeeling being
supplied by them with milk, which is brought into the town
in curious buckets, long and narrow, made out of the thick
stem of the bamboo. The Mechis in the plains, and the
Nepaulese in the Hills Sub-division of the District, collect
and trade in jungle products, but this is merely made a
subsidiary occupation to that of agriculture. The principal
JUNGLE PRODUCTS in the Terai are Zac, adra, from the fibre
of which ropes are made ; dar haldi, from the roots of
which a red dye is extracted. In the hill tracts are found
rhubarb ; aconitum, a deadly poison ; palmatum or òis, the
roots of which are also poisonous; manſit, which yields a
red dye ; india-rubber; pangya, a root with medicinal pro-
perties, used in cases of fever and of a bitter taste; farulbuſſ,
I 34 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
a yam of which three species are found in the district,
these being used as a substitute for potatoes; de/, a plant
from the bark of which paper is made by the Nepaulese
cardamoms; beeswax ; ?unya, a thistle which produces a
strong silky fibre, from which a fabric can be manufactured
equal, if not superior, to grass cloth ; and sisnu, another
thistle, from which excellent cloth can be made. Orchids
and ferns may also be included among the wild vegetable
productions of the district which possess a marketable
value. The timber trees from which the Forest Depart-
ment derive the maximum of revenue are oak and champ,
but of course many other kinds are sold, such as bamboo,
maple, laurel, &c. The total revenue derived from the
Darjeeling Forest Reserves in the year 1887-88 was, in
round figures, Rs. 1,05,ooo and the expenditure Rs. 96, ooo.
The ordinary manufactures carried on by the natives of
the district are of the most simple character. The strong
cotton striped cloth, which forms the dress of the Lepchas,
is of home manufacture, and is woven by the women of
the tribe. The favourite colours are white, with blue and
red stripes and borders. These Lepcha cloths are in some
request among the residents and visitors to the station.
The Nepaulese manufacture an excellent cotton cloth,
called batisa. The Hindoo Nepaulese, according to their
Castes, are also workers in iron, pottery, and a coarse kind
of matting. In their own country, but not in the Darjeeling
District, the same race also manufacture a coarse kind of
paper, made from the leaves of a jungle plant they call
deh. In the Terai, ordinary coarse cloth, gunny-bags, and
common pottery, form the only manufactures.
The local trade of Darjeeling is chiefly confined to the
wants of the European inhabitants and of the tea-plantations.
AGRICULTURE, MANUFACTURES, ETC. I 35
A considerable trade is carried on by the hill-men with
residents and visitors in China cups, turquoise, coral, and
amber ornaments, jade and agate cups and beads, praying-
wheels, bells, amulets, and other curiosities illustrative of
Buddhist monastic life, Äußeris, Bhutea and Lepcha knives,
&c, The Darjeeling shopkeepers deal mostly in European
piece-goods, stores, glass, hardware, and Crockery.
The through trade of Darjeeling with Nepaul, Sikkim,
Tibet, and Bhutan is of great importance. The total value
of the traffic with these external states registered during the
past two years was as follows:–
Imports into Exports from
Bengal. Bengal.
RS Rs.
1886-87 tº º ſº I,O6,77,400 tº tº tº 58,37,305
1887-88 tº e tº I, 17,28,403 * * *., 77,83,231
The principal imports from Nepaul are cattle, sheep and goats,
fibres, fresh fruits and vegetables, wheat, gram, and pulse,
husked and unhusked rice, hides of cattle, skins of sheep,
goats, and other small animals, opium, ghee or clarified but-
ter, Saltpetre, linseed, mustard seed, and rape seed, spices,
tobacco, timber, and silver. In return we send chiefly raw
Cotton, Cotton piece-goods, of both European and Indian
manufacture, fresh fruits and vegetables, brass, copper, and
iron, provisions, salt, betel-nuts and spices, sugar, drained
and undrained tobacco, and manufactured woollen goods.
A recent decrease in the Tibetan trade is due to the
difficulty on the frontier which culminated in the Sikkim
expedition. The political troubles are not over yet, but
the obstruction in the Jelep La Pass has been removed,
and it is to be hoped that trade will soon be resumed
through this channel of communication. The Pass is
Open all the year round, and the suspension bridge over
the Teesta renders the road a practicable one at all seasons.
I 36 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING,
These two facts combine to make the Jelep La Pass far
and away the most important trade route through the
Himalayas from India into Central Asia. During the last
two years the traffic has been carried on by way of Nepaul,
necessarily in diminished volume. The chief items of import
from Tibet are yak tails (used as chowries, or “fly-flappers,”
all over the east), hides, raw wool, horses, ponies, and
mules, musk, and brick tea. Our exports to the country,
among other articles, comprise cotton piece-goods (Euro-
pean), tobacco, indigo, horses, ponies, and mules, jewel-
lery, manufactured wool (European), brass and copper,
cotton twist and yarn (European), iron, manufactured silk
(Indian), and Chinese and Japanese ware.
From Sikkim we receive vegetables, brass and copper,
gram and pulse, spices other than betel-nuts, silver, hides
of cattle, ghee, raw cotton, horses, ponies, and mules,
cotton piece-goods (Indian), timber, yak tails, and cattle.
In return we send similar commodities to those despatched
to Tibet, besides also salt and husked rice.
As regards BHUTAN, the bulk of the trade with this state
does not pass through Darjeeling, being conducted by way
of Jalpaiguri, the railway station on the plains for the
Dooars. Still, of the total trade between Bhutan and Ben-
gal, a certain amount does filter through the district, ponies
and madder or manjić especially. Other imports from
Bhutan are yak-tails, Caoutchouc, and musk. Our chief
exports to the country are tobacco, betel-nuts, husked rice,
cotton piece-goods (European), Sugar, woollen stuffs (Euro-
pean), silk stuffs (Indian), brass and copper, and unhusked
rice. We have three stations, namely, Runjit, Rhenok,
and Kalimpong, for the registration of our trade with Tibet,
Sikkim, and Bhutan.
CHAPTER XIV.
THE LAMAS.
Mixture of Religions—Predominance of Buddhism—Occupa-
tions of the Zamas–Interior of the Temples—Praying-
Wheels—Articles on the A/far—A Pries# aſ his ZOezo-
tions-—Affability to Strangers.
THE population of Darjeeling, as we have seen, is a
conglomerate of many races. It follows that the prevailing
religions are also a good deal mixed. We find Buddhism
mingled with worship of the Hindu goddess Kali, and with
demonolatry pure and simple. The Bhuteas, of all the
hill-tribes, come nearest to being pure Buddhists. The
Nepaulese are most closely allied to the Hindoos of the
plains. Still, the spirit of Buddhism prevails over the
whole district, and tinges to greater or less degree every
creed. Lamas from Tibet, moreover, are everywhere pre-
sent, and we have seen that the Lepchas, whose religion,
Such as it is, is mostly demon-worship undisguised, have
a deep reverence for these Buddhist priests. Monasteries
are scattered all over Independent Sikkim, and their num-
ber in Tibet itself is simply incalculable. They are called
goompas, and are perched on hill-tops, the building being
usually a wooden barn-like structure erected at one end of
a stone platform. A very fair specimen is the temple at
the Bhutea bustee close to Darjeeling, fully described in a
previous chapter Many of these monasteries contain
138 GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
manuscripts, Sanscrit, Tibetan, and Chinese, of immense
value. The sole occupation of many Lamas is the print-
ing and transcribing of books. Others make the flutes,
whistles, cups, &c., used in their worship. A third class are
doctors and conjurers, professing to cure disease by exor-
cising evil spirits and to bring on rain at seasons of drought
by certain mysterious rites. Certain Lamas are also taught
in the monasteries such handicrafts as the manufacture of
clothes, boots, hats, &c. Others again are skilled in cook-
ing, baking, and house-keeping generally. The ragged,
dirty Lama mendicant is often enough seen in Darjeeling
station. He wears a black mask, dances, sings, and per-
haps plays on some oddly shaped musical instrument,
while an equally dirty and ragged urchin Collects the alms
that are offered by the onlookers. The Lama carries
with him the inevitable praying-wheel, and as he whirls it
round he chants out in dreary reiteration the invocation,
“Om Mani Padmi Om * (“Hail to him of the Lotus and
Jewel”).
The temples contain these praying-wheels, large and
small, some simply twirled in the hand, others turned by
ropes or straps, and a few at places actually rotated by
water-power. Within each cylinder are deposited written
prayers, and the turning of the wheel is a quick and ready
means of getting through with these devotional exercises.
On the wooden altar which faces the doorway, are placed
bags of juniper, tufts of flowers, peacock's feathers, clay
ornaments and offerings, brass Cups full of water, conch-
shells carved with the Sacred lotus, human thigh-bones
fashioned into trumpets, human skulls fashioned into
rattles or drums, tambourines, bells, and other articles.
To the right and left of the altar are shelves, with books
and manuscripts, kept carefully swathed in cloths, Round
THE LAMAS, I39
the temple are numerous poles, with rags on which texts:
are inscribed, fluttering in the breeze. Similar poles adorn,
the villages. The custom is, when one of the inhabit-
ants dies, if his relations can afford to pay for them,'
to set up two additional poles or flags in honour of his
memory. It is also common to hang votive rags to
trees, &c., to conciliate evil spirits; a goodly display of
these is commonly seen on the top of Observatory Hill,
Darjeeling.
The matutinal devotions of a Buddhist priest have been
thus described by Dr. Hooker:—“We were awakened at
daylight by the discordant Orisons of the Lama ; these com-
menced by the boys beating the great tambourine, then
blowing the conch-shells, and finally the trumpets and
thigh bones. Shortly afterwards the Lama entered, clad in
scarlet, shorn and barefooted, wearing a small red mitre,
a loose gown girt round the middle, and an under-garment
of questionable colours, possibly once purple. He walked
along, slowly muttering his prayers, to the end of the apart-
ment, whence he took a brass bell and dorge, and sitting
down cross-legged, commenced matins, counting his beads,
ringing the bell, and uttering most dismal prayers. After
various disposals of the cups, a larger bell was violently
rung for some minutes, himself snapping his fingers and
uttering most unearthly sounds. Finally, incense was
brought of charcoal with juniper sprigs; it was swung
about, and concluded the morning service; to our great
relief, for the noises were quite intolerable.” It may just
be added that the Lamas have no prejudices against ad-
mitting strangers into their places of worship, being rather
pleased than otherwise to show the sights, and quite ready
on invitation to say their prayers in presence of the visitor,
turning the praying cylinders—not always with a very grave
I4 p. GUIDE BOOK TO DARJEELING.
face but often with an amused smile and a twinkle of the
eye that imply acknowledgment of the sham—and indus-
triously droning forth the never varying invocation, “Om
Mani Padmi Om.”
THE END.
Animals on the Hills
Bhuteas & ſº
Birds ©
Bazar, The . .
Boarding Houses
Pirch Hill Park
Bhutea Bustee ſº
Buddhist Temple
Campbell, Dr. .
Cinchona, Cultivation of
Chourasta, The
Cemetery, The
Club, The tº
Cane Bridge over the Runjeet
DARJEELING, HISTORY OF
Cession of
District enlarged
Journey to
Description of route to
Languages of
Botanical features of
Natural history of .
Geology of .
Station of Q
As a Health resort .
Excursions from
Agriculture, manufactures and t
Domestic animals
Darjeeling Girls' School
&
* 8
rades
Page.
26–28
92—IOO
IoI–II 3
I 21–136
48
85
I 42 INDEX,
Page,
Darjeeling Himalayan Railway • * * * © II—I 5
Drainage & * & * * º & g º tº 87
Disposal of Town Refuse e e 0. tº g e g 87
Eden Sanitarium . º o & e e e º e 74
Education of Natives . º * & e e º º 90
Everest, Mount & © e e ſº o g o 55
Forest Scenery & º & • tº & & • 39, 40
Flowers, English . tº e o te º {} tº e 4 I
Fish 0. * º e e * o & º e 47
Ghoom Rock . . . . • º . ~ * * 0. º . IO4.
Himalayan Hill Tribes . . . • . . . . . . . . 7, 16–-32
Hill Forests. – o y º 9 º' a , a & 9 & º 34
Hooker, T)r., . ſº 0. 0 o a () & J C w tº © 5
Hotels . w 0 - 8 v 8 & e a 6 . e. tº © e 72
Insects ... • , e. & J & , e. & J C & & 45, 46
Jalpaiguri . . . . . . . . . . & t o e II
Jute Cultivation . . . © . . . . . e. e º º I I
Jail, The . . o ^ - a & J D º g tº e 67
Jalapahar, Military Depôt * ... a & o ſº º © 71
Justice, Civil and Criminal . . * e e º © e 90
Jelep La Pass ... e * - 0 º e e º & . I I6
Jungle Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . e • I 33
Rinchinjunga. - B , º wº e º g º o ſº 55
Kurseong o © * * * u, º & 0. º tº 0 º I5
Rochs, The . * º ſº ſº p ë i ſº o 19
Lepchas tº º O º º e e e e I9—25
Limboes o º 0. º tº * - s & s e 26
Leeches. º * , a & * u, s º e e o 45
Lloyd’s Botanic Gardens. V º . . 65
Lowis Jubilee Sanitarium e º ſº & º o e 79
Loretto Convent . • v a * : * , e e tº e 84
Lebong Spur . o • v e ſº e 9 x a e . . IO5
Local Manufactures • J e tº º º º o • I 34
Local Trade . e • , e. o 0. t e º • I 3
Lamas, The . º e ſº e * , a º . I37–I4O
Mechis of the Terai o e o ſº º e º I6, 17
Moths and Butterflies . . . . . . . . . * º e 46
Mineral Products . . . . . . . . e º * .* w 50
Moraines
Mountains—
o e
Loftiest Peaks
Table of Heights and Distances
y e o
A
e
*
º
o
Magnificence of the Spectacle ,
Gorgeous Sunset Effects
Mall, The
Municipal Area
5 5.
Nepaulese
Revenue
Native Schools
Observatory Hill
Old Rungaroon Garden .
Population of Darjeeling .
Private Boarding Schools
Police
Phalut
Prayer-Wheels
Railway, Opening of
35 Mountain .
5 5. Distance Traversed
Region of Perpetual Snow
Rungaroon Botanic Garden
Sanitarium, Establishment of
Senchal, Mount
Sikkim, Quarrel with
Siliguri
Scenery, Magnificen
Shrubbery,
The
ce of
Station Amusement Club
Schools
St. Andrew’s Church
Secretariat
Scotch Mission, The
St, Paul’s School
St. Joseph’s College
Sundukphu
Tibetans
º
f 43
Page,
5 I
55–60
55–57
58, 59
I44 INDEX,
AEage.
Terai, Plant Life of º º 0 , e 0 & 0 , 0 g 33
Bird Ilife in O © tº & tº a 9 • Q e s 43
Tropical Trees o e o • * * e e 34; 35
Town Hall, The , º e º te o e º e 63
Towns and Villages º o o ſº º te e e 90
Tiger Hill O o º e • a s º º te . IO2
Tonglo e e 3. e , 8 º e ſº • I IO
Tea Enterprise, History of . e te o e e , I 22
,, Cultivation of . e e º e o º I25
Traffic with Nepal, Sikkim, Tibet and Bhutan & º . I 35
Vegetation . e o º º sº º o º & 33
Vegetables, Cultivation of European º e º º e 38
Water-supply tº º O O te º O 88
TH A CPS ER'S GUI IDE E O OPX TO D A P J E E L J N G.
º S
| * * , ºn a s
J. - sès º ſo #7 arº, a Jong 89 S :
87° * . * § & S
s.Sº, - Sh & N., º
sº to ** ...” S, itſ ſº ºt: ...'", Pois §: Y S.
ir H] É sº, & f §§§ *ślag *AL fity § § s
- *** *> → § &S. * *,\rigrº." - * * * *
\ ,” serve R. #"Wºº Chonaiunno : "...A9' wgi {1}{\ S v - 283
\ ,' . –––ce---~ *** * > - Nº. .9 o a * Sº, , , º -- *- : - - -- - 42 *s *
\ ,' §§ %āś3390/. M.A.,..., § ºt *
*s , Ž vºws ''}''. t & & Sºs issº /ºlilºuſ. º r—— *Q.
© Y’ Z-2 §§§ idº rººf:::::::::::::--* JOGrºza, Pass 18400 f
28° on t Ch - Sºf §§.dorº'ſ ºkaïgºïèilhãº. º -
#3// . * ºta, §§ # gº” g 3.23.5'66. Tº #º ork, a Rºl,...}s
29003-33ſount Evere St. & La Šºšíº, º s's" - Zºº: %2% |
$3. // ! ** ſº Wºź”, “s %, S > sº "?/8%,
• ‘Z. i * S$.3%Hº: %, ’N ?, ? 2 + :S $ 3.3 ‘WI"\\\º-'4.
X% g * ... Nº ''''F4 Wºº... *,\ 76.2 *2 S n . Yº, & \\\\\\St g
§4 | S’ sº Sºf 2, ºr 1 22, > 2. O º }s £º". sº
%iſº t & tº 3 N ~ > * *N3%.” 22, 2: Sgºctºº. silº Fº
%| %X º, | Q C §§ S/ 34 '#2\"; 3. "3 St *S. Ş *::: Chuiñahā º sº §s
£2779.9%iº...!!!ºffa . Q? S \sº s! # §A2% 3.2 Ş & 3.4% . . . . . #s
*Nº,…, §º j tº º, º / # , º ----' ºs
sº ºft %; Wiślſº jºš "\" ...A.e. āş W º \\\\ / S㺠= @ Strºkarri tº ) @ Gº '.
§§ t JJ *Nº, Whilº.’” WWººy 2 º' Si2. A}. • 2 º' 3/ſtºº =\% (“ / S$1 S.C.
§§§ "Wºw". § of Yºngznaš Wiś,72 º' Zangerºgl §§ *3 °. º | âş r
§ - Wºº 3-4020 \ oë' §3. * tº ...Sººº... *) & § > Š%is º . sº
º??ºij. Sº \ & ichènſuin toºl, DN-2 ºp.33. (S 3 S º/N P; , Ł >/S
§§§º"W | *N. SKangcheºljºngºlº. 'S % # *Ss Zachgowdºš sº AE;
|WiiW "...”. f wº Ş. 28.156 §§º 2 5350 19200s S 2 S- £S º § F2 e-y >S/3? 3.
””. / x$ §§§Wººdºº/S %is S. ãºs. Sºğ
**, z f - ft. Jr., tº ſº g & 2 : º *iº; , SS •. -
k º & ,’ *W. $ & Gu. ſ herºigtſta Sº cº - \\ §§ 16 0 O 9| s j: s
sº" / s 2 º #. # = ( v" SMºšº T. PHAR), ºft
* * ,' Yaſuºgº-ºndim, Vºl. Toluiſº , =&Sārīm – s; ,
: SY PE ºf ," a Karºšířas: 22.9% * * 2//N #7872 ~ Šiš
fe- * - sº a - . sº * :: *, '. S ºp ~ º
AV * { &2. 4. #Kabur A %u, > .* // –S §
& W * & , ' , , 34: O *"Z. & Na-...--> 2.35 * T – 2 *2.
l S$ 3- T-- - . . . . 3% ºarsing Sº 2 J 3.1%
is \ſoºr ſº | *śchamnàgo or Dopendi Śē
3, 3– %:/.4 ; 17325.3%, ºnna; º % =
S; S S ...?iº Tumlung fººl ... . .( /?? / ?/ ? : <!?’ ſ
<! S Kirson; ºft º Chola Pašºl. = {{<
§2. 122.58 &N , ºtº ſ N. Žiš.
ăş Jºãs Yaſh la Pasº ! #%.
3, SS . . .av Sº SS A: - 2. l =
§3. o D7.4b clº-" S = < *.*::.. $º,
S} =<. ſ ..o.º.º. 5, #5 >.22. Pressl 43.88, Vºž.
# = © Menon 1 wºoese # Jelep lºv Pass *** =)
§§ O * * S.” .22 2% 2. e --"
sis-- Jºoz/ 97.5, 2 sº Sã t 2. - 3\ 2-
2: S. «grº Sºº 2.ɺir, ºr º
§Pernayangtse bailºš sº §§§ yo ch, * §2.
słż à922 attºº, ºš º WChovakan §§,
-US:- 2; $/S %iºs: 3% au.su...º.S*, *.*
* = * SS:: S-1 . ~: *NS ‘ºsº.º.º.S"> <
Singh la sº 2126 5 #. Rerroß ſº º ºùs % < 5E
2}: ... ...?ººl'el) dor] *. 3. F". Sºs -
Phallut |#gsu W ºsº ...; ºs ºn
3's - - - • ſº ,, . “g. WCZ7?? los (2 __:#2 -twº
šº, . . . * * Phaſiſuzº Puss &2). Sº 3; uſe la Pas:
# *sse-ºiº.º.º. 2, ### Sºlt
Žis Razºr (1772. 16. S.S. % º | £g)
Sendukphuº).1929 * . - . * lys º p 7.2
-> \ 2. t gº g * º 2
ºšſº ſºloš."é '- {-|-
rr...; §10074 Mount; Servc A8, T.2 +.
| Tonglutáš *...at/..., ATiger Hill 8514 Ž ~
* Y -w o f tº * wº Wºź. A: § hał G.T.S A \º *
27° ºwºśānchal GT.S. \, iž "Whic *
|\ / "||||Wagoo $//|\º
… , 'N -- $2/{(v.
/ \ \ | * Żle
--- - O .* ve * - - -
.S. tra Aost . H. * * *f g 9 kJ·- N 3.
- - - -T-T- - - - - - - - - Dhar łkūta Mikl * . sy.” b}\upseong %
- F - - - - - - - - - - - - Y sº Ilam. Y. 480 O "s §%WN
7.682 A A 79 92 4.52 s º ºnkaº S.
. . j 18 5 O N **
z e **) Si
% § a &ºis"Wł ); l
J J' * - §§ ||%, NY’/ºz, A. * /25 'E
- { Scale 16 Mile s = 1 Inch * gº ºn Nº 2 \ſs C. A -->
* () . 10 20 3C) 40 50 mººnwº D 72, - S. |
10 5 l l ºnly "" ; }ſt/es &Siliguri no
Sca/e C/ l_1_1_1_1_1_1_1_1_1_1 l l l W §§uri 899.
e §7 - 889 —393">R-3
/ s? –E– 4– g * /~ ~ + v H i
I Litho. Thacker Spink & Co, Calcutta.
Map II, Lie of the Mountain Peaks















































Ca/cutta, April 1894.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO.'S
P U B L | C A T | O N S.
—C O N T E N T S —
Page Page
Poktry, FICTION, ETC. ... l NATURAL HISTORY, BotANY, ETC. 21
HISTORY, CUSTOMs, TRAVELS, RTC. 7 ENGIN Eict, ING, SURVI.YING, Erc. 23
CAPT. HAY Es’ WO is KS on Horsks 10 || MILITARY WORKS . * * *
SPok'r AND WICTERINARY Works 12 HINDUSTAN1, PRRs1AN, ETC. ... 27.
MEDICIN it, HyGI ICNE, RTC. ... 15 | BOOK- KBR PING, &c., MANUALs... 30
DomiksTic Books ... ... 17 | EDUCATIONAL Books ... 31
GUI Did Books tº e & ..., 19 | LAND TitNURRS AND LAND REV-
TH ACK1, it's INDIAN DIRECTORIlºs, IEN U ſº ... e tº gº ... 33
- 20 | LAW Books tº º ºs ... 36
MAPs, RTC.
POETRY, FICTION, ETC.
THE SPOILT CHILD.—A TALE OF HINDU DOMESTIC LIFE. A Trans-
lation by G. D. Oswº LL., M.A., of the Bengali Novel “Alaler Gharen,
Dulal,” by PitARY CHAND MITTER (Tek Chand Thakur). Crown 8vo,
cloth, Rs. 3; paper, lès. 2-8.
“Interesting as throwing a fairly vivid light upon the intimate life of a
Hindu household.”—Daily Chronicle.
“May be heartily commended both for its literary qualities and for the vivid
picture it gives of Bengali manners and customs.”—Scotsman.
“lºvery chapter of the story is a picture of native thought and native
prejudice, presenting the ever-enduring hatreds of Hindoo and Mussalman
in a vivid light.”—Times Weekly. -
“Its merit lies in the quaint humour and quaint illustrations with which
the author embellishes his narrative.”—Academy.
“Mr. Oswell’s pleasant translation.” — A themawm.
SONG OF SHORUNJUNG & OTHER POEMS.—Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 2-8.
CoNTENTS:—1)arjeeling : Summer—The Song of Shorumjung—The Tsari
Reed—To the Uplands—A Pastoral—The Jessamine—The Fakir-The Fisher's
Supper—A Son—Two Moods—Farewell to Devon—Song—The London Maid
— Infancy—A Lullaby—There are Words—Borodino—The Lone Night.--The
Captive—Cossack Cradle Song—Gifts of the Terek—The Cup of Life—Scenes
from Eugene Onyegin. - * .
“Full of fastefully conceived description. . . . Some of the single verses
are very tuneful...... A number of translations from the Russian form a note-
worthy part of it. The poems have been admirably done into English, the
translator having not only retained the sense of the original but the distinctive
Russian character of expression and metre.”—Englishman. º, , .
}
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
2 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
RHYMING LEGENDS OF IND.—By H. KIRKwooD GRACEY, B.A., C.S.
Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 3-8.
CoNTENTS:—The City of Gore—A Mother's Wengeance—The Blue Cow—
Famine—A Terrible Tiger—The Legend of Somnath. --Treasure Trove—The
Idol of Kalinga—Mind vs. Matter— Vultur in partibus.
“A collection of bright little poems. Keen satirical touches are introduced
here and there throughout the volume....The clever little book.”—Morning
Post. -
“A charming little book. Of the poems here collected the majority will
bear reading several times over. The author writes in lively mirth-provoking
fashion.”—Eacpress.
“The whole volume is, indeed, well worth reading ; it is an enjoyable little
publication.”—Madras Mail.
“The writer of the present volume handles his theme with remarkable
ability.”—Booskeller.
ELSIE ELLERTON.—A NovKTETTE of ANGLO-INDIAN LIFE. By MAY
EDWooD, author of “Stray Straws,” “Autobiography of a Spin,” etc.
Crown 8vo. Re. 1-8.
“This, novel is amusing, pure in tone, and distinguished by much local
colouring.”—Athenaeum.
“Rudyard Kipling has taken the most becoming phase of Anglo-Indian
life and in the main made the worst of it. Miss Edwood takes the pleasantest
and makes the most of it.”—Rome News.
INDIAN LYRICS.—BY W. TREGo WEBB, M.A., Professor of English
Literature, Presidency College. Feap. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 4.
“Vivacious and clever . . . He presents the various sorts and conditions
of humanity that comprise the round of life in Bengal in a series of vivid
vignettes . . He writes with scholarly directness and finish.”—Saturday Review.
“A volume of poems of more than ordinary interest and undoubted ability.”
---Oaxford and Cambridge Undergraduate's Journal.
LIGHT AND SHADE.-BY HERBERT SHERRING. A. Collection of Tales
and Poems. Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 3.
“Piquant and humorous—decidedly original—not unworthy of Sterne.”—
Spectator (London).
STRAY STRAWS.—BEING A COLLECTION OF SEETCHES AND STORIES.
By MIGNON. Crown 8vo. Re. 1-8.
“It is a capital book to take up when one has a few spare moments on
hand.”—Englishman.
“A very interesting collection of short stories and sketches.”—Morning
Post (Allahabad).
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Poetry, Fiction, etc. 3
BARRACK ROOM BALLADS AND OTHER, VERSES.—BY RUDYARD
ECIPLING. Printed by Constable on laid paper, rough edges, bound in
buckram, gilt top. Post 8vo. Rs. 6.
“Mr. Kipling's verse is strong, vivid, full of character...... unmistakable
genius rings in every line.”— Times.
“The finest things of the kind since Macaulay’s “Lays.’”---Daily Chronicle.
“Mr. Kipling is probably our best ballad writer since Scott.”—Daily News.
“One of the books of the year.”—National Observer.
A QUEER ASSORTMENT.-A COLLECTION OF SKETCHES. By A.
HARVEY JAMES. Crown 8vo. Re. 1.
POPPIED SLEEP.—A CHRISTMAS STORY OF AN UP-COUNTRY STATION.
By Mrs. H. A. FLETCHER, author of “Here's Rue for You.” Crown
8vo, sewed. Re. 1-8.
PLAIN TALES FROM THE HILLS.—BY RUDYARD RIPLING, author of
“Departmental Ditties & other Verges.” Third Edition. Crown 8vo. Rs. 5.
“Rattling stories of flirtation and sport . . . . . Funny stories of practical
jokes and sells . . . . . Sad little stories of deeper things told with an affect-
ation of solemnity but rather more throat-lumping for that.”—Sunday Times.
“Mr. Kipling possesses the art of telling a story, ‘Plain Tales from the
Hills’ sparkle with fun; they are full of life, merriment, and humour, as a
rule mirth-provoking. There is at times, a pathetic strain ; but this soon
passes, and laughter—as the Yankees say, side-splitting laughter—is the order
of the day.”—Allen's Indian Mail.
“It would be hard to find better reading.”—Saturday Review.
A ROMANCE OF THAKOTE AND OTHER TALES.—Reprinted from The
World, Civil and Military Gazette, and other Papers. By F. C. C. Crown
8vo. Re. 1.
INDIAN NIELODIES. — BY GLYN BARLOW, M.A., Professor, St.
George's College, Mussoorie. Feap. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 2.
“Interesting, pleasant and readable . . . . Mr. Barlow's little volume
deserves a kindly and favourable reception, and well repays perusal.”—The
Morning Post.
LEVIORA.—BEING THE RHYMES OF A SUCCESSFUL COMPETITOR. By
the late T. F, BIGNoLD, Bengal Civil Service. 8vo, Rs. 7-8.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CATICUTTA.
4 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Puhlications.
INDIAN IDYLLS.—BY AN IDLE EXILE. Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 2-8.
CoNTRNTs —The Maharajah's Guest—The Major's Mess Clothes–In a
Haunted Grove—How we got rid of Hunks—My Wedding Day—Mrs. Cara-
mel's Bow-Wow-T he Tables Turned—A Polo Smash—After the Wily Boar
—In the Rajah's Palace—Two Strings–A Modern Lochinvar—My First Snipe
—Mrs. Dimple’s Victim—Lizzie; a Shipwreck—How the Convalescent Depôt
killed a Tiger—Faithful unto Death—The Haunted Bungalow—Christmas
with the Crimson Cuirassiers—In Death they were not Divided. -
“A pleasant little book of short stories and sketches, bright and light for
the most part, dealing with frays, and feasting, polo and pigsticking, with 8.
ghost story thrown in by way of relief.”—Saturday Review. }
“All these are thoroughly Indian in colour and tone, but are not the
less amusing and sprightly matter for reading in idle half hours.”—
Daily Telegraph.
“A series of crisp little stories . . . we shall be surprised if it fails to
“fetch’ the public who have had nothing better to amuse them since the
lamented Aberigh Mackay astonished Anglo-India with his Sir Ali Baba's
revelations.”—Eacpress.
THE TRIBES ON MY FRONTIER.—AN INDIAN NATURALIST's FOR-
RIGN POLICY. By E.H.A. With 50 Illustrations by F. C. M. Acra R.
Imp. 16mo. Uniform with “Lays of Ind.” Fourth Edition. Rs. 7.
“We have only to thank our Anglo-Indian naturalist for the delightful
book which he has sent home to his conntry men in Britain. May he live to
give us another such.”—Chambers' Journal.
“A most charming series of sprightly and entertaining essays on what may
be termed the fauna of the Indian Bungalow. . . . . . . . We have no doubt
that this amusing book will find its way into every Anglo-Indian's library.”—
Allen's Indian Mail. &
“This is a delightful book, irresistibly funny in description and illustration
but full of genuine science too. . . . . . . . . There is not a dull or unin!
structive page in the whole book.”—Knowledge.
“ It is a pleasantly-written book about the insects and other torments of
ndia which make Anglo-Is dian life unpleasant, and which can be read with
leasure even by thos beyond the reach of the tormenting things Eli A
pescribes.”—Graphic. .
INDIA IN 1983.−A REPRINT OF THIS CELEBRATED PROPHESY OF
NATIvic RULE IN INDIA. Feap. 8vo. Re. 1. -
* Instructive as well as amusing.”—Indian Daily News.
, “There is not a dull page in the hundred and thirty-seven pages of which it
consists.”—Times of India. &
REGIMENTAL RHYMES AND OTHER WERSES.—By KENTISH RAG,
Imp. 16mo. Sewed, Re. 1; cloth, Re. 1-8.
‘ ‘Kentish Rag' has been well advised to collect his writings.”—Madras Mail.
N. The verre and go of the Regimental Ithymes are undoubted.”—Nilgiri
€70S, -
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA,
Poetry, Fiction, etc. - 5
AUTOBIOGRAPHY OF A SPIN.—BY MAY EDWOOD, author of “Elsie
- Ellerton,” “Stray Straws,” &c. Re. 1-8. - - - r
“Undeniably a clever and not unaffecting study of the natural history of
flirtation.”—Saturday Review.
“In Anglo-Indian society slang a “Spin 'appears to be a young lady who
visits India in order to obtain matrimony by means of a vivacious, not to
say bold, demeanour. The author of this book describes such a person,
and her heartless conduct in the pursuit of her object, which, however, does
not appear to have been successful.”—Times Weekly.
LALU, THE CHILD-WIDOW.—A Poem in seven parts: Proem—The
Zemindar—The Farm—The Betrothal—The Lovers—Widowhood—The
Pyre–Rest. By Lt.-Col. W. L. GR1c1 NSTiticitT. Cr. 8vo. Rs. 2.
BEHIND THE BUNGALOW.-BY EHA, author of “THE TRIBES ON
MY FRONTIER.” With Illustrations by F. C. M.Act A R. Fourth Edition.
Imp. 16mo. Its. 5.
“Of this book it may conscientiously be said that it does not contain a dull
page, while it contains very many which sparkle with a bright and fascinating
humour, refined by the unmistakable evidences of culture.”—Rome News,
“The author of ‘Behind the Bungalow ’ has an excellent sense of humour
combined with a kindliness of heart which makes his little book delightful
reading.”—Saturday Review. to
“There is plenty of fun in ‘Behind the Bungalow.’”— World. -
“A series of sketches of Indian servants, the humour and acute observation
of which will appeal to every Anglo-Indian.”—Englishman.
“Drawn with delightful humour and keen observation.”—Athenaeum.
“Every variety of native character, the individual as well as the nation,
caste, trade, or class, is cleverly pourtrayed in these diverting sketches.”—
Jllustrated London News.
INDIAN ENGLISH AND INDIAN CHARACTER.—BY ELLIS UNDER-
wood. Feap. 8vo. As. 12.
LAYS OF IND.—BY ALIPH CHEEM. Comic, Satirical, and Descriptive
Poems illustrative of Anglo-Indian Life. . Eighth Edition. Enlarged.
With 70 Illustrations. Cloth, elegant gilt edges. Rs. 7-8.
“There is no mistaking the humour, and at times, indeed, the fun is both
‘fast and furious.' One can readily imagine the merriment created round the
camp fire by the recitation of ‘The Two Thumpers,” which is irresistibly droll.”
—Liverpool Mercury.
“The verses are characterised by high animal spirits, great cleverness, and
most excellent fooling.”—World.
THE CAPTAIN'S DAUGHTER.—A NOVEL. By A. C. POOSHEIN.
Literally translated from the Russian by STUART H. GoDFRuty, Captain,
Bo. S. C. Crown 8vo. Rs. 2. -
“Possesses the charm of giving vividly, in about an hour's reading, a con-
ception of Russian life and manners which many persons desire to possess.”—
Englishman. -
* The story will interest keenly any English reader.”—Overland Mail.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
6 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
“HERE'S RUE FOR YOU.”—NOVELETTES, ENGLISH AND ANGLO-
INDIAN. By Mrs. H. A. FLETCHICR. Crown 8vo, sewed. Rs. 2.
CONTRNTS :—A Summer Madness—Whom the Gods Love—Nemesis—A
Gathercd Rose—At Sea: a P. and O. Story—Esther : an Episode.
ONOOCOOL CHUNDER. MOOKERJEE.-A MEMOIR OF THE LATE
JUSTICE ONoocool, CHUNDIER MookERJICE. By M. MooRERJEE. Fourth
Edition. 12mo. Re. 1.
“The reader is earnestly advised to procure the life of this gentleman, .
written by his nephew, and read it.”—The Tribes on my Frontier.
DEPARTMENTAL DITTIES AND OTHER, VERSES.—BY RUDYARD
RIPLING. Seventh Edition. With additional Poems. Cloth. Rs. 3.
“This tiny volume will not be undeserving of a place on the bookshelf that
holds “Twenty-one Days in India.’ Its contents, indeed, are not unlike the
sort of verse we might have expected from poor ‘Ali Baba' if he had been
spared to give it us. Mr. Kipling resembles him in lightness of touch, quaint-
ness of fancy, and unexpected humour.”—Pioneer.
“The verses are all written in a light style, which is very attractive, and
no one with the slightest appreciation of humour will fail to indulge in many
a hearty laugh before turning over the last page.”—Times of India.
“Mr. Kipling's rhymes are rhymes to some purpose. He calls them De-
partmental Ditties: but they are in reality social sketches of Indian officialism
from a single view point, that of the satirist, though the satire is of the
mildest and most delightful sort.”—Indian Planters' Gazette,
THE INSPECTOR.—A COMEDY. BY GOGOL. Translated from the
Russian by T. H.ART-DAVIics, Bombay Civil Service. Crown 8vo. Rs. 2.
“His translation, we may add, is a very good one.”—The Academy.
ASHES FOR BREAD.—A ROMANCE. By BEAUMONT HARRINGTON.
Crown 8vo, sewed. Re. 1-8.
“A lively appreciation of the trials, intrigues, and capacities of an Indian
career.”—Indian Daily News.
“A very artistic little plot.”—Madras Times.
A MIDSUMMER NIGHT'S DREAM (SHAKESPEARE).-Adapted to Pas-
toral Representation. By N. NEWN HAM-DAVIS. Crown 8vo. Re. 1.
THE SECOND BOMBARDIMIENT AND CAPTURE OF FORT WILLIAM,
CALCUTTA.—An Account of the Bombardment of Fort William, and the
Capture and Occupation of the City of Calcutta, on the 20th June 1891,
&c., by a Russian Fleet and Army. Compiled from the Diaries of Pi: INCIC
SERG tº WoroszoFF and GENERAL YAGoDKIN. Translated from the
Original Russe by Ivan BATIUSHKA. Crown 8vo, sewed, Re. 1-8.
A NATURALIST ON THE PROWL.-BY EHA, author of “Tribes on
my Frontier,” “Behind the Bungalow.” Impl., 16mo.
Profusely illustrated by Photographs of Animals in their habitat and at
work; and Sketches by R. A. STERNDALE. - [In the Press.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
History, Customs, Travels, etc. 7
HISTORY, CUSTOMS, TRAVELS, ETC.
THE HINDOOS AS THEY ARE.-A DESCRIPTION OF THE MANNERS,
Customs, and Inner Life of Hindoo Society, Bengal. By SHIB CHUNDER
Bosſt. Second Edition, Revised. Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 5.
HINDU MYTHOLOGY..—VEDIC AND PURANIC. By W. J. WILRINS,
of the London Missionary Society, Calcutta. Profusely Illustrated.
Imp. 16mo, cloth, gilt elegant. Rs. 7-8.
“His aim has been to give a faithful account of the Hindu deities such as an
intelligent native would himself give, and he has endeavoured, in order to
achieve his purpose, to keep his mind free from prejudice or theological bias.
The author has attempted a work of no little ambition and has succeeded in his
attempt, the volume being one of great interest and usefulness.”—Home News,
“Mr. Wilkins has done his work well, with an honest desire to state facts
apart from all theological prepossession, and his volume is likely to be a
useful book of reference.”—Guardian.
MODERN HINDUISM.–BEING AN ACCOUNT OF THE RELIGION ANI)
LIF it of the Hindus in Northern India. By W. J. WILKINs, author of
“Hindu Mythology, Vedic and Puranic.” Demy 8vo. Its. 8.
“He writes in a liberal and comprehensive spirit.”—Saturday Review.
e g º e º e volume which is at once a voluminous disquisition upon the Hindu
religion, and a most interesting narrative of Hindu life, the habits and cus-
toms of the Hindu community and a national Hindu historiette, written with
all the nerve of the accomplished littérateur, added to the picturesque word-
painting and life-like delineations of a veteran novelist.”—Lucknow Eapress.
“A solid addition to our literature.”—Westminster Review.
“A valuable contribution to knowledge.”—Scotsman.
THE ETHICS OF ISLAM. —A LECTURE BY THE HON’BLE AMEER ALI,
C.I.E., author of “The Spirit of Islam,” “The Personal Law of th
Mahommedans,” etc. Crown 8vo. Cloth gilt. Rs. 2-8
An attempt towards the exposition of Islámic Ethics in the English
Hanguage. Besides most of the Koranic Ordinances, a number of the precepts
and sayings of the Prophet, the Caliph Ali, and of “Our Lady,’ are translated
and given. .
THE LIFE AND TEACHING OF KESHUB CHUNDER, SEN.—By P. C.
- Mi Azumi DA18. Second and Cheaper Edition. Rs. 2.
THEOSOPHICAL CHRISTIANITY..—AN ADDRESS BY L. S. Second
Edition, Revised and Enlarged. Small 4to. As. 8.
BOMBAY SKETCHES.—BY S. TAGORE, BO.C.S. Printed in Bengali.
Illustrated. Royal 8vo, cloth, gilt. Rs. 8.
KASHGARIA (EASTERN OR CHINESE TURKESTAN).-HISTORICAL,
Geographical, Military, and Industrial. By Col. KUROPATKIN, Russian
Army. Translated by Maj. Gów AN, H. M.'s Indian Army, 8vo, Rs. 6-8,
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., UALCUTTA.
8 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
ANCIENT INDIA AS DESCRIBED BY PTOLEMI.Y. —WITH INTRODUC-
TION, Commentary, Map of India. By J. W. McCRINDLE, M.A. 8vo,
cloth, lettered. Rs. 4-4.
ANCIENT INDIA. AS DESCRIBED BY MEGASTHENES AND ARRIAN.
With Introduction, Notes, and a Map of Ancient India. By J. W.
McCRINDLR, M.A. 8vo. Rs. 2-8.
THE COMMERCE AND NAVIGATION OF THE ERYTHRAEAN SEA ;
Periplus Maris Erythraei; and of Arrian's Account of the Voyage of
Nearkhos. With Introduction, Commentary, Notes, and Index. By J.
W. McCRINDLE, M.A. 8vo. Rs. 3.
ANCIENT INDIA AS DESCRIBED BY KTESIAS THE KNIDIAN.—
A Translation of the Abridgment of his ‘Indika,' by Photios. With
Introduction, Notes, Index. By J. W. McCºrn DLE, M.A. 8vo. Rs. 3,
A MEMOIR OF CENTRAL INDIA, INCLUDING MALWA AND ADJOIN-
ING Provis CEs, with the History, and copious Illustrations, of the Past
and Present condition of that country. By Maj.-Gen. S. J. MALcol M, G.C.B.,
&c. Reprinted from Third Edition. 2 vols. Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 5.
BOOK OF INDIAN ERAS.—WITH TABLES FOR CALCULATING INDIAN
DATEs. By ALEXANDi R CUNNINGHAM, C.S.I., C.I.E., Major-General,
Royal Engineers. Royal 8vo, cloth. Rs. 12.
TALES FROM INDIAN HISTORY..—BEING THE ANNALS OF INDIA
retold in Narratives. By J. TALBOYS WHEELE B. Crown 8vo, cloth,
Rs. 3. School Edition, cloth, limp, Re. 1-8.
“The history of our great dependency made extremely attractive reading.
Altogether this is a work of rare merit.”—Broad Arrow.
“Will absorb the attention of all who delight in drilling records of adven-
ture and daring. It is no mere compilation, but an earnest and brightly
written book.”—Daily Chronicle, - -
A CRITICAL EXPOSITION OF THE POPULAR “JIHAD.”—Showing
that all the Wars of Mahammad were defensive, and that Aggressive
War or Compulsory Conversion is not allowed in the Koran, &c. By
Moulavi CHERA GH ALI, author of “Reforms under Moslem Rule,”
“Hyderabad under Sir Salar Jung.” 8vo. Rs. 6.
MAYAM-MA: THE HOME OF THE BURMAN.—BY TSAYA (REv. H.
Powell). Crown 8vo. Rs. 2.
AN INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF HINDUISM.–EY GURU
PERSHAD SEN. Crown 8vo, Re. 1-8.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
History, Customs, Travels, etc. 9
CHIN-LUSHAI LAND.—INCLUDING A DESCRIPTION OF THE WARIOUS
Expeditions into the Chin Lushai Hills and the Final Annexation of the
Country. By Surgn.-Lieut.-Colonel A. S. REID, M.B., Indian Medical
Service. With three Maps and eight Phototint Illustrations. Cloth,
gilt. Rs. 12.
THE IMAGE OF WAR, OR SERVICE IN THE CHIN HILLS.—A COL-
LECTION of 34 Full-page Collotypes of Instantaneous Photographs and
160 interspersed in the reading. By Surgeon-Captain A. G. NEWLAND.
With Introductory Notes, by J. D. MACNABB, Esq., B.C.S. 4to, cloth,
gilt elegant. Rs. 32.
THE RACES OF AFGHANISTAN.—BEING A BRIEF ACCOUNT of the
principal Nations inhabiting that country. By Surg.-Maj. H. W. BKLLEW,
C.S.I., late on Special Political Duty at Kabul. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 3–8.
KURRACHEE: ITS PAST, PRESENT, AND FUTURE.-BY ALEXANDER F.
BAILLI it, F.R.G.S., author of “A Paraguayan Treasure,” &c. With
Maps, Plans, and Photographs, showing the most recent improvements.
Super-royal 8vo, cloth. Rs. 15.
THE TRIAL OF MAHARAJA NANDA. KUMA.R.—A NARRATIVE OF A
JUDICIAL MU is Dicit. By H. Blºvič RIDG ic, B.C.s. Demy 8vo. Rs. 5.
“Mr. Beveridge has given a great amount of thought, labour, and research
to the marshalling of his facts, and he has done his utmost to put the exceed-
ingly complicated and contradicting evidence in a clear and intelligible form.”
—Home News.
THE EMPEROR AKBAR.—A CONTRIBUTION TOWARDS THE HISTORY
OF INDIA in the 16th Century. By FitEDER1CR AUGUSTUs, Count of Noer,
Translated from the Germaan by ANNETTE S. Bºvkº I.D.G.E. 2 vols. 8vo.
cloth, gilt. Rs. 5.
ECHOES FROM OLD CALCUTTA.—BEING CHIEFLY REM.INISCENCES
of the days of Warren Hastings, Francis, and Impey. By H. E. Bus-
Tititi). Second Edition, Enlarged and Illustrated. Post 8vo. Rs. 6.
“The book will be read by all interested in India.”—Army & Navy Magazine.
“Dr. Busteed's valuable and entertaining 'Echoes from Old Calcutta' has
arrived at a second edition, revised, enlarged and illustrated with portraits
and other plates rare or quaint. It is a pleasure to reiterate the warm com-
mendation of this instructive and lively volume which its appearance called
forth some years since.”—Saturday Review.
“A series of illustrations which are highly entertaining and instructive of
the life and manners of Anglo-Indian society a hundred years ago . . . The
book from first to last has not a dull page in it, and it is a work of the kind o
which the value will increase with years.”—Englishman. -
THACKER, SPINK AND Co., CALCUTTA.
*
10 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
CAPT. HAYES’ WORKS ON HORSES.
ON HORSE BREAKING...—BY CAPTAIN M. H. HAYES. Numerous Illus-
trations by J. H. Oswald-BRowN. Square. Rs. 16.
(1) Theory of Horse Breaking. (2) Principles of Mounting. (3) Horse
Control. (4) Rendering Docile. (5) Giving Good Mouths. (6) Teaching
to Jump. . (7) Mount for the First Time. ...(8) Breaking for Ladies' Riding.
(9). Breaking to Harness. (10) Faults of Mouth. (11) Nervousness and Im-
patience. (12) Jibbing. (3) Jumping. Faults. (14) Faults in Harness.
(15) Aggressiveness. (16) Riding and Driving Newly-Broken Horse. (17)
Stable Vices, .
“One great merit of the book is its simplicity.”—Indian Daily News.
“A work which is entitled to high praise at being far and away the best
reasoned-out one on breaking under a new system we have seen.”—Field.
“Clearly written.”—Saturday Review.
“The best and most instructive book of its class that has appeared for many
years.”—Times of India. -
RIDING : ON THE FLAT AND ACROSS COUNTRY. —A GUIDE TO
PRACTICAL BIORSEMANs HIP. By Captain M. H. HAYEs. With 70 Illus-
trations by STURGESs and J. H. Oswald-Brown. Third Edition, Revised
and Enlarged. Rs. 7-8.
The whole text has been so revised or re-written as to make the work the
most perfect in existence, essential to all who wish to attain the art of
riding correctly.
“One of the most valuable additions to modern literature on the subject.”—
Civil and Military Gazette.
“A very instructive and readable book.”—Sport.
“This useful and eminently practical book.”—Freeman's Journal.
"THE POINTS OF THE HORSE. —A FAMILIAR TREATISE ON EQUINE
CoNForMATION. Describing the points in which the perfection of each
class of horses consists. By Captain M. H. HAYIts. Illustrated by 74
Reproductions of Photographs and 225 Line Drawings. Sm, 4to, Rs. 32.
INDIAN RACING REMINISCENCES.—BEING ENTERTAINING NARRA-
Trvits, and Anecdotes of Men, Horses, and Sport. By Captain M. H.
HAY ics. Illustrated with 42 Portraits and Engravings. Imp. 16mo. Rs. 6.
“Captain Hayes has done wisely in publishing these lively sketches of life
in India. The book is full of racy anecdote.”— Bell's Life.
“All sportsmen who can appreciate a book on racing, written in a chatty
style and full of anecdote, will like Captain Hayes’ latest work.”— Field.
“Many a racing anecdote and many a curious character our readers will
find in the book, which is very well got up, and embellished with many
portraits.”—Bailey's Magazine.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA,
Capt. Hayes' Works on Horses. 11
VETERINARY NOTES FOR HORSE-OWNERS.—A PopULAR GUIDE
to Horse Medicine and Surgery. By Captain M. H. HAYEs. Fourth Edi-
tion, Enlarged and Revised to the latest Science of the Day. With many
New Illustrations by J. H. Oswald-BROWN. Crown 8vo, buckram. Rs. 9.
The chief new matter in this Edition is—Articles on Contracted Heels,
Donkey’s Foot Disease, Forging or Clicking, Rheumatic Joint Disease,
Abscess, Dislocation of the Shoulder Joint, Inflammation of the Mouth and
Tongue, Flatulent Distention of the Stomach, Twist of the Intestines, Relapsing
Fever, Cape Horse Sickness, Horse Syphilis, Rabies, Megrims, Staggers,
Epilepsy, Sunstroke, Poisoning, Castration by the Ecraseur, and Mechanism
of the Foot (in Chapter or Shoeing).
“Of the many popular veterinary books which have come under our notice,
this is certainly one of the most scientific and reliable. . . . . The de-
scription of symptoms and the directions for the application of remedies are
given in perfectly plain terms, which the tyro will find no difficulty in com-
prehending.”—Field. -
“Simplicity is one of the most countmendable features in the book.”—Illus-
trated Sporting and Dramatic News.
“Captain Hayes, in the new edition of ‘Veterinary Notes,' has added con-
siderably to its value, and rendered the book more useful to those non-profes-
sional people who may be inclined or compelled to treat their own horses
when sick or injured.”— Veterinary Journal.
“We do not think that horse-owners in general are likely to find a more
reliable and useful book for guidance in an emergency.”—Field.
TRAINING AND HORSE MANAGEMENT IN INDIA.—BY CAPTAIN M.
H. HAYIts, author of “Veterinary Notes for Horse-Owners,” “Riding,” &c.
Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo, Rs. 6.
“No better guide could be placed in the hands of either amateur horseman
or veterinary surgeon.”— Peterinary Journal.
“A useful guide in regard to horses any where. . . . Concise, practical,
and portable.”—Saturday Review. -
SOUNDNESS AND AGE OF HORSES.—A VETERINARY AND LEGAL
GUID it to the Examination of Horses for Soundness. By Captain M. H.
HAYES, M.R.C.V.s. With 100 lllustrations. Crown 8vo. Rs. 6.
“Captain Hayes is entitled to much credit for the explicit and sensible
manner in which he has discussed the many questions—some of them ex-
tremely vexed ones—which pertain to soundness and unsoundness in horses.”
— Veterinary Journal. -
“All who have horses to buy, sell, or keep will find plenty to interest them
in this manual, which is full of illustrations, and still fuller of hints and
wrinkles.”—Referee.
“Captain Hayes' work is evidently the result of much careful research, and
the horseman, as well as the veterinarian, will find in it much that is interest-
ing and instructive.”—Field. - -
THACKER, SPINK AND Co., CALOUTTA.
12 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
THE HORSE-VWOMAN.—A PRACTICAL GUIDE TO SIDE-SADDLE RIDING.
By Mrs. HAY is, and Edited by Captain M. H. HAyks. Illustrated by 48
Drawings by J. Oswald-Brows and 4 Photographs. Uniform with
“Riding: on the Flat and Across Country.” Imp. 16mo. Rs. 7-8.
{{ TV1, . . ; & * * & "
, “This is the first occasion on which a practical horseman and a practical
horsewoman have collaborated in bringing out a book on riding for ladies.
The result is in every way satisfactory.”—Field.
“A large amount ºf sound practical instruction, very judiciously and plea-
santly imparted.”—Times.
‘We have seldom come across a brighter book than ‘The Horsewoman.”—
Athenaeum.
“Buminently sensible and practical.”—Daily Chronicle.
SPORT AND WETERINARY WORKS.
HIGHLANDS OF CENTRAL INDIA.—NOTES ON THEIR FORESTS
and Wild Tribes, Natural History, and Sports. By Capt. J Foutsy TH, B, s.c.
New Edition. With Map and Tinted Illustrations. Rs. 7-8.
CALCUTTA TURF CLUB RULES OF RACING, together with the
Rules relating to Lotteries, Betting, Defaulters, and the Rules of the
Calcutta Turf Club. Revised May 1892. Authorized Edition. Rs. 2.
THE RACING CALENDAR, VoI. V, FROM MAY 1892 To APRIL 1893,
Racks Past. Published by the Calcutta Turf Club. CosticNTs —Rules
of Racing, Lotteries, C. T. C., etc., Registered Colours; Licensed Train-
ers and Jockeys; Assumed Names: List of Horses Aged, Classed and
Measured by C. T. C. and W. I. T. C.; Races Run under C. T. C. Rules;
Performances of Horses; Appendix and Index. Rs. 4.
THE RACING CALENDAR FROM 1ST AUGUST 1888 TO 30TH APRIL 1889,
RACES PAST. 12mo, cloth. Wol. I, les. 4. Vol. II, to April 1890,
Rs. 4. Vol. III, to April 1891, Rs. 4. Wol. IV, to April 1892, Rs. 4.
Vol. W, to April 1893, Rs. 4.
CALCUTTA RACING CALENDAR.—PUBLISHED EVERY FORTNIGHT,
Annual Subscription Rs. 12.
THE SPORTSMAN'S MANUAL.—IN QUEST OF GAME IN RULLU,
Lahoul, and Ladak to the Tso Morari Lake, with Notes on Shooting in
Spiti, Bara Bagahal, Chamba, and Kashmir, and a detailed description of
Sport in more than 100 Nalas. With 9 Maps. By Lt.-Col. R. H. TYACKE,
late H. M.'s 98th and 34th Regiments. Feap 8vo, cloth. Rs. 3-8.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Sport and Veterinary Works. 3. 13
SEONEE : OR, CAMP LIFE ON THE SATPURA RANGE.-A Tale of
Indian Adventure. By R. A. STIt RNDALI, author of “Mammalia of
India,” “Denizens of the Jungles.” Illustrated by the author. With a
Map and an Appendix containing a brief Topographical and Historical
Account of the District of Seonee in the Central Provinces of India,
Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 7.
LARGE GAME SHOOTING IN THIBET, THE HIMALAYAS, NORTHERN
AND CENTRAL INDIA. By Brig.-General A LitzANDR R A. KIN LOCH. Con-
taining Descriptions of the Country and of the various Animals to be
found; together with extracts from a journal of several years' standing.
With 36 Illustrations from photographs and a Map. Third Edition, Re-
vised and Enlarged. Demy 4to, elegantly bound. Rs. 25.
“This splendidly illustrated record of sport, the photogravures, especially
the heads of the various, antelopes, are life-like ; and the letter-press is very
pleasant reading.”—Graphic.
“The book is capitally got up, the type is better than in former editions, and
the excellent photogravures give an exceptional value to the work.”—Asian.
DENIZENS OF THE JUNGLES.—A SERIES OF SEETCHES OF WILD
ANIMALs, illustrating their form and natural attitude. With Letter-press
Description of each Plate. By R. A. STERNDALE, F.R.G.s., F.z.s., .
author of “Natural History of the Mammalia of India,” “Seonee,” &c.
Oblong folio. Rs. 10.
I. “Denizens of the Jungles”— | VII. “A Race for Life”—Blue Bull
Aborigines—Deer—Moukeys. . and Wild Dogs. -
II. “On the Watch”—Tiger. VIII. “Meaning Mischief "-The
III. “Not so Fast Asleep as he Gaur—Indian Bison.
Looks”—Panther—Monkeys. IX. “More than His Match”—
1W, “Waiting for Father ”—Black Buffalo and Izhinoceros.
- Bears of the Plains. X. “A Critical Moment”—Spotted
W. “Rival Monarchs”—Tiger and Deer and Leopard.
Elephant. XI. “Hard Hit”—The Sambur.
WI. “ Hors de Combat "-Indian XII. “Mountain Monarchs”—Marco
Wild Boar and Tiger. Polo’s Sheep.
REMINISCENCES OF TWENTY YEARS' PIG-STICKING IN BENGAL.
By Raou L. Illustrated with 6 Portraits. Crown 8vo, cloth gilt.
Rs. 6-12. -
HORSE BREEDING AND REARING IN INDIA. – WITH NOTES O N
Tir AINING for the Flat and Across Country, and on Purchase, Breaking in
- and General Management. By Major Joh N HUMFREY, B.s.o
Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 3-8. -
•; F. Z.S.
THACKER, SPINK AND Co., CALOUTTA.
14 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
INDIAN HORSE NOTES.—AN EPITOME OF USEFUL INFORMATION
arranged for ready reference on Emergencies, and specially adapted for
Officers and Mofussil Residents. All Technical Terms explained and
Simplest Remedies selected. By Major C , author of “Indian
Notes about Dogs.” Third Edition, Revised and considerably En-
larged. Feap. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 2.
DOGS FOR HOT CLIMATES.—A GUIDE FOR RESIDENTS IN TROPICAL
Count RIRs as to suitable Breeds, their Itespective Uses, Management
and Doctoring. By VERO SHAw and Captain M. H. HAY Rs. With
Illustrations. [In the Press.
HOW TO CHOOSE A DOG, AND HOW TO SELECT A PUPPY, together
with a few notes upon the peculiarities and characteristics of each Breed.
By VERO SHAw, author of “The Illustrated Book of the Dog,” late
Kennel Editor of the “Field.”
This small book contains the result of many years' careful study of all
breeds of Dogs, and condenses into a small compass a very large amount of
information of a kind that has never yet been presented to the public. Forty-
five different Breeds of Dogs are described; the compressed details as to
description, use, weights at various ages, etc., being given in two pages for
each Breed. .
GUIDE TO EXAMINATION OF HORSES, FOR SOUNDNESS FOR STU-
Dients & BEGINNICRs. By MOORE, F. R.C.V.S., Army Wety. Dept., Wety.
- Officer, Remount Depôt, Calcutta. Feap. 8vo. Sewed.
RIDING FOR LADIES, WITH HINTS ON THE STABLE.-A LADy's
Horse Book. By Mrs. Powic R O'DonoGH UK. With 75 Illustrations by
A. CHANTREY CORBOULD, Elegantly printed and bound, Imp. 16mo,
gilt. Rs. 7-8. - f
INDIAN NOTES ABOUT DOGS.--THEIR DISEASES AND TREATMENT,
By Major C Fourth Ldition, FCap., 8vo, cloth. Re. 1-8.
ANGLING ON THE KUIMAUN LAKES.—WITH A MAP OF THE KUMAON
LAKE Country and Plan of each Lake. By Depy. Surgeon-General
W. WALKER. Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 4.
“Written with all the tenderness and attention to detail which characterise
the followers of the gentle art.”—Bayes' Sporting News. -
USEFUL HINTS TO YOUNG SHIKARIS ON THE GUN AND RIFLE.—
By “THE LITTL1, OLD BEA R.” Reprinted from Asian.
THE ARMIS ACT (XI OF 1878).-WITH ALL THE NOTICES OF THE GOV-
ERNMENT OF INDIA, the Bengal, North-Western Provinces and Punjab
Governments, and High Court Decisions and Rulings. By W. HAWKINS.
Second Edition. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 7-8.
POLO RULES.— RULES OF THE CALCUTTA POLO CLUB and of the Indian
Polo Association, with the Article on Polo by “An Old Hand.” Iteprinted
from Hayes' Sporting News. Feap. 8vo. Re. 1.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA,
Medicine, Hygiene, etc. 15
THE POLO CALENDAR, 1892–93.−COMPILED BY THE INDIAN POLO
Association. Vol. I. Contents: Committee of Stewards, Rules for the
Regulation of Tournaments, &c.—Rules of the Game—Station Polo—
List of Members—List of Existing Polo Ponies, names and description,
with Alphabetical List—Records of Tournaments, 1892–93—Previous
Winners. Feap. 8vo, cloth. Iłe. 1-8.
It ULES OF POLO.—From the Polo Calendar. As. 8.
LAWS OF FOOTBALL (ASSOCIATION).-Containing the Law of the
Game—Definition of Terms—Hints to l8eferees. For Pocket. As.
MEDICINE, HYGIENE, ETC.
AIDS TO PRACTICAL HYGIENE.—By J. C. BATTERSBY, R.A., M.B.,
B.C.H., Univ. Dublin. Feap. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 2.
“A valuable handbook to the layman interested in sanitation.”—Morning Post,
“To the busy practitioner or the medical student it will serve the purposes
of a correct and intelligent guide.”—Medical Record.
HINTS FOR THE MANAGEMENT AND MEDICAL TREATMENT OF
CHILDREN IN INDIA. By Edwa RD A. BIRCH, M.D., Surgeon-Major,
Bengal Establishment. Second lüdition, Revised. Being the Eighth
Edition of “Goodeve's Hints for the Management of Children in India.”
[New Edition in the Press.
The Medical Times and Gazette, in an article upon this work and Moore's
“Family Medicine for India,” says:—“The two works before us are in them-
selves probably about the best examples of medical works written for non-
professional readers. The style of each is simple, and as free as possible
from technical expressions. The modes of treatment recommended are
generally those most likely to yield good results in the hands of laymen;
and throughout each volume the important fact, is kept constantly before the
mind of the reader, that the volume he is using is but a poor substitute for
personal professional advice, for which it must be discarded whenever there
is the opportunity.”
QUERIES ATA MESS TABLE.—WHAT SHALL WE FAT2, WHAT SHALL
w1. Dr.INK ? By Surg.-Maj. Josh UA DUKE. F.Cap. 8vo, cloth, gilt. Rs. 2-4.
BANTING IN INDIA.—WITH SOME REMAIRKS ON DIET AND THINGS
in General. By Surg.-Maj. JosłIUA DUKE. Third Edition. Cloth. Re. 1-8.
OUTLINES OF MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE FOR INDIA.—BY J. D. B.
GRIBBLE, M.C. c. (Retired), and PATRICK HICH Ilk, M.D., F.R.C.S.E. Third
Edition, Revised, Enlarged, and Annotated. Demy 8vo. Rs. 5-8.
RUI) IMIENTS OF SANITATION.—FOR INDIAN SCHOOLS. BY PATRICK
HIEBIR, M.D. Second Edition. 12mo, cloth. Re. 1-4.
THE TEETH.--THEIR STRUCTURE, DISEASE, AND PRESERVATION,
With some Notes on Conservative and Prosthetic Dentistry. Nine Plates.
By Jos, MILLIER, L.D.S., R.C.S. E. Second Edition. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 2-8.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALGUTTA.
16 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
THE BABY. —NOTES ON THE FEEDING, REARING AND DISEASES OF
INFANTs. By S. O. MosIES, Licentiate of the l&oyal College of Physicians,
Edinburgh, &c. Feap. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 2.
MY LEPER FRIENDS.—AN ACCOUNT OF PERSONAL WORK AMONG
LEPErs, and their daily life in India. By Mrs. HAY 1 s. With Illustra-
tions from Photographs, and a Chapter on Leprosy by Dr. G. G. MAC-
LAREN. Imp. square 32mo, Rs. 2-8.
“The author pictures a very sad phase of human misery by relating the
story of the inner life of sufferers whom she has known.”—Cork Constitution.
“It is impossible to read Mrs. Hayes' book without feeling the keenest sym-
pathy with her in her brave and onerous work, and it cannot fail to result in
a considerable return for the advantage of the lepers. Mrs. Hayes writes
well and vividly, and there is a note of thorough sincerity in all she says that
lends an additional charm to the work. g g g There are several
illustrations in the book, reproduced from photographs of lepers.”—Home News.
“On the whole, Mrs. Hayes has written her book in a very sympathising
spirit.”—Indian Daily News.
HYGIENE OF WATER AND WATER SUPPLIES.—By PATRICK HEHIR,
M.D., Lecturer on Hygiene, Hyderabad Med. School. 8vo, cloth, flush, Rs. 2.
CHOLERA. EPIDEMIC IN KASHMIR, 1892.-BY A. MITRA, L.R.C.P.,
1.1:.c.s., Principal Medical Officer in Kashmir. With Map and Tables.
4to, sewed. Re. 1. -
A RECORD OF THREE YEARS' WORK OF THE NATIONAL ASSO-
CIATros for Supplying Female Medical Aid to the Women of India,
August 1885 to August 1888. By H. E. The Count Kss of DUFFICE IN.
Crown 8vo. Re. 1.
THE NATIONAL ASSOCIATION FOR SUPPLYING FEMALE IMEDI-
CAL AID to the Women of India. By H. E. Til It Cous Tiess of DUFFEE IN.
reprinted from the Asiatic Quarterly Review, by permission. As. 8. -
THE INDIAN NIEDICAL SERVICE.-A GUIDE FOR INTENDED CANDI-
DATES for Commissions and for the Junior' Officers of the Service. By
WILLIAM W H BB, M.B., Surgeon, Bengal Army, late Agency Surgeon at
the Court of Bikanir, Superintendent of Dispensaries, Jails, and Vaccina-
tion in the Bikanir State, and for some time Guardian to H. H. the Maha-
rajah. Crown 8vo, Rs. 4.
“We recommend the book to all who think of competing for admission into
the Indian Medical Service.”—Lancet.
THE CARLSBAD TREATMENT FOR TROPICAL AILMENTS, AND How
To CA R RY IT OUT IN INDIA. By Surgin.-Captain L. TA is Litton YouNG.
Ex. feap. 8vo. * . [In the Press.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Domestic Books. 17
PERSONAL AND DOMESTIC HYGIENE FOR THE SCHOOL AND HOME,
being a Text-book on Elementary Physiology, Hygiene, Home Nursing,
and First Aid to the Injured; for Senior Schools and Family Reference.
By Mrs. HA Rold HENDLICY. Medallist National Health Society, Eng-
land, 36 Illustrations. Ex. feap. 8vo. Rs. 2-8. .
“We are decidedly of opinion that it is the most practical, and useful
book of its kind which has been published in India, We trust it will gain
a large circulation in the Schools and homes of India.”—Indian Medical
Gazette.
“We can recommend this volume without hesitation. In the absence
of the doctor one might obtain hints from any page of it on Hygiene, Nursing,
Accidents and Emergencies. So far as we can see nothing is omitted, and every
direction is given in simple intelligible language.”—Statesman.
AGUE ; OR, INTERMITTENT FEVER.—By M. D. O'ConnEL, M.D.
8vo, sewed. Rs. 2.
THE LANDMARKS OF SNARE-POISON LITERATURE.-Being a
Review of the more important Researches into the Nature of Snake-Poisons.
By VINCENT RICHARDs, F.R.C.S. ED., &c., Civil Medical Officer of
Goalundo, Bengal. RS, 2-8.
MALARIA ; ITS CAUSE AND EFFECTS : MALARIA AND THE SPLEEN;
Injuries of the Spleen; An Analysis of 39 cases. By E. G. RUSSELL, M.B.,
B. s.c. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 8.
IMEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE FOR INDIA.—By J. B. LYON, F.C.S., F.C.
Brigade Surgeon, Professor of Medical Jurisprudence, Grant Medical
College, Bombay. The Legal Matter revised by J. D. INVERA RITY, Bar.-
at-law. Second Edition. Illustrated. 8vo. Its. 16.
INDIAN NIEDICAL GAZETTE.-Published Monthly. Subscription
Rs. 18 yearly.
T)OMESTIC BOOKS.
THE INDIAN COOKERY BOOK.—A PRACTICAL HANDBOOK TO THE
KITCHEN IN INDIA, adapted to the Three Presidencies. Containing Origins]
and Approved Recipes in every department of Indian Cookery; Recipes
for Summer Beverages and Home-made Liqueurs; Medicinal and other
Recipes; together with a variety of things worth knowing. By a Thirty-
five Years' Resident. Rs. 3.
FIRMINGER'S MANUAL OF GARDENING FOR INDIA.—A New Edi-
tion (the fourth) thoroughly Revised and Re-written. With many Illus-
trations. By H. ST. J. JACKSON, Imp. 16mo, cloth, gilt, Rs. 10.
POULTRY-KEEPING IN INDIA.—A SIMPLE AND PRACTICAL BOOK
on their care and treatment, their various breeds, and the means of
rendering them profitable. By Is A TWEED, author of “Cow-Keeping in
India.” With Illustrations. [In the Press.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
B
18 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
COW-KEEPING IN INDIA.—A SIMPLE AND PRACTICAL BOOK on their
care and treatment, their various breeds, and the means of rendering
them profitable. By ISA Twick D. With 37 Illustrations of the various
Breeds, &c. Crown 8vo, cloth, gilt. Rs. 4-8. -
“A most useful contribution to a very important subject, and we can
strongly recommend it.”—Madras Mail. -
“A valuable contribution to Agricultural Literature in the East.”—Ceylon
Observer. -
ENGLISH ETIQUETTE FOR INDIAN GENTLEMEN.—By W. TREGo
WRBB, Bengal Educational Department. Second Edition. Feap. 8vo,
cloth, Re. 1-4; paper, le. l.
The book comprises chapters on General Conduct, Calls, Dining-out, Levees,
Balls, Garden-parties, Railway-travelling, &c. It also contains a chapter on
Letter-writing, proper Modes of Address, &c., together with hints on how to
draw up Applications for Appointments, with Examples.
PERSONAL AND DOMIESTIC HYGIENE FOR THE SCHOOL AND HOME ;
being a Text-book on Elementary Physiology, Hygiene, Home Nursing,
and First Aid to the Injured ; for Senior Schools and Family Reference.
By Mrs. FIA Rold HitNDLity. Ex, fcap. 8vo. Rs. 2-8.
THE AMIATEUR, GARDENER IN THE HILLS.—With a few Hints on
Fowls, Pigeons, and Rabbits. By an Amateur. Second Edition, Revised
and Enlarged. [In the Press.
FLOWERS AND GARDENS IN INDIA.—A MANUAL FOR BEGINNERS.
By Mits. R. Tº MPLE-W R1GHT. Ite. 1.
- * * * * * “A most useful little book which we cannot too strongly recommend.
We can recommend it to our readers with the utmost confidence, as being not
only instructive, but extremely interesting, and written in a delightfully easy,
chatty strain.”—Civil and Military Gazette.
* Very practical throughout. There could not be better advice than this,
and the way it is given shows the enthusiasm of Mrs. Temple-Wright.”
— Pioneer.
“It is written in a light conversational style, and it imparts instruction
very clearly.”—The Englishman.
HINTS FOR THE MANAGEMENT AND MEDICAL TREATMENT OF
CHILD ſtic N IN INDIA. By EDWARD A. BIRCH, M.D., Surgeon-Major, Bengal
Establishment. Second Edition, Revised. Being the Ninth Edition of
“Goodeve's Hints for the Management of Children in India.”
QUERIES AT A MESS TABLE.-WHAT SHALL WE EAT2 ... WHAT SHALL
WE DRINK ? By Surg.-Maj. Jos HUA DUK it. Feap. 8vo, cloth, gilt, Rs. 2-4.
THE MEM-SAHIB'S BOOK OF CAKES, BISCUITS, ETC.—With Remarks
on Ovens, & Hindustani Vocabulary, Weights & Measures. [In the Press.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Guide Books. - 19
GUIDE BOOKS.
INCE'S KASHIMIR HANDBOOK.—A GUIDE FOR VISITORS. Re-Written
- and much Inlarged by Jos H U A DUKE, Surg.-Lt.-Col., Bengal Medical
Service, formerly Civil Surgeon, Gilgit and Srinagar. Feap. 8vo, cloth,
Maps in cloth case. With Appendix containing the Jhelum Valley Road.
Rs. 6-8.
The CHIEF CoNT1...NTs are:—An Account of the Province of Kashmir, its
Rivers, Lakes, Mountains, Wales, l'asses, Inhabitants—Srinagar—Arts and
Manufactures, Antiquities, etc.—Requisites for the Journey—Cost—Official
Notification to Travellers—Useful Hints—Routes, Gujrat and Pir Panjal—
Jhelum, Tangrot and Kotli Poonch—Rawal Pindi and Murree—The New
Road—Husan Abbal, Abbottabad, the Jhelum —The Kishengunga Valley—
Eastern Portion of Kashmir—Leh—Western Portion of Kashmir–Woolar
Lake—Gulmarg—Lolab Walley, Ladak–Pangkong Lake—Gilgit–Astor—
Skardu—The Tilaib Walley, &c., and the following --
MAPs:—(1) Jammu and Kashmir with adjoining countries, (2) Map showing
Routes to Skardu, etc. (3) Map showing Leh to Himis Monastery, Salt Lake
Valley, Pangkong Lake, Kamri Pass, Burail Pass. (4) Astor and Gilgit with
surrounding country. The Maps are finely eacecuted by the Survey of India Dept.
RAWAL. PINDI TO SRINAGAR.—A DETAILED ACCOUNT OF THE NEW
Jhelum Valley load; together with a Brief Note of five other Routes
leading into the Valley. Being an Appendix to Ince's Handbook to
Kashmir. Re. 1-8.
FROM SIMLA TO SHIPKI IN CHINESE THIBET.-An Itinerary of the
Roads and various minor lêoutes, with a few Hints to Travellers, and
Sketch Map. By Major W. F. Golºdon-For-Bits, Rifle Brigade. Feap.
8vo, cloth. Rs. 2.
ITINERARIRs—Simla to Shipki, ‘Charling’ Pass, ‘Sarahan to Narkunda’
Forest Road, Simla to the ‘Chor,’ Pooi to Dankar, Chini to Landour, and the
* Shalle.”
LIST OF ROUTES IN JAMMU AND KASHMIR.—A Tabulated descrip-
tion of over Eighty Routes shewing distance marches, natural character-
istics, altitudes, nature of supplies, transport, etc. By Major-General
MARQUIS DE Bou RBICL.
HANDBOOK FOR VISITORS TO AGRA AND ITS NEIGHBOURHOOD.
By H. G. K.K. 13 NE, C.S. Fifth IEdition, Revised. Maps, Plans, &c. Feap.
8vo, cloth. Rs. 2-8.
A. HANDBOOK FOR VISITORS TO DELHI AND ITS NEIGHBOUR-
HooD. By H. G. KERN is, C.s. Third Edition. Maps. Feap. 8vo, cloth.
Rs. 2-8.
A HANDBOOK TO ALLAHABAD, CAWNPORE, LUCKNOW AND
BitNARIts. By H. G. Kit IN H. Second Edition, l{evised.
[In preparation.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
20 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications,
HILLS BEYOND SIMLA. — THREE MONTHS TOUR FROM SIMLA,
through Bussahir, Kunowar, and Spiti to Lahoul. (“In the Footsteps of
the Few.”) By Mrs. J. C. MURRAY-AYNslity. Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 3.
THACKER'S GUIDE TO DARJEELING.—With two Maps. Feap. 8vo,
sewed. Rs. 2.
THE 4-ANNA RAILWAY GUIDE.-With Maps. Published Monthly.
As. 4.
THACKER'S GUIDE TO CALCUTTA.—WITH CHAPTERS ON ITS By.
PATHs, etc., and a chapter on the Government of India, and Maps of the
European Residence Portion and Official and Business Portion of the
City. Feap. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 3.
CALCUTTA TO LIVERPOOL, BY CHINA, JAPAN, AND AMERICA, IN
1877. By Lieut.-General Sir HENRY-Norm AN. Second Edition. Feap.
8vo, cloth. Rs. 2-8.
GUIDE TO MASURI, LANDAUR, DEHRA DUN, AND THE HILLS
NokTH OF DEHRA; including Routes to the Snows and other places of
note; with Chapter on Garhwa (Tehri), Hardwar, Rurki, and Chakrata,
By John North AM. Rs. 2-8.
THE SPORTSMAN'S MANUAL.—IN QUEST OF GAME IN KULLU
Lahoul, and Ladak to the Tso Morari Lake, with Notes on Shooting in
Spiti, Bara Bagahal, Chamba, and Kashmir, and a detailed description of
Sport in more than 100 Nalas. With nine Maps. By Lt.-Col. R. H.
Ty ACKE, late H. M.'s 98th & 84th Regts. Feap. 8vo, cloth, Rs. 8-8.
FROM THE CITY OF PALACES TO ULTIMA THULE.—With a Map
of Iceland, Icelandic Vocabulary, Money Tables, &c. By H. K. Goltoon.
Crown 8vo, sewed. Re, 1.
THACKER'S INDIAN DIRECTORIES AND MAPS,
MAP OF THE CIVIL DIVISIONS OF INDIA.—Including Governments,
Divisions and Districts, Political Agencies, and Native States; also the
Cities and Towns with 10,000 Inhabitants and upwards. Coloured.
20 in. x 36 in. Folded, Re. 1. On linen, Rs. 2.
CALCUTTA.—PLANS OF THE OFFICIAL AND BUSINESS PORTION, with
houses numbered, and Index of Government Offices and Houses of Business
on the Map. Plan of the Residence portion of Calcutta with houses num-
bered so that their position may easily be found, Two maps in pocket
case. The maps are on a large scale. As. 12,
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Natural History, Botany, etc. 21
1894.—THACKER'S INDIAN DIRECTORY..—Official, Legal, Educa-
tional, Professional, and Commercial Directories of the whole of India,
General Information; Holidays, &c.; Stamp Duties, Customs Tariff,
Tonnage Schedules; Post Offices in India, forming a Gazetteer ; List of
Governors-General and Administrators of India from beginning of British
Rule; Orders of the Star of India, Indian Empire, &c.; Warrant of Pre-
cedence, Table of Salutes, &c.; The Civil Service of India; An Army
List of the Three Presidencies; A Railway Directory; A Newspaper and
Periodical Directory; A Conveyance Directory; Tea, Indigo, Silk, and
Coffee Concerns; List of Clubs in India; Alphabetical List of Residents.
In thick Royal Octavo. With a Railway Map of India. A Map of the
Official and Business portion of Calcutta and a Map of the European Resi-
dence portion of Calcutta. Rs. 20.
A COMPLETE LIST OF INDIAN AND CEYLON TEA GARDENS, In-
digo Concerns, Silk Filatures, Sugar Factories, Cinchona Concerns, and
Coffee Estates. With their Capital, Directors, Proprietors, Agents
Managers, Assistants, &c., and their Factory Marks by which the Chests
may be identified in the Market. [1894. 1 Rs. 3.
THACKER'S MAP OF INDIA, WITH INSET PHYSICAL MAPs, SKETCH
PLANs of Calcutta, Bombay, and Madras. Edited by J. G. BARTHOLO-
Mitw. Corrected to present date. With Railways, Political Changes,
and an Index of 10,000 Names, being every place mentioned in “Hunter’s
Imperial Gazetteer.”
“An excellent map.”—Glasgow Herald.
“This is a really splendid map of India, produced with the greatest skill
and care.”—Army and Navy Gazette.
“For compactness and completeness of information few works surpassing or
approaching it have been seen in cartography.”—Scotsman.
NATURAL HISTORY, BOTANY, ETC.
THE FUTURE OF THE DATE PALM IN INDIA (PHOENIX DACTY-
LIPTIC RA). By E. Bon AVIA, M.D., Brigade-Surgeon, Indian Medical
Department. Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 2-8.
GAME, SHORE, AND WATER, BIRDS OF INDIA.—BY COL. A. LE
MEssu R11 R, R. E. A vade mecum for Sportsmen. With 12l Illustrations.
8vo. Rs. 10.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
22 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
HANDBOOK TO THE FERNS OF INDIA, CEYLON, AND THE MALAY
PENINsu L.A. By Colonel 13. H. BitDDOM it, author of the “Ferns of
British India.” With 300 Illustrations by the author. Imp. 16mo. Rs. 10.
“A most valuable work of reference.”—Garden. -
“It is the first special book of portable size and moderate price which has
been devoted to Indian Ferns, and is in every way deserving.”—Nature.
SUPPLEMENT TO THE FERNS OF BRITISH INDIA, CEYLON AND THE
MALAY PEN INSULA, containing Ferns which have been discovered since
the publication of the “Handbook to the Ferns of British India,” &c.
By Col. R. H. BEDDOME, F.L.s. Crown 8vo, sewed. Rs. 2-12.
GOLD, COPPER, AND LEAD IN CHOTA-NAGPORE.—COMPILED BY
W. KING, D.Sc., Director of the Geological Survey of India, and T. A.
Popiſ, Deputy Superintendent, Survey of India. With Map showing the
Geological Formation and the Areas taken up by the various Prospecting
and Mining Companies. Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 5.
ON INDIGO MANUFACTURE.-A PRACTICAL AND THEORETICAL GUIDE
to the Production of the Dye. With numerous Illustrative Experiments.
By J. BRIDG Es LEE, M.A., F.G.S. Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 4.
“The book is thoroughly practical, and is as free from technicalities as such
a work can well be, and it gives as much information as could well be imparted
in so small a compass.”—Indian Daily News. f
“Instructive and useful alike to planter and proprietor . . . A very
clear and undoubtedly valuable treatise for the use of practical planters, and
one which every planter would do well to have always at hand during his
manufacturing season. For the rest, a planter has only to open the book for
it to commend itself to him.”—Pioneer.
MANUAL OF AGRICULTURE FOR INDIA.—By LIEUT. FREDERICK
Pogson. Illustrated. Crown 8vo, cloth, gilt, Rs. 5.
THE CULTURE AND MANUFACTURE OF INDIGO.—With a De-
scription of a Planter's Life and Resources. By WALT1: R MACLAGAN
REID. Crown 8vo. With 19 Full-page Illustrations. Rs. 5.
“It is proposed in the following Sketches of Indigo Life in Tirhoot and
Lower Bengal to give those who have never witnessed the manufacture of
Indigo, or seen an Indigo Factory in this country, an idea of how the finished
marketable article is produced: together with other phases and incidents of an
Indigo Planter's life, such as may be interesting and amusing to friends at
home.”—Introduction.
ROXBURGH’S FLORA. INDICA; OR, DESCRIPTION OF INDIAN PLANTs.
Reprinted littératim from Cary's Edition. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 5.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Engineering, Surveying, etc. 23
A NATURAL HISTORY OF THE MAMMALIA OF INDIA, BURMAH
AND CEYLoN. By R. A. ST1CitN DALU, F.R.G.S., F. Z.S., &c., author of
“Seonee,” “The Denizens of the jungle.” With 170 Illustrations by
the author and others, Imp. 16mo. R8. 0.
“The very model of whatea popular natural history should be.”—Knowledge.
“The book will, no doubt, be specially useful to the sportsman, and, indeed,
has been extended so as to include all territories likely to be reached by the
sportsman from India.”—The Times.
A TEA PLANTER'S LIFE IN ASSAMI.-BY GEORGE M. BARRER.
“With 75 Illustrations by the author. Crown 8vo. Rs. 6-8.
“Mr. Barker has supplied us with a very good and readable description
accompanied by numerous illustrations drawn by himself. What may be called
the business parts of the book are of most value.”—Contemporary Review,
“Cheery, well-written little book.”—Graphic. -
“A very interesting and amusing book, artistically illustrated from sketches
drawn by the author.”—Mark Lane Eapress.
A TEXT-BOOK OF INDIAN BOTANY: MoRPHOLOGICAL, PHYSIOLOGI-
CAI, and SYSTEMATIC. By W. H. G RItGG, B.M.S., Lecturer on Botany at
the Hugli Government College. Profusely Illustrated. Crown 8vo. Rs. 5.
THE INLAND EMIGRATION ACT, As AMENDED BY ACT VII OF 1893,
The Health Act; Sanitation of Emigrants; The Artificer's Act; Land
Rules of Assam, etc. Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 2.
ENGINEERING, SURVEYING, ETC,
STATISTICS OF HYDRAULIC WORKS, AND HYDROLOGY OF ENG-
LAND, CANADA, EGYPT, AND INDIA. Collected and reduced by Low Is
D’A. JACKSON, C.1. Boyal 8vo. Rs. 10.
PERMANENT WAY POCKET-BOOK.—CONTAINING COMPLETE FOR-
MULE for Laying Points, Crossings, Cross-over Roads, Through Roads,
Diversions, Curves, etc., suitable for any Gauge. With Illustrations. By
T. W. Jonits. Pocket-Book Form, cloth. Rs. 3,
A HANDBOOK OF PRACTICAL SURVEYING FOR, INDIA.—Illus-
trated with Plans, Diagrams, etc. Fourth Edition, Revised. By F. W.
KILLY, late of the Indian Survey. With 24 Plates. 8vo. Rs. 8,
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
24 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
IRRIGATED INDIA.—AN AUSTRALIAN VIEW OF INDIA AND CEYLON,
their Irrigation and Agriculture. By the Hon. ALF RED DIEAKIN, M.L.A.,
formerly Chief Secretary and Minister of Water-Supply of Victoria,
Australia. With a Map. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 7-8.
CoNTRNTS :—Introduction—India and Australia—The British in India—The
Native Population—Physical and Political Divisions—Ceylon–Madras–Lower
Bengal—Bombay—The Independent States—The North-West Provinces and
the Punjab–The Agriculture of India—Indian Wheat and Australian Trade
—Irrigation Generally—The Kaveri Scheme—Ekruk and Khadah wasla—
Powai, Vehar and Tansa—The Ganges Canal System—The Bari Doab Canal
—The Sirhind Canal—Indian Irrigation. .
APPENDICRs:—Irrigation in Ceylon – Irrigation in Madras—Madras Com-
pany's Canal—Irrigation in Bombay—Irrigation in Lower Bengal—Irrigation
in the North-West Provinces—Irrigation in the Punjab.
“I think that I may again with profit refer to Mr. Deakin's Book on Irrigat-
ed India, the perusal of which I am glad to have this opportunity of recommend-
ing to the attention of those who are interested in the welfare of this country.”
—C. W. Odling, M.E., in a Lecture on Irrigation Canals, delivered at Sibpur.
“He approaches Indian problems with an Australian freshness of view and
frankness of comment that are often singularly suggestive.”—Times.
“Contains a masterly account of the great gift of the English to India—
the irrigation works.”—Manchester Guardian.
, “It is the work of an observer of no ordinary capacity and fitness for the
work of observing and describing.”—Scotsman. -
AN EXPLANATION OF QUADRUPLEX, TELEGRAPHY. – With 12
Diagrams. By BEN. J. Stow, Telegraph Master. Feap. 4to. Rs. 2.
AN EXPLANATION ON DUPLEX, QUADRUPLEX, OPEN AND TRANS-
LATION Worrº ING AND OTH It R CIRCUITs.-Testing of Currents, Batteries,
Instruments, Earths, and Line, with the Tangent Galvanometer. With
12 Plates. By E. H. NELTH RoPP, Telegraph Master. Crown 8vo,
sewed. Rs. 2.
MANUAL OF SURVEYING FOR INDIA.—DETAILING THE MODE OF
operations on the Trigonometrical, Topographical, and Revenue Surveys
of India. By Col. H. L. THUILLIER and Lieut.-Col. H. SMYTH. Third
Edition, Revised and Enlarged. Royal 8vo, cloth. Rs. 12.
COLEBROOKE'S TRANSLATION OF THE LILAVATI.—With Notes.
By HARAN CHANDRA BANE1 JI, M.A., B.L. 8vo, cloth, Rs. 4. -
This edition includes the Text in Sanskrit. The Lilavati is a standard
work on Hindu mathematics written by Bhāskaráchárya, a celebrated mathe-
matician of the twelfth century.
RAILWAY CURWES.—Practical Hints on Setting out Curves, with a
Table of Taugents for a 1° Curve for all angles from 2° to 135° increasing
by minutes: and other useful Tables. With a Working Plan and Section
of Two miles of Railway. By A. G. WATSON, Assistant Engineer,
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Military Works. 25
A HANDBOOK OF PHOTOGRAPHY.—WRITTEN ESPECIALLY FOR
INDIA. By GEORGE Ewing, Honorary Treasurer of the Photographic
Society of India. [In the Press.
THE PHOTOGRAPHER'S POCKET-BOOK.—A Compilation of all In-
formation regarding Photography in a small handy form. [In the Press.
THE JOURNAL OF THE PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY.—Published
Monthly. With Illustrations. Subscription Rs. 5 yearly.
MILITARY WORKS.
THE RECONNOITRER'S GUIDE AND FIELD BOOK.—ADAPTED FOR
INDIA. By Major M. J. KING-HARMAN, B.S.C. Second I`dition, Re-
vised and Enlarged. In roam. Rs. 4.
It contains all that is required for the guidance of the Military Recon-
noitrer in India: it can be used as an ordinary Pocket Note Book, or as a
Field Message Book ; the pages are ruled as a Field Book, and in sections, for
written description or sketch.
The book has been highly approved by Lord Roberts, who regards it as a
most valuable and practical composition.
“To Officers serving in India the Guide will be invaluable.”—Broad Arrow.
“It appears to contain all that is absolutely required by the Military
Reconnoitrer in India, and will thus dispense with many bulky works. In fact
it contains just what is wanted and nothing not likely to be wanted.”—Naval
and Military Gazette.
“It has been found invaluable to many a Staff Officer and Commandant of
a Regiment, as well as of the greatest possible assistance to officers studying
for the Garrison Course Examination. The book will go into the breast-pocket
of a regulation khaki jacket, and can therefore always fulfil the office of a vade
mecum.”—Madras Mail.
INDIAN MOUNTED VOLUNTEERS’ GUIDE TO EQUITATION AND THE
TRAINING OF HorsFS. Compiled from Regulations. By Troop Sergeant
Major J. P. BURRE, Re. 1.
THE QUARTERMASTER'S ALMANAC.—A DIARY OF THE DUTIES,
with other information. By Lieut. HARRINGTON BUSH, 8vo, Re. 1-8,
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
26 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
LETTERS ON TACTICS AND ORGANIZATION.—BY CAPT. F. N.
MAUDR, R.R. (Papers reprinted from the Pioneer and Civil and Mili-
tary Gazette.) Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 5.
“The author displays considerable knowledge of the subjects with which he
deals, and has evidentlv thought much on them. His views are broad and
5 - g
advanced.”—“Every soldier should read this book.”—Athenaeum. -
“On the whole, Captain Maude may be most warmly congratulated upon
the production of a book, of which, disagreeing as we do with some of his
conclusions, we are glad to speak, as it deserves, in terms of the most un-
stinted and ungrudging praise.”—-Whitehall Review.
THE TRAINING AND MANAGEMENT OF CHARGERS.—BY G. W.
KING, Lieut., Ghazipur Light Horse. Cloth. Re. 1-8.
THE INVASION AND DEFENCE OF ENGLAND.—BY CAPT. F. N.
MAUD R. R. E. Crown 8vo, cloth. Ite. 1-8.
“This little book only deals with the case of possible invasion by France,
but it is one of the best we have read on the subject, and will well repay per-
usal.”—Allen's Indian Mail. f
“His little book is a useful and interesting contribution to the invasion of
England question; it contains a good deal of information, and, without being
written in an alarmist style, exposes very clearly the danger in which England
stands.”—Englishman.
“The lay reader will welcome as an able, thoughtful, and original contribu-
tion to a topic of unsurpassable importance.”—Home News.
“The book is ably written, and is full of suggestive matter of the highest
importance to the security of the country.”—Glasgow Herald.
NOTES FOR OFFICERS QUALIFYING FOR THE TRANSPORT DEPART-
MENT in India. By Lieut. P. R. MocRLER. 32mo, cloth. Re. 1.
THE SEPOY OFFICER'S MANUAL.—BY CAPT. E. G. BARRow. Third
Edition, Revised. [In preparation.
“It seems to contain almost everything required in one of the modern type
of Civilian Soldiers . . . . In the most interesting part of the book is
an account of the composition of the Bengal Army with descriptive note on the
Brahmans, Rajputs, Sikhs, Goorkhas, Pathans and other races.”—Englishman.
“A vast amount of technical and historical data of which no Anglo-Indian
Officer should be ignorant.”—Broad Arrow.
“The notes are brief and well digested, and contain all that it is necessary
for a candidate to know.”—Army and Navy Gazette.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
* * Hindustani, Persian, etc. 27
MUSEETRY MADE EASY FOR NATIVE OFFICERS AND NON-COMMIS-
sIon ED OFFICIERs, Native Army. By Lieut. R. E. S. TAYLOR, Adjutant,
28th Bengal Infantry. Arranged in Questions and Answers. English
and Urdu. As. 8.
THE INDIAN ARTICLES OF WAR.—ANNOTATED. By CAPT. H. S.
HUDSON, late 27th Madras Infantry. Second Edition. Revised by an
Officer of the Indian Staff Corps. Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 4.
“Likely to be useful to Examiners.”—Army and Navy Gazette.
“Complete, intelligible, and attractive.”—Englishman.
“Extremely useful to those who have to deal with cases rising under the
Indian Articles of War.”—Broad A77'ow.
THE INDIAN NIESSAGE BOOK.—INTERLEAVED FOR KEEPING COPIES.
With 12 Authorised Pattern Envelopes. Each Re. 1-4.
NOTES ON THE COURSE OF GARRISON INSTRUCTION, TACTICS,
Topography, Fortifications, condensed from the Text-Books, with expla-
nations and additional matter. With Diagrams. By Major E. LLoyd,
Garrison Instructor. Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 2-8.
LECTURES DELIVERED TO TRANSPORT CLASSES.—A complete
Epitome of Transport Duties and Veterinary for use in Classes and for
Ready Reference in the Field. By a Deputy Assistant Commissary-
General. [In the Press.
LEE-NIETFORD MUSEETRY REGULATIONS. — ALTERATIONS AND
ADDITIONs to the 1892 Regulations, in accordance with Army Order 238,
December 1892. Printed only on one side of the paper. As. 6.
HINDUSTANI, PERSIAN, ETC.
GLOSSARY OF MEDICAL AND MEDICO-LEGAL TERMS, including
those most frequently met with in the Law Courts. By R. F. HuTCHI-
son, M.D., Surgeon-Major. Second Edition. Feap. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 2.
HIDAYAT AL HUKUMA.—A GUIDE TO MEDICAL OFFICERS AND SUB-
on DINATIts of the Indian Service. English and Hindustani. By GEo. S.
RANKING, M.D., Surgeon-Major. 18mo, Sewed. Re. 1-4.
TEIACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
28 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
THE DIVAN-I-HAFIZ.—THE DIVAN WRITTEN IN THE FOURTEENTH
CENTRY by Khwaja-Shame-ud-din Mohammad-i-Hafiz-i-Shirazi, trans-
lated for the first time out of the Persian into English Prose, with Criti-
cal and Explanatory remarks, with an Introductory Preface, a Note on
Sufi'ism, and Life of the author. By Lieut.-Col. H. WILBERForce
CLARKE, author of “The Persian Manual,” translator of “The Bustan-
i-Sa’di,” “The Sekandar Namah-i-Nizami,” etc. 2 vols. 4to. Rs. 25.
THE 'AWARIFU-L-MA’ARIF.—WRITTEN IN THE THIRTEENTH CEN-
TURY by Shaikh Shahab-ud-din-'Umar bin Muhammad-i-Sahrwardi;
translated (out of the Arabic into Persian) by Mamud bin 'Ali al Kas-
hani, Companion in Sufi'ism to the Divan-i-Khwaja Hafiz; translated for
the first time (out of the Persian into English) by Lieut.-Col. H. WILBER-
Force. CLARIKE. 4to. Rs. 13.
HISTORY OF THE SIKHS : OR, TRANSLATION OF THE SIKKHAN DE
RAI DI WIKHIA, as laid down for the Examination in Panjabi, &c., to-
gether with a short Gurmukhi Grammar. By Lt.-Col. MAJOR HENRY
Court. Royal 8vo, cloth. Rs. 8.
THE RUSSIAN CONVERSATION GRAMMAR.—BY ALEX, KINLOCH,
late Interpreter to H. B. M. Consulate and British Consul in the Rus-
sian Law Courts; Instructor for Official Examinations. Crown 8vo,
cloth. Rs. 6-8.
This work is constructed on the excellent system of Otto in his “German
Conversation Grammar,” with illustrations accompanying every rule, in the
form of usual phrases and idioms, thus leading the student by easy but rapid
gradations to a colloquial attainment of the language.
TRANSLATIONS INTO PERSIAN.—SELECTIONS FROM Murray's History
of India, Foliorum Centuria—Gibbon’s Roman Empire—Our Faithful Ally
the Nizam. By Major A. C. TALBOT, Part I, English. Part II, Per
sian. 2 vols. 8vo. Rs. 10.
UTTARA RAMA CHARITA.--A SANSKRIT DRAMA. By BHAVABHUTI.
Translated into English Prose by C. H. TAWN EY, M.A. Second Edition.
Adapted to Pundit I. C. VIDYASAGARA's Edition of the Text.
AN ANGLO-INDIAN MEDICAL MANUAL AND WOCABULARY. —By
Rev. G. SMALL, M.A.
The object of , which is to furnish to medical practitioners, male and
female, as well as the general public, a help in the practice of medicine
in India. The author has received the valuable co-operation of Surgeon-
General R. S. Francis, late Medical College, Calcutta.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Hindustan?, Persian, etc. 29
A GUIDE TO HINDUSTANI (TALIM-I-ZABAN-I-URDU). Specially de-
signed for the use of students and men serving in India. By Surgeon-
Major GEO. S. RANKING, Offg. Secretary to the Board of Examiners,
Fort William. Second Edition. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 6.
Printed throughout in Persian character. With fac-simile MS. Exercises,
Petitions, &c. -
“The work on the whole, we believe, will meet a want. . . . . . It
contains an excellent list of technical military terms and idioms, and will
prove especially serviceable to any one who has to act as an interpreter at
courts-martial and cognate enquiries.”—Civil and Military Gazette.
“There can be no question as to the practical utility of the book.”—Pioneer.
“Surgeon-Major Ranking has undoubtedly rendered good service to the many
military men for whom knowledge of Hindustani is essential.”—Athenaeum.
“Has the merit of conciseness and portability, and the selections at the end,
of the historical and colloquial style, are well chosen.”—Saturday Review.
“A well-conceived book, and has much useful matter in it. The sentences
are very good, practical and idiomatic.”—Romeward Mail.
“Supplies a want long felt, by none more than by young Medical Officers
of the Army of India. We think the work admirably adapted for its pur-
pose.”—British Medical Journal. -
MALAVIRAGNIMITRA.--A SANSKRIT PLAY BY KALIDASA. Literally
translated into English Prose by C. H. TAwNEY, M.A., Principal, Presi.
dency College, Calcutta. Second Edition. Crown 8vo. Re. 1-8.
TWO CENTURIES OF BHARTRIHARI.-TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH
VERs1: by C. H. TAWNEY, M.A. FCap. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 2.
HINDUSTANIAS IT OUGHT TO BE SPOKEN.—By J. TwPEDIE, Bengal
Civil Service. Second Edition, Crown 8vo, pp. xvi, 350, cloth. Rs. 4.8.
SUPPLEMENT containing Key to the Exercises and Translation of the
Reader with Notes. Rs. 2.
The work has been thoroughly Revised and partly Re-Written, and much
additional matter added. The VoCABULA RIRs have been improved, and all
words used in the book have been embodied in the GLoss Air Ilºs, ENGLISH-
HINDUSTANI—HINDUSTANI-ENGLISH. A READER is also given, and a GENE-
1:AL INDEx to the whole book.
“The Young Civilian or Officer, reading for his Examination, could not do
better than master this Revised Edition from cover to cover.”—I. Daily News.
“The book is divided into twelve easy lessons, and there is nothing to pre-
vent the most khansamah-worried mem-Saheb from mastering one of these a
day. At the end of a fortnight she will have acquired a small useful vocabu-
lary, and should be quite certain how to use the words she knows.”—
Englishman. -
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
30 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
BOOK-REEPING AND OFFICE MANUALS.
A GUIDE TO BOOK-KEEPING.—BY SINGLE, MIXED AND DOUBLE
ENTRI Its. Commercial Accounts of the most infricate nature fully illus-
trated by Examples and Annotations; Answers to Examination Questions
Book-Keeping, for Promotion to Assistant Examiner (1st grade) and
to Accountant (2nd grade), from 1880 to 1891. By S. G1colºgic, late Chief
Accountant, P. W. D., Bengal. Demy 8vo, cloth. Rs. 2-8.
PHONOGRAPHY IN BENGALI.-BY Dw1.JENDRA NATH SHINGHAw,
Professor of Phonography in Calcutta. Being a Handbook for the study
of Shorthand on the principle of Pitman's System. 12mo, As. 8. With
a Key. 12mo. As. 4 extra,
THE INDIAN SERVICE MANUAL ; OR, GUIDE TO THE SEVERAL
DEPARTMENTs of the Government of India, containing the Rules for
Admission, Notes on the working of each Department, &c. By C. R.
HARDLuss, author of “The Clerk's Manual.”
THE GOVERNMENT OFFICE MANUAL.—A GUIDE TO THE DUTIES,
Privileges and Responsibilities of the Government Service in all Grades.
By CHARLEs HARDL1.SS. Crown 8vo. Rs. 2.
SPENS THE INDIAN READY RECKONE.R.—CONTAINING TABLES for
ascertaining the value of any number of articles, &c., from three pies to
five rupees; also Tables of Wages from four annas to twenty-five rupees.
By Captain A. T. SPENs. Re. 1-8.
THE INDIAN LETTER-WRITER.—CoNTAINING AN INTRODUCTION on
Letter Writing, with numerous Examples in the various styles of Corre-
spondence. By H. ANDRItson. Crown 8vo, cloth. Re. 1.
THE CLERK'S MANUAL.—A COMPLETE GUIDE TO GENERAL OFFICE
RouTINE (Government and Business). By CHARLEs R. HARDLESS.
Second Edition, Revised. 12mo, boards. Rs. 2.
INDIAN WAGES TABLES.–CALCULATED FOR MONTEIS OF 28 TO 31
working days at rates from 2 to 18 rupees per month, giving the calcula-
tion at Sight for 1 to 1,000 days from 2 to 8% rupees per month and to
20,000 days by one addition: and for 1 to 300 days from 9 to 18 rupees
per month. Also 3 Tables of Sirdaree for those who require them. By
G. G. PLAY FAIR, Secretary of the Lebong Tea Co., Ld., and formerly
one of the Brahmaputra Tea Co., Ld. | In the Press,
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Educational Books. 31
EDUCATIONAL BOOKS.
HINTS ON THE STUDY OF ENGLISH.—By F. J. Row E, M.A., and
W. T. WIBB, M.A., Professors of English Literature, Presidency College,
Calcutta. New Edition. With an additional chapter on the Structure
and Analysis of Sentences, and Exercises on the correction of mistakes
commonly made by Students. Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 2-8.
AN ELEMENTARY ENGLISH GRAMMAR FOR SCHOOLS IN INDIA.—
Containing numerous Exercises in Idiom. By F. J. Rowe, M.A., and
W. T. WEBB, M.A., authors of “Hints on the Study of English.” Feap.
8vo, cloth. Re. 1.
A COMPANION READER TO “HINTS ON THE STUDY OF ENGLISH.”
(Eighteenth Thousand.) Demy 8vo. Re. 1-4.
A KEY TO THE COMIPANION READER TO “HINTS ON THE STUDY OF
ENGLIS it.” With an Appendix, containing Test Examination Questions.
By F. J. lxow tº, M.A. Feap. 8vo. Rs. 2.
‘ENTRANCE TEST EXAMINATION QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS in
English, being the Questions appended to “Hints on the Study of Eng-
lish,” with their Answers, together with Fifty Supplementary Questions
and Answers. By W. T. Wit BB, M.A. 12mo, Sewed. Re. 1.
PRINCIPAL EVENTS IN INDIAN AND BRITISH HISTORY..—With
their Dates in Suggestive Sentences. In Two Parts. By Miss ADAMs,
La Martiniére College for Girls, Calcutta. Second Edition. Demy 8vo,
boards. Ite, l.
ELEMENTARY STATICS AND DYNAMICS.—By W. N. BouTFLOWER,
B.A., late Scholar of St. John's College, Cambridge, and Professor of
Mathematics, Muir Central College, Allahabad. Second Edition. Crown
8vo. Rs. 8-8.
THE STUDENT'S HANDBOOK TO HAMILTON AND MILL.-BY W.
BELL, M.A., Professor of Philosophy and Logic, Government College,
}.ahore. 8vo, boards. Rs. 2.
ELEMENTARY HYDROSTATICS.—WITH NUMEROUS EXAMPLES AND
UNIvić1:sity PAPiers. By S. B. MUKU. RJ tº it, M.A., B.L., Assistant Pro-
fessor, Government College, Lahore. 12mo, cloth. Re. 1-8.
THACK ER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
32 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
ENGLISH SELECTIONS APPOINTED BY THE SYNDICATE OF THE CAL-
CUTTA UNIVERSITY for the Entrance Examination. Crown 8vo, cloth.
Re. 1-8.
WEBB'S KEY TO THE ENTRANCE COURSE.-1894 and 1895. Each Rs. 2. '
THE LAWS OF WEALTH.—A PRIMER ON POLITICAL ECONOMY FOR
THE MIDDLU. CLASSES IN INDIA. By Horach. BitLL, C. E. Seventh
Thousand. Foap. 8vo. As. 8.
THE INDIAN LETTER-WRITER.—CONTAINING AN INTRODUCTION ON
LRTTitr WRITING, with numerous Examples in the various styles of Cor-
respondence. By H. ANDERSON. Crown 8vo, cloth. Re. 1.
A CATECHISMI ON THE RUDIMIENTS OF MIUSIC. —SIMPLIFIED FOR.
BEGINNERs. By I. LITTLEPAGE. 12mo, sewed. Re. 1.
CALCUTTA. UNIVERSITY CALENDAR FOR THE YEAR, 1893.—Coll-
taining Acts, Bye-Laws, Regulations, The University Rules for Examina-
tion, Text-Book Endowments, Affiliated Institutions, List of Graduates
and Under-Graduates, Examination Papers, 1892. Cloth. Rs. 5.
CALRNDAR for previous years. Each Rs. 5.
CALCUTTA UNIVERSITY CALENDAR.—THE ExAMINATION PAPERS,
1890 and 1891. Cloth. Each Re. 1-8.
FIFTY GRADUATED PAPERS IN ARITHMETIC, ALGEBRA, AND GEO-
MITRY for the use of Students preparing for the Entrance Examinations
of the Indian Universities. With Hints on Methods of Shortening Work
and on the Writing of IExamination Papers. By W. H. Wood, B.A.,
F.C.s., Principal, La Martiniére College. Re. 1-8.
THE PRINCIPLES OF HEAT.—FOR THE F. A. EXAMINATION Of the
Calcutta University. By LEON ARD HALL, M. A. Crown 8vo. As. 8.
ANALYSIS OF REID's ENQUIRY INTO THE HUMAN MIND.—With
Copious Notes. By W. C. FINK. Second Edition. Re. 1-12,
THE ENGLISH PEOPLE AND THEIR LANGUAGE.-Translated from
the German of Loth by C. H. TAwNFY, M.A., Professor in the Presi-
dency College, Calcutta. Stitched. As. 8.
TALES FROM INDIAN HISTORY..—BEING THE ANNALS OF INDIA
retold in Narratives. By J. TALBoys WHEELER. Crown 8vo, cloth,
School Edition. Re. 1-8.
A NOTE ON THE DEVANAGARI ALPHABET FOR BENGALISTUDENTS,
By GURU DAS BANERJEE, M.A., D.L. Crown 8vo. As. 4.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Land Temures and Land Revenue. 33
THE GOVERNMENT OF INDIA.—A PRIMER FOR INDIAN SCHOOLS.
By Holt Ack BELL, C. E. Third Edition. Feap. 8vo, sewed, As. 8; in
cloth, le. 1.
Translated into Bengali. By J. N. BHATTAchArj RE, 8vo. As. 12.
AN INQUIRY INTO THE HUMAN MIND ON THE PRINCIPLES OF
CoMMON SENSE. By THOMAS R1 ID, D.D. 8vo, cloth. Re. 1-4.
A TEXT-BOOK OF INDIAN BOTANY: MoRPHOLOGICAL, PHYSIOLOGI-
CAL, and SYSTEMATIC. By W. H. G1th GG, B.M.s., Lecturer on Botany at
Hugli Government College. Profusely Illustrated. Crown 8vo. Rs. 5.
A MORAL READING BOOK FROM ENGLISH AND ORIENTAL SOURCES.
|By RoP1. It Littii Bit IDGE, C.I.E., M.A. Crown 8vo, cloth. As. 14.
A PRIMER CATECHISM OF SANITATION FOR INDIAN SCHOOLS.–
Founded on Dr. Cunningham’s Sanitary Primer. By L. A. STAPLEY.
Second IEdition. As. 4.
NOTES ON MILL’S EXAMINATION OF HAMILTON'S PHILOSOPHY,
Bv Thom(As Edwards. F. it.I.s. Feap., Sewed. Re. 1.
9 }
A SHORT HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE.-BY THOMAS
Edwa Rios, F.R.I.s. 18mo. Re. 1-4.
LAMIB’S TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE.—AN EDITION IN GOOD TYPE
Cloth. A s. 12.
LAND TENURES AND LAND REVENUE.
AZIZUDDIN AHMED.—THE N.-W. PROVINCES LAND REVENUE
ACT. Being Act XIX of 1873 as amended by Acts I and VIII of 1879, XII
of 1881, XIII and XIV of 1882, XX of 1890, and XII of 1891. With Notes,
Government Orders, Board Circulars and Decisions, and Rulings of the
Allahabad High Court. By AZIZUDDIN AHMICD, Deputy Collector and
Magistrate. Demy 8vo, cloth. Rs. 8.
RAMPINI AND FINUCANE.—THE BENGAL TENANCY ACT.-Be-
ing Act VIII of 1885. With Notes and Annotations, Judicial Rulings and
the löules framed by the Local Government and the High Court under
the Act, for the guidance of Revenue Officers and the Civil Courts. By R.
F. RAMPINI, M.A., C.s., Barrister-at-Law, and M. FINUCANE, M.A., C.s.
Second Edition. Rs. 7.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
C
34 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
BEVERLEY.—THE LAND ACQUISITION ACTS (ACTS X of 1870 AND
XVIII of 1885). With Introduction and Notes. The whole forming a
complete Manual of Law and Practice on the subject of Compensation for
Lands taken for Public Purposes. Applicable to all India. By H.
BEvict:LEY, M.A., B, C.S. Second Ldition. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 6.
FORSYTH.—REVENUE SALE-LAW OF LOWER BENGAL, comprising
Act XI of 1859; Bengal Act VII of 1868; Bengal Act VII of 1880
(Public Demands Recovery Act), and the unrepealed Regulations and the
Rules of the Board of Revenue on the subject. With Notes. Edited by
WM. E. H. Forsyth. Demy 8vo, cloth. Rs. 5.
PHILLIPS.–MANUAL OF REVENUE AND COLLECTORATE LAW.
With Important Rulings and Annotations. By H. A. D. PullLIPs,
Bengal Civil Service. Crown 8vo, cloth. [1884] Rs. 10.
CONTENTs:—Alluvion and Diluvion, Certificate, Cesses, Road and Public
Works, Collectors, Assistant Collectors, Drainage, Embankment, Evidence,
JExcise, Lakhiraj Grants and Service Tenures, and Land Acquisition, Land
Registration, Legal Practitioners, License Tax, Limitation, Opium, Parti-
tion, Public Demands Recovery, Putni Sales, Registratiºn, lèevenue Sales,
Salt, Settlement, Stamps, Survey and Wards. *
REYNOLDS.–THE NORTH-WESTERN PROVINCES RENT ACT.—
With Notes, &c. By H. W. l{EYNOLDs, C.S. Deny 8vo. [1886] Rs. 7.
FIELD,-LANDHOLDING, AND THE RELATION OF LANDLORD AND
TirNANT in various countries of the world. By C. D. TIELD, M.A., LL.D.
Second Edition. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 16.
N.B.—This edition contains “The Bengal Tenancy Act, 1885,” with Notes
and Observations ; and an Indez to the whole of the Law of Landlord and
Tenant in Bengal.
“We may take it that, as regards Indian laws and customs, Mr. Field
shows himself to be at once an able and skilled authority. In order, however,
to render his work more complete, he has compiled, chiefly from Blue-books
and similar public sources, a mass of info:mation having reference to the
land-laws of most European countries, of the United States of America, and
our Australasian colonies.”—Field.
GRIMLEY. —MANUAL OF THE REVENUE SALE LAW AND CERTIFI-
CATIC PitockDURIt of Lower Bengal, including the Acts on the Subject and
Selections from the Rules and Circular Orders of the Board of Revenue.
With Notes. By W. H. GRIMLEY, B.A., c.s. 8vo. Rs. 5-8; inter-
leaved, Rs. 6.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Land Tenures and Land Revenue. 35
PHILLIPS.—THE LAW RELATING TO THE LAND TENUR.ES OF
Low ER BitNG AL. (Tagore Law Lectures, 1875.) By ARTHUR PHILLIPs.
Itoyal 8vo, cloth. Rs. 10. -
REGULATIONS OF THE BENGAL CODE.-A SELECTION intended
chiefly for the use of Candidates for appointments in the Judicial and
Revenue Departments. Royal 8vo, stitched. lts. 4.
PHILLIPS.—OUR, ADIMINISTRATION OF INDIA.—BEING A COMPLETE
Account of the Revenue and Collectorate Administration in all depart-
ments, with special reference to the work and duties of a District Officer
in Bengal. By H. A. D. P.IIILLIPs. Its. 5. *
“In eleven chapters Mr. Phillips gives a complete epitome of the civil,
in distinction from the criminal, duties of an Indian Collector.”—London
Quarterly Review.
WHISH.—A DISTRICT OFFICE IN NORTHERN INDIA.—With Some
suggestions on Administration. . By C. W. WHISII, B.C.S. Demy 8vo,
cloth. Its. 4.
“Mr. Whish has produced an extremely useful and thoughtful book, which
will pave the way for the junior members of his service. It is above all
things practical, and sets forth the whole scheme of district duties in a clear
and systematic manner.”—Englishman.
FIELD.—INTRODUCTION TO THE REGULATIONS OF THE BENGAL
Cod E. By C. D. FIELD, M.A., LL.D. Crown 8vo. Rs. 3.
CoNTENTS: (I) The Acquisition of Territorial Sovereignty by the English
in the Presidency of Bengal. (II) The Tenure of Land in the Bengal l’resi-
dency. (III) The Administration of the Land Revenue. (IV) The Adminis-
, tration of Justice,
MARKBY.—LECTURES ON INDIAN LAW.—BY WILLIAM MARKBY,
M.A. Crown 8vo, cloth. Its. 3.
CoNtENTs : (I) Resumption of Lands held Rent-free. (II) The Revenue
Sale Land of the Permanently Settled Districts. (III) Shekust Pywust, or
Alluvion and Diluvion. (IV-V) The charge of the Person and Property of
Minors. (VI) Of the protection afforded to Purchasers and Mortgagees when
their title is impeached. Appendix—The Permanent Settlement—Glossary.
HOUSE.—THE N.-W. PROVINCES RENT ACT.-BEING ACT XII OF
1881, as amended by subsequent Acts. Iºdited with Introduction, Com-
mentary and Appendices. By H. F. Hous it, C.S. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 10.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
36 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
CIVIL LAW.
ALEXANDER.—INDIAN CASE-LAW ON TORTS. BY THE LATE R.
D. AI, itx AND it it, C.S. An entirely new Edition, Re-written and Enlarged
by R. F. RAMPIN1, C.s. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 8.
CHALMERS.—THE NEGOTIABLE INSTRUMENTS ACT, 1881.-Be-
ing an Act to define and amend the Law relating to Promissory Notes,
Bills of Exchange, and Cheques. Edited by M. D. CHALM krs, M.A.,
Barrister-at-law, author of “A Digest of the Law of Bills of Exchange,”
&c.; and editor of Wilson's “Judicature Acts.” 8vo, cloth.
COLLETT.—THE LAW OF SPECIFIC RELIEF IN INDIA.—Being a
Commentary on Act I of 1877. By CHARLics Collhºtr, late of the Madras
Civil Service, of Lincoln's Inn, Barrister-at-Law, and formerly a Judge
of the High Court at Madras. Second Edition. [In the Press.
RELLEHER.—PRINCIPLES OF SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE AND
MISTAK it. By J. KELLlt HER, C.S. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 8.
“The work is well written, and the rules deduced from the authorities are
generally accurately and always clearly expressed. We can therefore re-
commend the book to all students of English law, not doubting but that they
will find it very useful for their purposes.”—Civil and Military Gazette.
RELLEHER.—MORTGAGE IN THE CIVIL LAW.—Being an outline
of the Principles of the Law of Security, followed by the text of the Digest
of Justinian, with Translation, and Notes; and a translation of the cor-
responding titles of the Indian Code. By J. KELLEHRR, B.C.S., author of
“Possession in the Civil Law.” Royal 8vo. Rs. 10. -
KELLEHER.—POSSESSION IN THE CIVIL LAW.—Abridged from
the Treatise of Won Savigny, to which is added the Text of the Title on
Possession from the Digest. By J. KRLLEH ER, C.s. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 8.
SUTHERLAND.—THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT (IX OF 1872) AND
THE SPRCIFIC RELIRFs Act (I OF 1877). With a Full Commentary. By
D. SUTil Eirí.A.N.D. Second Edition. Royal 8vo, cloth. Rs. 5. s
CASPERSZ.—THE LAW OF ESTOPPEL IN INDIA.—Part I, Estoppel
by Representation. Part II, Estoppel by Judgment. Being Tagore Law
Lectures, 1893. By A. CASP kitsz, Bar.-at-Law, Royal 8vo, cloth. Rs. 12.
THE INDIAN INSOLVENCY ACT.-BEING A REPRINT OF THE LAW as
to Insolvent Debtors in India, Il and 12 Wict. Cap, 21 (June 1848). Rºyal
8vo, sewed. (Uniform with Acts of the Legislative Council.) Re. 1-8.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Civil Procedure, Small Cause Court, etc. 37
GHOSE.--THE LAW OF MORTGAGE IN INDIA, WITH THE TRANSFER
of PRoPickTY ACT AND NOTEs. By 18 Asli Bich Alt1 Gliosit, M.A., D.L.,
Tagore Law Professor, 1876. Second Edition, Revised and Enlarged.
New Edition. [In preparation.
RIVAZ.--THE INDIAN LIMITATION ACT.-WITH NOTES. By the
Hon’ble H. T. lxi vaz, Barrister-at-Law, Judge of the High Court of the
Punjab. Fourth Edition. [In the Press,
SUCCESSION, ADMINISTRATION, ETC.
FORSYTH.—THE PROBATE AND ADMINISTRATION ACT.—Being
Act V of 1881. With Notes. By W. E. H. Forsyth. Edited, with
Index, by F. J. Collisson. Demy 8vo, cloth. Rs. 5.
HENDERSON.—THE LAW OF INTESTATE AND TESTAMENTARY
Succi'ssion IN INDIA ; including the Indian Succession Act (X of 1865
with a Commentary ; and the Parsee Succession Act (XXI of 1865), the
Hindu Wills Act (XXI of 1870), the Probate and Administration Act, &c.
With Notes and Cross References. By GILBERT S. HINDERSON, M.A.,
Barrister-at-Law, and Advocate of the High Court at Calcutta.
HENDERSON.—THE LAW OF TESTAMENTARY DEVISE.—As ad-
ministered in India, or the Law relating to Wills in India. With an Ap-
pendix, containing:—The Indian Succession Act (X of 1865), the Hindu
Wills Act (XXI of 1870), the Probate and Administration Act (V of 1881)
with all amendments, the Probate Administration Act (VI of 1889), and
the Certificate of Succession Act (VII of 1889). By G. S. HićNDERson,
M.A., Barrister-at-Law. (Tagore Law Lectures, 1887.) Royal 8vo, cloth.
lès. 16.
CIVIL PROCEDURE, SMALL CAUSE COURT, ETC.
BROUGHTON.—THE CODE OF CIVIL PROCEDURE.—BEING ACT X
of 1877. With Notes and Appendix. By the Hon’ble L. P. DELves
BROUGHToN, assisted by W. F. AGN lºw and G. S. HRNDIERson. Royal
8vo, cloth. Reduced to 18s. 7. - .
O'KINEALY.—THE CODE OF CIVIL PROCEDURE (ACT XIV OF 1882).
With Notes, Appendices, &c. By the Hon'ble J. O'KINEALY. Fourth
Edition. Royal 8vo. Rs. 16. -
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
38 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
MACEWEN.—THE PRACTICE OF THE PRESIDENCY COURT OF
SMALL CA US its of CALCUTTA, under the Presidency Small Cause Courts
Act (XV of 1882). With Notes and an Appendix. By R. S. T. MAC-
Ew EN, of Lincoln’s Inn, Barrister-at-Law, one of the Judges of the Presi-
dency Court of Small Causes of Calcutta. Thick 8vo. Rs. 10.
RYWES.–PROVINCIAL SMALL CAUSE COURT MANUAL.—By A. E.
RY vis, B.A., Advocate of the High Court, N.-W. P. | In preparation.
POCKET CODE OF CIVIL LAW.—CONTAINING THE CIVIL PROCEDURE
Cod E (Act XIV of 1882), The Court. Fees Act (VII of 1870), The Evidence
Act (I of 1872), The Specific Reliefs Act (I of 1877), The Registration
Act (III of 1877), The Limitation Act (XV of 1877), The Stamp Act (I
of 1879). With Supplement containing the Amending Act of 1888, and
a General Index. Revised 1891. FCap. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 4.
LOCAL SELF-GOVERNMENT.
STERNIDALE.—MUNICIPAL WORK IN INDIA.—OR, HINTS ON SANI-
TATION, General Conservancy and Improvement in Municipalities, Towns,
and Villages. By R. C. STRRNDALI. Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 3.
COLLIER.—THE BENGAL LOCAL SELF-GOVERNMENT HANDBOOK.
—Being ACT III of 1885, B. C., and the General Rules framed thereunder.
With Notes, Hints regarding Procedure, and References to Leading Cases ;
an Appendix, containing the principal Acts referred to, &c., &c. By F.
R. STANLEY Collir it, B.C.s. Third Edition, thoroughly revised and
brought up to date. Crown 8vo. Rs. 5. *
COLLIER.—THE BENGAL MUNICIPAL MANUAL.—BEING B. C. ACT
III of 1884. With Notes and an Appendix containing all the Acts and
Rules relating to Municipalities. By F. R. STANLEY COLLII, R., C.S.
Third ſºdition. [In preparation.
CRIMINAL LAW.
COLLETT.—COMMENTARIES ON THE INDIAN PENAL CODE.-BY
CII ARLEs CoI.LRTT, Barrister-at-Law, 8vo. Rs. 5.
POCKET PENAL, CRIMINAL PROCEDURE, AND POLICE CODES.—
Also the Whipping Act and the Railway Servants' Act, being Acts XLV of
1860 (with Amendments), X of 1882, V of 1861, VI of 1864, and XXXI of
1867. With a General Index. Revised 1892. Feap. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 4.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA,
Criminal Law. 39
AGNEW AND HENDERSON.—THE CODE OF CRIMINAL PROCE-
DURH (ACT X of 1882), together with Rulings, Circular Orders, Notifica-
tions, &c., of all the High Courts in India, and Notifications and Orders : f
the Government of India and the Local Governments. Edited, with
Copious Notes and Full Index, by W. F. AGN Rw, Bar.-at-Law, author of
“A Treatise on the Law of Trusts in India”; and GILBERT S. HEN-
DR RSON, M.A., Bar.-at-Law, author of “A Treatise on the Law of Testa-
mentary and Intestate Succession in India.” Third Edition. Rs. 14.
O’KINEALY.—THE INDIAN PENAL CODE.-BEING ACT XLV OF
1860, and other Laws and Acts of Parliament relating to the Criminal
Courts of India ; containing Rulings on Points of Procedure and Deci-
sions of the High Court of Calcutta. Third Edition. By the Hon’ble
J. O'KIN EALY. Royal 8vo. [1886] Rs. 12.
PHILLIPS.–MANUAL OF INDIAN CRIMINAL LAW.—Being the
Penal Code, Criminal Procedure Code, Evidence, Whipping, General
Clauses, Police, Cattle-Trespass, Extradition Acts, with Penal Clauses of
Legal Practitioners’ Act, Registration, Arms, Stamp, &c., Acts. Fully
Annotated, and containing all Applicable Rulings of all High Courts
arranged under the Appropriate Sections up to date ; also Circular Orders
and Notifications. By H. A. D. PHILLIps, C.s. Second Edition. Thick
crown 8vo. Rs. 10. . |
PHILLIPS.–COMPARATIVE CRIMINAL JURISPRUDENCE.-Show-
ing the Law, Procedure, and Case-Law of other Countries, arranged
under the corresponding sections of the Indian Codes. By H. A. D.
PHILLIPS, B.C.S. Vol. I, Crimes and Punishments. Vol. II, Procedure
and Police. Demy 8vo, cloth. Rs. 12.
PRINSEP.—CODE OF CRIMINAL PROCEDURE (ACT X of 1882), and
- other Laws and Rules of Practice relating to Procedure in the Criminal
Courts of British India. With Notes. By the Hon’ble H. T. PRINske,
Judge, High Court, Calcutta. Tenth Edition, brought up to June 1892.
Royal 8vo. Rs. 12. -
TOYNBEE.—THE WILLAGE CHAUKIDARI MANUAL.—BEING ACT
VI (B.C.) of 1870, as amended by Acts I (B. C.) of 1871 and 1886. With
Notes, Appendices, &c. By G. Toy NBRiº, C.s., Magistrate of Hooghly
Second Edition, Revised. Crown 8vo, cloth. Re. 1. º
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
40 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
SWIN HOE.—THE CASE NOTED PENAL CODE, AND OTHER ACTS.
Act XLV of 1860 as amended with references to all leported Cases
decided under each section. Crown 8vo, cloth. Its. 7.
EVIDENCE.
FIELD.—THE LAW OF EVIDENCE IN BRITISH INDIA.—Being a
Treatise on the Indian Evidence Act as amended by Act XVIII of 1872.
By the Hon'ble C. D. Filtln, M.A., LL.D. Fifth Edition. Rs. 18.
STEL’HEN.—THE PRINCIPLES OF JUDICIAL EVIDENCE. – An Intro-
duction to the Indian Evidence Act, 1872. By Sir JAMEs Fitz-JAMKs
STEPHEN, formerly Legislative Member of the Supreme Council of
India. A New Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 3.
MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE.
LYON.—MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE FOR INDIA.—By J. B. LYON,
F.C.s., F.C., Brigade-Surgeon, Professor of Medical Jurisprudence, Grant
Medical College, Bombay. The Legal Matter revised by J. D. INvitit A-
RITY, Barrister-at-Law. Second Edition. Illustrated. 8vo. Rs. 16.
GRIBBLE.-OUTLINES OF MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE FOR INDIA.
By J. D. B. Git IBBLic, M.C.S. (Retired), PATRICK IIK 11 IR, M.D., F.R.C.S.K.,
Third Edition, Revised, Enlarged, and Annotated. Demy 8vo. Rs. 5-8.
DIGEST.S.
SUTHERLAND.—THE DIGEST OF INDIAN LAW REPORTS.—A
Compendium of the Rulings of the High Court of Calcutta from 1862, and
of the Privy Council from 1831 to 1876. By D. SUTHERLAND, Bar-,
rister-at-Law. Imp 8vo, Rs. 8. Vol. II, 1876 to 1890, thick cloth
imp. 8vo. Rs. 12. .
WOODMAN.—A DIGEST OF THE INDIAN LAW REPORTS and of the
Reports of the cases heard in appeal by the Privy Council, 1887 to 1889.
Edited by J. W. WooDMAN. Super-royal 8vo.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Hindu and Mahommedan Law. 41
HIN DU AND MAHOMM EDAN LAW.
AMEER ALI. —THE STUDENT'S HAND-BOOK OF MAHOMIMEDAN
Law. By the Hon’ble SY ED AM 1.1.1: A LI, c. I.E., author of “The Law
relating to Gifts, Trusts, &c.” “Personal Law of the Mahommedans,”
&c., &c. Crown 8vo. Second Edition, Revised. Rs. 3.
AMEER ALI.—MAHOMMEDAN LAW, VOL. I.-BY THE HON’BLE
SYED AMEK R ALI, C. I. K., Barrister-at-Law. Containing the Law relat-
ing to Gifts, Wakfs, Wills, Pre-emption, and Bailment. With an Intro-
duction on Mahommedan Jurisprudence and Works on Law. (Being the
Second Edition of Tagore Law Lectures, 1884. Royal 8vo, cloth. Its. 16.
AMIEER ALI.-MAHOMMEDAN LAW, VOL. II.-BY THE HON’BLE
SY 1. D AM K K R A LI, C.I.R., Barrister-at-Law. Containing the Law
Relating to Succession and Status, according to the Hanafi, Mālikī,
Shāfei, Shiah and Mutazala schools, with Explanatory Notes and an
Introduction on the Islámic system of Law. Being a Second Edition
of “The Personal Law of the Mohammedans.” Revised. Royal 8vo,
cloth. Rs. 14.
These two volumes from a complete Digest of the Mohammedan Law.
COWELL.-HINDU LAW.—BEING A TREATISE ON THE LAW ADMINIS-
Tititiºn EXCLUSIVELY To HIN pus by the British Courts in India. (Tagore
Law Lectures, 1870 and 1871.) By Hicit BitrT Cow ELL, Barrister-at-Law.
Royal 8vo, cloth. Lectures, 1870, Rs. 12; Lectures, 1871, Rs. 8. -
JOLLY.--THE HINDU LAW OF INHERITANCE, PARTITION, AND
ADOPTION according to the Smritis. By Prof. Julius Joi.LY, of Wurtz-
burg. (Tagore Law Lectures, 1883.) Royal 8vo. Rs. 10.
RUMSEY.-AL SIRAJIYYAH.—OR. THE MAHOMMEDAN LAW OF IN-
Hºlt ITANCE, with Notes and Appendix. By ALMA R1c RUMSEY. Second
Edition. Revised, with Additions. Crown 8vo. Rs. 4-8.
SIROMANI.-A COMMENTARY ON HINDU LAW OF INHERITANCE,
Succession, Partition, Adoption, Marriage, Stridhan, and Testamentary
Disposition. By Pundit Jog ºn Dro NATH BHATTACH AltJEE, M.A., B.L.
Second Edition. 8vo. Rs. 16. 4
WILSON.—INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF ANGLO-MAHOM-
MidAN LAW. By Sir Rola ND KNIGH r Wilson, Barr., M.A., L.M.M.,
late Reader in Indian Law to the University of Cambridge, author of
“Modern English Law.” 8vo, cloth. Rs. 9. « - -
WILSON.—A DIGEST OF ANGLO-MUHAMMADAN LAW.—Being an
attempt to set forth, in the form of a Code, the rules now actually
administered to Muhammadans only by the Civil Courts of British India,
with explanatory Notes and full reference to Modern Case-Law, as well
as to the ancient authorities. [In the Press.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
42 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
LAW MANUALS, ETC.
COWELL.--THE HISTORY AND CONSTITUTION OF THE COURTS
AND LEGISLATIVE AUTHolt ITIF's IN INDIA. Second Edition, levised.
By HERBERT Cowrill. 8vo, cloth. [1884] Rs. 6.
HAND-BOOK OF INDIAN LAW,-A POPULAR AND CONCISE STATE-
MENT OF Til it LAW generally in force in British India, designed for non-
legal people, on subjects relating to Person and Property. By a Barris-
ter-at-Law and Advocate of the High Court at Calcutta. [In the Press.
CARNEGY.—KACHAHRITECHNICALITIES.—A GLOSSARY OF TERMS,
Rural, Official and General, in daily use in the Courts of Law, and in
illustration of the Tenures, Customs, Arts, and Manufactures of Hindu-
stan. By P. CA RNR GY. Second Edition, 8vo, cloth. Rs. 9.
CURRIE.--THE INDIAN LAW EXAMINATION MANUAL.—BY FEN-
DALL CURRIR, of Lincoln's Inn, Barrister-at-Law. Fourth Edition, Re-
vised. Demy 8vo. [1892] Rs. 5.
CoNTRNTS:—Introduction—Hindoo Law—Mahommedan Law—Indian Penal
Code—Code of Civil Procedure—Evidence Act—Limitation Act—Succession
Act—Contract Act—lregistration Act—Stamp and Court-Fees Acts—Mort-
gage—Code of Criminal Procedure—The Fasements Act—The Trust Act—
The Transfer of Property Act—The Negotiable Instruments Act.
LEGISLATIVE ACTS OF THE GOVERNOR-GENERAL OF INDIA IN
Cous CIL of 1893. With Table of Contents and Index. Itoyal 8vo,
cloth, Rs. 2-8; Previous Volumes available.
DONOGH.—THE STAMP LAW OF BRITISH INDIA.—As constituted
by the Indian Stamp Act (I of 1879), Rulings and Circular Orders,
Notifications, Resolutions, Rules, and Orders, together with Schedules
of all the Stamp Duties chargeable on Instruments in India from the
earliest times. Edited, with Notes and complete Index, by WALT1cit R.
DoNogh, M.A., of the Inner Temple, Barrister-at-Law. Demy 8vo,
cloth, gilt. [1886] With Supplement. Rs. 8.
SUPPLEMENT cost AINING AMENDMENTs, annotated to June 1890. As. 8.
GRIMLEY.—AN INCOME-TAX MANUAL.—Being Act II of 1886
With Notes. By W. H. GRIMLEY, B.A., C.s., Commissioner of Income-
Tax, Bengal. Royal 8vo, Rs. 8-8. Interleaved, Rs. 4.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Thacker, Spink & Co.'s Publications. 43
INDIAN MEDICAL GAZETTE.
A Record of Medicine, Surgery and Public Health, and of
General Medical Intelligence, Indian and European.
Edited by W. J. SIMPSON, M.D.
Published monthly. Subscription Rs. 18 per annum. Single copy Rs. 2.
The Indian Medical Gazette was established Twenty-eight years ago,
and has earned for itself a world-wide reputation by its solid con-
tributions to Tropical Medicine and Surgery. It is the Sole repre-
sentative medium for recording the work and experience of the Medical
Profession in India ; and its very numerous Exchanges with all the .
leading Medical Journals in Great Britain and America enable it
not only to diffuse this information broadcast throughout the world,
but also to cull for its Indian readers, from an unusual variety of
sources, all information which has any practical bearing on medical
works in India. - !
The Indian Medical Gazette is indispensable to every member of
the Medical Profession in India, who wishes to keep himself abreast
of medical progress, for it brings together and fixes the very special
knowledge which is only to be obtained by long experience and close
observation in India. In this way it constitutes itself a record of
permanent value for reference, and a journal which ought to be in
the library of every medical man in India, or connected with that
country. The Transactions of the Calcutta, Medical Society, which meets
monthly, is printed in earlemso, and is a very valuable feature in the
Gazette.
The Gazette covers altogether different ground from The Lancet
and British Medical Journal, and in no way competes with these for
general information, although it chronicles the most important item .
of European Medical Intelligence. The whole aim of the Gazette is
to make itself of special use and value to Medical Officers in India and
to assist and support them in the performance of their difficult duties.
It is specially devoted to the best interests of The Medical Services,
and its long-established reputation and authority enable it to com-
mand serious attention in the advocacy of any desirable reform or sub-
stantial grievance. -
The Contributors to the Indian Medical Gazette comprise the most
eminent and representative men in the profession. -
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA,
44 Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications.
THE INDIAN ENGINEER.
AN ILLUSTRATED WIEEKLY JOURNAL
." - FOR
Engineers, Merchants, Buyers of Machinery & Hardware, and
others interested in the Engineering and allied professions.
The Oldest Engineering Journal in India.
“THE INDIAN ENGINEER" contains the latest
and most authentic information on all subjects con-
nected with engineering enterprise ; it includes il-
lustrations and descriptions of important works in
progress or completed. Provincial and Foreign
Industries and News-Letters ; Railway news, en-
terprise and statistics; Leading Articles on subjects
of the day. Miscellaneous matters, scientific and
useful.
Subscribed to by Engineers both Civil and Military;
Municipalities, Railways, Merchants, Architects, Con-
tractors, &c., &c.
RATES OF SUBSCRIPTION
Including a copy of The Indian Engineer’s Diary and Reference Book.
Yearly, including postage tº e > ... Rs. 20
Half-yearly, ditto tº e ſº ... Rs. 11
Quarterly, ditto te e c ... Rs. 6
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Thacker, Spink & Co.'s Publications. 45
THE JOURNAL OF THE
PHOTOGRAPHIC SOCIETY OF INDIA.
AN ILLUSTRATED MONTHLY JOURNAL.
Invaluable to all lovers of the Art of Photography.
A medium for the earliest information on all discoveries in
Photography, Photographic Literature, Experience and News.
The Journal has a large and increasing circulation, is affi-
liated with Clubs or Amateur Societies all over India, Ceylon,
Burma and the Straits Settlements, and has an extensive
circulation out of India.
Each number of the Journal is illustrated with a Picture
reproduced by a photo-mechanical process. -
SUBSCRIPTION.—RS. 5 PER ANNUM,
Members of the Society, free.
THE RACING CALENDAR.
A FORTNIGEITLY CALEND AIR.
Published in accordance with the Rules of Racing, under
the authority of the Stewards of the Calcutta Turf Club.
A Record of all Race Performances in India, Racing Fix-
tures and Racing information, Meetings of the Calcutta Turf
Club, Registration of Colours, Assumed Names of Owners,
Jockeys' Licences, Unpaid Forfeit List, List of Defaulters,
Change in Horses' Names, Horses and Ponies classed, aged and
measured, and all information relating to Racing.
ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION Rs. 12.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
46 Thacier Spink and Co.'s Publications.
STANDARD WORKS ON INDIA.
THE JOURNAL OF INDIAN ART.-With full-page Coloured Illustra-
tions, Folio 15 by 11. Parts 1 to 4 1 ready. lie. 2 each.
THE SACRED BOOKS OF THE EAST.—Translated by various Oriental
Scholars. Edited by F. MAX MULLER. List of Polumes on application.
THE FAUNA OF BRITISH INDIA.—Including Ceylon and Burma.
Published under the authority of the Secretary of State for India. Edited
by W. T. BLAN Foºd, F. R.S., and Illustrated.
Mammalia. By W. T. BL MN Ford, F. R.s. ... 20s.
Fishes, 2 vols. By Dr. Fit A N C is DAY ... 40s.
Birds, vols. I and II. 3y F. W. OATES ... 35s.
keptilia and Batrachia. By G. A. Bou LENGER ... 20s.
Moths, 2 vols. By F. II AMIPson ... 40s.
THE INDIAN MUTINY, 1857-58.-SELECTIONS FROM THE LETTERS, DE-
SPATCHES, and other State Papers preserved in the Military Department
of the Government of India. Edited by GEORGE W. FoEREST, B.A.,
Director of Records of the Government of India. With a Map and
Plans. Vol. I. Delhi. Royal Svo. Rs. 10.
WARREN HASTINGS.—SELECTION FROM THE LETTERS, DESPATCHES,
and other State Papers preserved in the Foreign Department of the
Government of India, 1772-1785. Edited by GEO ligE W. Fol; it lºst, B. A.
3 vols. Feap., cloth. Rs. 12.
THE ADMINISTRATION OF WARREN HASTINGS, 1772-1785.—Re-
viewed and Illustrated from Original Documents. By G. W. For REST,
B.A. 8vo, cloth. Rs. 4. - -
ANNALS OF RURAL BEN GAL.-BY W. W. HUNTER, C.I.E., LL.D,
8vo. Its. 6.
ILLUSTRATION OF SOME OF THE GRASSES OF THE SOUTHERN
PUNJAB.—Being Photo-Lithograph Illustrations of some of the principal
Grasses found at Hissar. With short descriptive letter-press. By
WILLIAM Colds TREAM, B.A., B.C.S. Illustrated with 39 Plates. Demy
folio. Its. 16.
ILLUSTRATIONS OF INDIAN FIELD SPORTS.—Selected and Repro-
duced from the Coloured lºngravings first published in 1807 after designs
by Captain THOMAS WILLIAMSON, Bengal Army. Small oblong, hand-
some cloth cover, l’rinted in colours. Its. 9.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Constable's Oriental Miscellany. ... • 47
i.
CONSTABLE'S ORIENTAL MISCELLANY.
BERNIER'S TRAVELS IN THE MOGUL EMPIRE.-An entirely new
edition, with a Frontispiece printed in 18 colours on Japanese paper, other
Illustrations, and Three Maps. By Al:CHIBA LD CONSTABLE, Mem. As.
Soc., Bengal, F.S.A. Scot. Crown 8vo. pp. liv, 500. Rs. 6. -
POPULAR READINGS IN SCIENCE.-By JOHN GALL, M.A., LL.B.,
late Professor of Mathematics and Physics, Canning College, Lucknow,
and DAVID RoRº RTSON, M.A., LL.B., B.Sc. With 56 Diagrams, a Glossary
of Technical Terms, and an Index, Crown 8vo. pp. 468. Its. 5.
AURENG-ZEBE : A TRAGEDY.—By JOHN DRYDEN ; and Book II of
Tilk Cli Acid : a Poem by WILLIAM SOM it itv ILR. Edited, with Biograph-
ical Memoirs and Copious Notes, by K. DKIGHTON, B.A., editor of
‘Select Plays of Shakespeare.” With a Portrait of Dryden, and a Coloured
Reproduction of an Indian Painting of the Elmperor Akbar Deer-stalking.
Crown 8vo. pp. xiii, 222. Its. 5. - -
LETTERS FROM A MAHRATTA CAMP.-By THOS. D. BROUGHTON.
A new edition, with an Introduction by the Itight Hon. Sir M. E. GRANT
DUFF, G.C.S.I., F.R.S. Notes, Coloured and other Illustrations, very full
Index, and a Map. Rs. 6.
STUDIES IN MOHAMMEDANISM.–Historical and Doctrinal, with a
Chapter on Islam in England. By Joh N J. Pool. With a frontispiece
and Index. Crown 8vo, cloth. Rs. 6.
“As a popular text-book,' dealing with some of the most picturesque
aspects of Islam, it deserves more than ordinary attention.”—Times.
====-
THE GOLDEN BOOK OF INDIA.—A Biographical and Statistical Direc-
tory of the Ruling Princes, Chiefs, Nobles, and Titled and Decorated
Personages of the Indian Empire; the dates of their birth and succession
to the guddi; a concise account of their immediate predecessors and all
the deeds of honour and valour of their house and family. Imp., red
cloth, gilt. Rs. 35. -
BOMBAY AND WESTERN INDIA.—-BY JAMES DOUGLAS. IDedicated
to the Duko, and Duchess of Connaught. With Maps and Plans, 13
full-page Photogravures, Collotype Reproductions from Old Documents,
one Coloured IReproduction of an Old Picture, and over 100 other Text
Illustrations, 2 vols. Super-royal 8vo, cloth, extra, gilt top. Its, 35,
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
48" Thacker, Spink and Co.'s Publications,
THACKER, SPINK & CO’S UNIFORM SERIES.
ILLUSTRATED AND ELEGANTLY BOUND.
A NATURALIST ON THE PROWL. By EHA. Profusely Illustrated
from Photographs and Sketches. [In the Press,
HINDU MYTHOLOGY: WEDIC AND PURANIC.—By the Rev. W. J.
WILKINs, of the London Missionary Society, Calcutta. Profusely Illus-
trated. Rs, 7.8.
THE TRIBES ON MY FRONTIER.—An Indian Naturalist's Foreign
Policy. By Eli A. With 50 Illustrations by F. C. M. Acrae. Imp. 16mo,
Fourth Edition. Rs. 7.
A NATURAL HISTORY OF THE MAMMALIA OF INDIA, BURMAH,
AND City LoN. By 18. A. STR it NDA Lit, F. R.G.S., F.z.s., &c. With 170
Illustrations. Imp. 16mo. Rs. 10.
HANDBOOK TO THE FERNS OF INDIA, CEYLON, AND THE MALAY
PENINsula. By Colonel R. H. BEDDOME. With 300 Illustrations by
the author. Imp. 16mo. Rs. 10. &
LAYS OF IND.—By ALIPEI CHEEM. Comic, Satirical, and Descriptive
Poems illustrative of Anglo-Indian Life. Seventh Edition. With 70 Illus-
trations. Cloth, elegant gilt edges. Rs. 7-8.
RIDING : ON THE FLAT AND ACROSS COUNTRY. —A Guide to
Practical Horsemanship. By Captain M. H. HAYKs. Illustrated by
STURGkss and J. H. Oswa Lib-BRow N. Third Edition. Revised and En-
larged. Imp. 16mo. Rs. 7-8.
THE HORSE-VWOMAN.—AN IDLUSTRATED GUIDE TO SIDE-SADDLE
RIDING. By Mrs. HAYES, and Edited by Capt. M. H. HAYES. Uniform
with “ Riding: on the Flat and Across Country.” Imp. 16mo. Rs. 7-8.
RIDING FOR LADIES, WITH HINTS ON THE STABLE.—A LADY’s
HoRsk Book. By Mrs. Powick O’DonoGHult. With 75 Illustrations by
A. CHANT1: EY CorboulD. Rs. 7-8.
INDIAN RACING REMINISCENCES.—Being Entertaining Narratives
and Anecdotes of Men, Horses, and Sport. By Captain M. H. HAYEs.
Illustrated with Portraits and Engravings. Rs. 6.
BEHIND THE BUNGALOW.-BY EHA, author of “Tribes on my
Frontier.” With 42 lllustrations by the Illustrator of “The l ribes on
My Frontier.” Fourth Edition. With Additional Illustrations. Imp.
l6mo Rs. 5.
THACKER, SPINK AND CO., CALCUTTA.
Öſte Järjeeling #1tgical Jepot.
F. BRAHAM & CO., Post Office Road.
PIANOFORTES BY COLLARD AND COLLARD, London ;
J. BROADWOOD AND SONS, ſuondon ;
SCH ! E D NM EYE F &, SO E H NE, STUTTGART 3
PLEYEL AND WOLFE, Paris.
PIANOFORTESTUNED AND REPAIRED,
TVVT O TER, IEC G- TUT AL TEC, AL INT TIE TE T).
PIAN OFORTES FOR SALE OR HIRE.
MUSIC AND MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS OF EVERY DESCRIPTION.
C.A.T.A.T.C.G.T.J.E.S E'EEE-
THACKER, SPINK & CO.,
5 & 6, Government Place, Calcutta,
B00KSELLERS, PUBLISHERS, STATIONERS,
PRINTERS, etc.
GUIDE BOOKS TO THE PRINCIPAL TOWNS.
Murray's Guide Books to India and all parts of the World.
MAPS, RAILWAY TIME TABLES.
STANDARD WORKS ON INDIA, (D)
MAXWELL & CO.,
CHEMISTS & DRUGGISTS,
Invite special attention to the following pates, the quality
guaranteed as the best procurable.
PURE AERATED WATERS
Made from Pure Wafer obtained by the AVezy Process
through the Patent Charcoal Ariſters.
Per Doz.
PHOSPHOZONE, the New Indian non-Alcoholic Rs. As.
Beverage tº º tº tº e º . . . 2 O
AERATED, Plain (Treble-Aerated) ... o 8
SODA WATER 3 5 ſº o 8
GINGERADE (Real) 5 * I 4
I,EMONADE 55 I 4
TONIC (QUININE) 32 I 4
GINGER ALE º 33 I 4
ORANGEADE 53 I 4
NECTARA DE 5 J I 4
SELTZER WATER 55 2 O
POTASH 55 } } 2 O
LITHIA 35 5 5 2 O
CHALYBEATE TONIC , 2 O
AVof less than Six Bottles of each kind supplied at the above rates.
M.B.—Soda Water Bottles charged and allowed for at the
rate of Rs. 3 per dozen.
AAA/EAEZ/AWG,
MAXWELL & CO.’S.
NEURALGIC TINCTURE,
For Neuralgia, Tic-doloreux, Toothache and other Nerve Affections.
Azz Aottles, A's. 2.
AMMONIATED SOLUTION OF QUININE.
A recognized Specific for Colds and lafluenza.
Azz Božtles, A’e. I ared 2.
GAJEPUT, EMBROGATION,
For Rheumatism, Sprains, Chilblains, &c,
In Bottles, Re. I and 2.
B O R A C I C C R E A V1,
For healing old Sores and Leech Bites.
An Poás, A’e. I.
CORN SOLVENT.
A well-known cure for the most obstimate Corns.
An Bottles, Æe, I.
! V! \Aſ WE
PICK-ME-UP.
A delightful Carminative Stimulant in all cases of Depression.
An Aottles, Æe. I-8. -
AXA A' / Z/2Z, ZAVG.

!!! DRUM DRUID ||
HOTEL
SITUATED IN THE CENTRE OF THE STATION
AT THE FOOT OF
OBSERVATORY HILL
PONIES, DANDIES, GUIDES AVAILABLE
FOR EXCURSIONS TO
SUNDUKPH00, SENECHAL, TIGER HILL, ETC.
—-º-
---
£u IS IN E Exceptio NALLY good.
—º-
-
A. LORD,
PROPRIAETOR.